Mercedes Benz C Class 2010 Owner Manual

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 1
d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1
ProCarManuals.com
C-Class
Operator’s Manual
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 2
Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

warning or procedure which is
Trademarks: continued on the next page.
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Display Text in displays, such as the control
Automotive Corp.
system, are printed in the type
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of shown here.
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® is a registered trademark of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RLogic 7® is a registered trademark of
Harman International Industries,
Incorporated.
RMicrosoft® is a registered trademark of
Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
ProCarManuals.com
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks

of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
RWindows media® is a registered trademark
of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and
other countries.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 1
Our company and staff congratulate you on

the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
ProCarManuals.com
RPlease follow the recommendations

contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
2045845381 É2045845381zËÍ
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 2
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 3
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 69
Operation ........................................... 221
Practical hints ................................... 267
Technical data ................................... 331

ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 4
4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Side impact ...................................... 41

Window curtain ................................ 42
4-ETS Air conditioning refrigerant and
see ETS/4-ETS lubricant ............................................. 354
4MATIC Air distribution .................................. 194
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Air pressure
911 Emergency calls ........................ 173 see Tire inflation pressure
Air pressure (tires) ............................ 250
A Air recirculation mode ...................... 195
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 61 Air volume .......................................... 194
Indicator lamp ................................ 298 Alarm system
Messages in the multifunction see Anti-theft systems
display ................................... 280, 281 All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 183
Accessory weight .............................. 250 Alternator
Accidents ........................................... 105 Messages in the multifunction
Air bags ........................................... 37 display ........................................... 290
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 212 Alternator (Technical data)
ProCarManuals.com
Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 173 see Vehicle specification

NECK-PRO active front head AMG menu ......................................... 123
restraints ........................................ 52 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 357
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Antilock Brake System
see Headlamps see ABS
Adaptive Brake .................................... 62 Anti-theft systems ............................... 66
Additives Anti-theft alarm system ................... 67
Engine oil ....................................... 353 Immobilizer ...................................... 66
Gasoline ......................................... 355 Aquaplaning
Address change ................................... 21 see Hydroplaning
Advanced Tire Pressure Armrest, front
Monitoring System (Advanced Storage compartments .................. 206
TPMS) ................................................. 234 Armrest, rear
Messages in the multifunction Storage compartment .................... 206
display ........................................... 277 Ashtrays ............................................. 209
Air bags ................................................ 37 Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 250
Emergency call upon deployment . . 212 Audio menu ........................................ 126
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Audio system ..................................... 136
Front passenger front air bag off Adjusting volume ........................... 144
indicator lamp (Canada Audio and telephone operation ...... 136
only) ........................................ 46, 307 Audio AUX mode ............................ 166
Front passenger front air bag off Bluetooth® settings ....................... 147
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 308 CD mode ........................................ 158
Knee bag .......................................... 40 Components .................................. 137
Messages in the multifunction MP3 mode ..................................... 158
display ........................................... 272 Operating safety ............................ 137
OCS (Occupant Classification Radio operation ............................. 148
System) ........................................... 42 Satellite radio ................................ 152
Pelvis ............................................... 41 Switching on and off ...................... 144
Safety guidelines ............................. 39
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 5
Index 5
System settings ............................. 147 Battery, Vehicle ................................. 321

Telephone ...................................... 167 Charging ........................................ 323
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 87 Jump starting ................................. 323
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 135 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 91 display ........................................... 290
Automatic interior lighting control .... 95 Bead (tire) .......................................... 250
Automatic locking when driving ...... 135 Beverage holders
Automatic shift program .................. 111 see Cup holders
Automatic transmission ................... 108 Bluetooth® settings .......................... 147
Automatic shift program ................ 111 Brake Assist System
Gear range indicator ...................... 111 see BAS
Gear ranges ................................... 111 Brake fluid
Gear selector lever ........................ 108 Checking level ............................... 228
Hill-start assist system .................. 183 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown ....................................... 110 display ........................................... 282
Kickdown (manual shift program) . . 115 Brake lamps
Manual shift program ..................... 113 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
ProCarManuals.com
One-touch gearshifting .................. 112 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Program mode indicator ................ 112 Brake pads
Program mode selector switch Messages in the multifunction
(automatic shift program) .............. 111 display ........................................... 279
Program mode selector switch Brakes ................................................ 255
(manual shift program) .......... 113, 114 High-performance brake system .... 256
Shifting procedure ......................... 109 Parking brake ................................ 105
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 112 Warning lamp ................................. 298
Transmission position indicator ..... 109 Break-in period .................................. 222
Transmission positions .................. 109 Bulbs
AUX socket ........................................ 166 see Replacing bulbs
Axle oils .............................................. 351
C
B
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23
BabySmart™ California retail buyers and
Air bag deactivation system ............. 46 lessees, important notice for ............. 21
Self-test ........................................... 47 Calls (phone) .............................. 128, 167
Back button ....................................... 141 Can holders
Backrest see Cup holders
see Seats Capacities and recommended
Backup lamps fuel/lubricants .................................. 349
Messages in the multifunction Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 203
display ........................................... 292 Carpets, cleaning .............................. 265
Replacing bulbs ............................. 314 CD player ............................................ 158
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 250 Center console
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 61 Lower part ....................................... 32
Batteries, SmartKey Upper part ....................................... 31
Checking condition .......................... 73 Central locking
Replacing ....................................... 312 Automatic ................................ 74, 135
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 6
6 Index
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75 COMAND system

SmartKey ......................................... 70 see separate COMAND system
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 75 operating instructions
Certification label .............................. 332 Combination gauge ............................. 28
Children in the vehicle Combination switch ............................ 93
Air bags ........................................... 37 Compass ............................................ 210
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation Control system .................................. 118
system ............................................. 46 Multifunction display ..................... 120
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 59 Multifunction steering wheel ......... 118
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Resetting to factory settings .......... 130
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 58 Control system menus ...................... 121
Indicator lamp, front passenger AMG ............................................... 123
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46 Audio ............................................. 126
Indicator lamp, front passenger Navi ............................................... 126
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Service ........................................... 129
Infant and child restraint systems .... 55 Settings ......................................... 130
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – Telephone ...................................... 128
ProCarManuals.com
LATCH-type) ..................................... 58 Trip ................................................ 121

OCS (Occupant Classification Control system submenus
System) ........................................... 42 Convenience .................................. 135
Override switch ................................ 59 Instrument cluster ......................... 131
Safety notes ..................................... 54 Lighting .......................................... 133
Tether anchorage points .................. 57 Time/Date ..................................... 132
Top tether ........................................ 57 Vehicle ........................................... 135
Child safety Convenience submenu
see Children in the vehicle Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 136
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Fold-in function for exterior rear
(ISOFIX) view mirrors ................................... 136
see Children in the vehicle Coolant
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 357
cleaning .............................................. 266 Capacities ...................................... 351
Cigarette lighter ................................ 209 Checking level ............................... 227
Clear button ....................................... 142 Messages in the multifunction
Climate control system display ........................................... 288
Air conditioning ............................. 191 Temperature gauge ........................ 117
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 354 Warning lamp ................................. 305
Air distribution ............................... 194 Coolant temperature gauge ............... 28
Air recirculation mode ................... 195 Corner-illuminating front fog
Air volume ..................................... 194 lamps .................................................... 94
Automatic mode ............................ 192 Cruise control .................................... 180
Deactivating system ...................... 191 Activating ....................................... 181
Front defroster .............................. 194 Canceling ....................................... 181
Maximum cooling MAX COOL ........ 195 Changing the set speed ................. 182
Temperature .................................. 192 Last stored speed .......................... 183
Clock ............................................ 29, 132 Lever .............................................. 181
Cockpit ................................................. 27 Messages in the multifunction
Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 250 display ........................................... 275
Collapsible wheel chock ................... 269
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 7
Index 7
Resume function ............................ 183 Messages in the multifunction

Setting current speed .................... 181 display ........................................... 286
Cup holders ........................................ 207 Opening from inside ......................... 74
Curb weight ....................................... 250 Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 216
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 215
Customer Relations Department ....... 23 Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 309
DOT (Department of
D Transportation) .................................. 250
Drinking and driving ......................... 254
Dashboard Driving
see Instrument cluster Abroad ........................................... 257
Data recording ..................................... 23 Hydroplaning ................................. 257
Date, Setting ...................................... 133 Instructions ........................... 101, 254
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 91 In winter ........................................ 253
Switching on or off ......................... 133 Problems ....................................... 104
Deep water Safety systems ................................ 60
see Standing water Systems ......................................... 180
Defogging (windshield) ..................... 195
ProCarManuals.com
Through standing water ................. 257

Defroster Driving and parking
Front (Climate control system) ...... 194 Safety notes .................................. 101
Rear window .................................. 196 Driving off .................................. 103, 257
Delayed shut-off Driving safety systems ....................... 60
Exterior lamps ................................ 134 ABS .................................................. 61
Interior lighting .............................. 135 Adaptive Brake ................................ 62
Department of Transportation BAS .................................................. 61
see DOT EBP .................................................. 62
Difficulties
ESP® ................................................ 62
While driving .................................. 104 ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 63
With starting .................................. 102 Driving systems
Dimensions (vehicle)
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 183
see Vehicle specification Cruise control ................................ 180
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 242 Dynamic handling package with
Displays sport driving mode ......................... 184
Maintenance service indicator ....... 259 Hill-start assist system .................. 183
Messages in the multifunction Parktronic system .......................... 185
display ........................................... 270 Rear view camera .......................... 188
Multifunction display ..................... 120 Driving tips, automatic
Symbol messages .......................... 279 transmission ...................................... 110
Text messages ............................... 272 Dynamic handling package with
Trip computer ................................ 121 sport driving mode ............................ 184
Vehicle status message memory ... 129
Vehicle system settings ................. 130
E
Door control panel .............................. 33
Door handles ........................................ 33 E85 (ethanol fuel) .............................. 355
Doors Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 85, 136
Child safety locks ............................ 59 EBP (Electronic Brake
Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71 Proportioning) ...................................... 62
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 8
8 Index
Electrical system Messages in the multifunction

Improper work on or display ........................................... 291
modifications ................................... 22 Oil dipstick ..................................... 226
Power outlets ................................. 210 Recommended engine oils and oil
Electrical system (Technical data) filter ............................................... 353
see Vehicle specification ESP® (Electronic Stability
Electronic Stability Program Program) .............................................. 62
see ESP® ETS/4-ETS ....................................... 63
Electronic Traction System Messages in the multifunction
see ETS/4-ETS display ........................... 280, 281, 283
Emergency, in case of Warning lamp ................................. 302
First aid kit ..................................... 268 ETD (Emergency Tensioning
Flat tire .......................................... 317 Device) ................................................. 52
Hazard warning flasher .................... 93 Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 214 Ethanol fuel (E85) .............................. 355
Towing the vehicle ......................... 325 ETS/4-ETS (Electronic Traction
Emergency calls System) ................................................ 63
ProCarManuals.com
Tele Aid .......................................... 212 Express operation

Telephone ...................................... 173 Panorama roof ............................... 200
Emergency operations Power windows ................................ 98
Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ........... 216 Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 196
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 215 Exterior lamp switch ........................... 90
Trunk lid, emergency release ........... 76 Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 86
Emergency Tensioning Device Fold-in function ................................ 88
see ETD Parking position ............................... 87
Emission control ............................... 258 Power-folding ................................... 88
Information label ............................ 333 Switching fold-in function on or
System warranties ........................... 20 off .................................................. 136
Engine Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26
Break-in recommendations ............ 222
Cleaning ......................................... 262 F
Compartment ................................ 224
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 50
Malfunction indicator lamp ............ 305
First aid kit ......................................... 268
Messages in the multifunction
Flat tire ............................................... 317
display ........................................... 288
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 321
Number .......................................... 333
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 318
Starting .......................................... 101
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 318
Turning off ..................................... 106
Spare wheel ........................... 317, 349
Engine (Technical data)
Flexible Fuel Vehicles ....................... 355
see Vehicle specification
Floormats ........................................... 220
Engine coolant
Fluids
see Coolant
Engine oil Automatic transmission fluid ......... 350
Brake fluid ..................................... 351
Adding ........................................... 226
Capacities ...................................... 349
Additives ........................................ 353
Engine coolant ............................... 351
Checking level ............................... 226
Engine oil ....................................... 350
Consumption ................................. 225
Manual transmission oil ................. 350
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 9
Index 9
Power steering fluid ....................... 351 G

Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 352 Garage door opener .................... 32, 216
Fog lamps ............................................. 92 Gasoline
Messages in the multifunction see Fuel
display ................................... 292, 294 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 251
Fold-in function for exterior rear Gear range ......................................... 111
view mirrors ........................................ 88 Indicator ........................................ 111
Four-wheel drive Limiting .......................................... 112
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Shifting into optimal ...................... 113
Front air bags Gear selector lever ............................ 108
see Air bags Cleaning ......................................... 265
Front axle oil ...................................... 351 Gearshift pattern ........................... 108
Front lamps Lock ...................................... 102, 108
see Headlamps Shifting procedure ......................... 109
Front passenger front air bag ............ 40 Transmission position indicator ..... 109
Messages in the multifunction Transmission positions .................. 109
Gearshift lever ................................... 107
ProCarManuals.com
display ........................................... 272

Front passenger front air bag off Gearshift pattern ........................... 107
indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 307 Generator
Front passenger front air bag off see Alternator
indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 308 Global locking/unlocking
Front seat head restraints see Key, SmartKey
see Head restraints Glove box ........................................... 205
Fuel ..................................................... 222 Gross Axle Weight Rating
Additives ........................................ 355 see GAWR
Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 352 Gross Vehicle Weight
Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 254 see GVW
Ethanol fuel (E85) .......................... 355 Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
Fuel consumption (Flexible Fuel see GVWR
Vehicle) .......................................... 355 GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 251
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 122 GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 223 Rating) ................................................ 251
Fuel tank reserve warning lamp ..... 304
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 354 H
Refueling ........................................ 222 Halogen headlamps
Requirements ................................ 354 see Headlamps
Switching (Flexible Fuel Vehicle) .... 355 Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 265
Fuel filler flap ..................................... 223 Hazard warning flasher ....................... 93
Opening manually .......................... 310 Headlamp cleaning system ................ 93
Fuel gauge ................................... 28, 118 Headlamps
Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc. ........ 349 Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 90
Fuel tank Automatic headlamp mode .............. 91
Capacity ........................................ 352 Bi-Xenon .................................. 90, 314
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 223 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Refueling ........................................ 222 Cleaning system .............................. 93
Fuses .................................................. 328 Daytime running lamp mode ............ 91
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 10
10 Index
Delayed shut-off ............................ 134 Instrument panel

Halogen ......................................... 314 see Instrument cluster
High-beam flasher ............................ 93 Instruments and controls
High-beam headlamps ..................... 93 see Cockpit
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 91 Interior lighting
Messages in the multifunction Delayed shut-off ............................ 135
display ........................................... 292 Emergency lighting .......................... 95
Replacing bulbs ............................. 313 Front ................................................ 95
Switch .............................................. 90 Front reading lamps ......................... 95
Headliner and shelf below rear Rear ................................................. 95
window, cleaning and care of .......... 265 Rear reading lamps .......................... 95
Head restraints .................................... 79 Interior rear view mirror ..................... 86
Adjustment ................................ 79, 82 Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 87
Folding back .................................... 83 Interior storage spaces
NECK-PRO active front head see Storage compartments
restraints ......................................... 52 Intermittent wiping ............................. 96
Rear seat head restraints ................. 83 Rain sensor ...................................... 96
ProCarManuals.com
Height adjustment ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –

Seat belt outlet ................................ 51 LATCH-type)
Seats ............................................... 79 see Children in the vehicle
High-beam flasher ............................... 93
High-beam headlamps ................ 93, 314 J
High-performance brake system ..... 256
Jack ..................................................... 269
Hill-start assist system ..................... 183
Jump starting ..................................... 323
Hood ................................................... 224
display ........................................... 286 K
Horn ...................................................... 27 Key, Mechanical
Hydroplaning ..................................... 257 Loss of ............................................. 73
Replacing ......................................... 74
I Unlocking/locking manually .......... 309
Valet locking .................................... 77
Identification labels .......................... 332
Key, SmartKey
Identification number, vehicle
Battery check lamp .......................... 73
(VIN) ................................................... 333
Checking batteries ........................... 73
Ignition ......................................... 78, 102
Factory setting ........................... 71, 73
Immobilizer .......................................... 66
Global locking (KEYLESS-
Infant and child restraint systems
GO) .................................................. 73
see Children in the vehicle
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71
Inflation pressure
Global unlocking (KEYLESS-
see Tires, Inflation pressure
GO) .................................................. 73
Inside door handle .............................. 74
Global unlocking
Instrument cluster ...................... 28, 116
(SmartKey) ....................................... 71
Illumination .................................... 117
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72
Lamps ............................................ 297
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Multifunction display ..................... 120
Loss of ............................................. 73
Instrument lighting
see Instrument cluster, Illumination
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 11
Index 11
Messages in the multifunction Front passenger front air bag off

display ........................................... 286 (USA only) ................................ 42, 308
Opening, trunk ................................. 75 Fuel tank reserve ..................... 28, 304
Opening and closing the power High-beam headlamps ............... 28, 93
tilt/sliding sunroof or the Instrument cluster ................... 28, 297
panorama roof ................................. 99 Low-beam headlamps ................ 28, 91
Opening and closing the windows .... 99 Low tire pressure/TPMS
Remote control ................................ 70 malfunction telltale .................. 28, 306
Replacing ......................................... 74 Rear fog lamp .................................. 28
Replacing batteries ........................ 312 Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 301
Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73 SRS .................................... 28, 36, 302
Selective setting ........................ 71, 73 Turn signals ..................................... 28
Starter switch positions ................... 77 LATCH-type child seat anchors (ISOFIX)
KEYLESS-GO see Children in the vehicle
Starter switch positions ................... 78 License plate lamps
Kickdown ........................................... 110 Messages in the multifunction
Kickdown (manual shift program) ... 115 display ........................................... 294
ProCarManuals.com
Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 251 Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 265
Knee bag .............................................. 40 Lighter
see Cigarette lighter
L Lighting ................................................ 90
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 91
Labels
Exterior ............................................ 90
Certification ................................... 332
Interior ............................................. 95
Emission control information ......... 333
Limp-home mode .............................. 116
Tire and Loading Information
Load index (tires) ...................... 246, 251
placard ........................................... 238
Loading
Tire inflation pressure .................... 231
see Vehicle loading
Lamps, exterior
Locator lighting ................................. 134
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 90
Locking the vehicle
Front .............................................. 314
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Manually ........................................ 310
display ........................................... 292
SmartKey ......................................... 70
Rear ............................................... 314
Loss of
Switching on/off .............................. 90
Key .................................................. 73
Lamps, indicator and warning
Service and Warranty Information
ABS .......................................... 29, 298
booklet .......................................... 332
Brakes ..................................... 28, 298
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 91
Center console ................................ 31
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 90
Coolant .................................... 28, 305
Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
Engine malfunction .................. 28, 305
Switching on .................................... 91
ESP® ........................................ 28, 302
Lubricants .......................................... 349
ESP® OFF ................................ 28, 303 Lumbar support ................................... 82
Fog lamps ........................................ 92
Front fog lamps ................................ 28
Front passenger front air bag off
(Canada only) .......................... 46, 307
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 12
12 Index
M Advanced TPMS ............................. 277

Air bags ......................................... 272
Maintenance ........................................ 21 Alternator ...................................... 290
Maintenance System Backrests ....................................... 286
Service indicator display ................ 259 Battery ........................................... 290
Service indicator message ............. 259 Brake fluid ..................................... 282
Service term exceeded .................. 259 Brake pads ..................................... 279
Manual headlamp mode (Low- Child seat ...................................... 275
beam headlamps) ................................ 91 Coolant .......................................... 288
Manual shift program ....................... 113 Corner-illuminating front fog
Manual transmission ........................ 107 lamps ............................................. 295
Gearshift lever ............................... 107 Cruise control ................................ 275
Hill-start assist system .................. 183 Doors ............................................. 286
Maximum engine speed EBP ................................................ 281
see Vehicle specification Engine oil ....................................... 291
Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 251 ESP® ............................. 280, 281, 283
Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 251 Fog lamps .............................. 292, 294
Maximum permissible tire
ProCarManuals.com
Front passenger front air bag ........ 272

inflation pressure .............................. 251 Gas cap .......................................... 291
Mechanical key High-beam lamps ........................... 293
see Key, Mechanical Hood .............................................. 286
Media interface ................................. 205 License plate lamps ....................... 294
Memory function ................................. 89 Light sensor ................................... 294
Menus Low-beam lamps ............................ 294
see Control system menus Parking brake ................................ 281
Minispare wheel Parking lamps ................................ 293
see Spare wheel Power steering ............................... 288
Mirrors .................................................. 86 Reserve fuel ................................... 291
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 87 Reverse lamp ................................. 292
Exterior rear view mirror parking Side marker lamps ......................... 293
position ............................................ 87 SmartKey ....................................... 286
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 86 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 286
Interior rear view mirror ................... 86 SRS ................................................ 284
Memory function .............................. 89 Tail lamps ...................................... 295
Power-folding exterior rear view Tele Aid .......................................... 284
mirrors ............................................. 88 Tire inflation pressure ............ 276, 296
Vanity mirror .................................. 208 Tire pressure monitor .................... 277
MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 354 Tires ...................................... 276, 296
Motor Octane Number Trunk ............................................. 286
see MON Turn signals ................................... 296
MP3 mode .......................................... 158 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction display ........................ 120 Adjustment ...................................... 84
Symbol messages .......................... 279 Buttons .......................................... 118
Text messages ............................... 272 Cleaning ......................................... 265
Vehicle status messages ............... 270 Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 85, 136
Multifunction display messages Gearshift control ............................ 112
ABS ....................................... 280, 281 Memory function .............................. 89
Active headlamps .......................... 292 Overview .......................................... 29
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 13
Index 13
N Operating safety .................................. 22

Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 263
Navigation system Overhead control panel ...................... 32
see Separate operating instructions
Navi menu .......................................... 126
P
NECK-PRO active front head
restraints ............................................. 52 Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 261
Resetting ....................................... 311 Paintwork code ................................. 333
Nets, parcel ....................................... 203 Panic alarm .......................................... 60
Normal occupant weight .................. 251 Panorama roof with power tilt/
Number, vehicle identification sliding panel ...................................... 200
(VIN) ................................................... 333 Cleaning ......................................... 264
Operation ....................................... 200
O Roller sunblinds ............................. 199
Synchronizing ................................ 201
Occupant Classification System Parcel nets ......................................... 203
see OCS (Occupant Classification Parking ............................................... 105
System) Parktronic system .......................... 185
ProCarManuals.com
Occupant distribution ....................... 251 Parking brake .................................... 105

Occupant safety Messages in the multifunction
Air bags ........................................... 37 display ........................................... 281
BabySmart™ .................................... 46 Parking position
Children and air bags ....................... 37 Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 87
Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 Transmission position .................... 109
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Parktronic system
(ISOFIX) ........................................... 58 Cleaning system sensors ............... 263
Fastening the seat belts ................... 50 Malfunction .................................... 187
Front passenger front air bag off Minimum distance ......................... 186
indicator lamp (Canada Sensor range ................................. 185
only) ........................................ 46, 307 Switching on/off ........................... 187
Front passenger front air bag off System sensors ............................. 185
indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 308 Warning indicators ......................... 186
Infant and child restraint systems .... 55 Parts service ...................................... 332
Introduction ..................................... 36 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
ISOFIX (Child seat anchors – (Canada only)
LATCH-type) ..................................... 58 see Front passenger front air bag
OCS (Occupant Classification off indicator lamp (Canada only)
System) ........................................... 42 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Seat belts .................................. 39, 48 (USA only)
OCS (Occupant Classification
see Front passenger front air bag
System) ................................................ 42
off indicator lamp (USA only)
Self-test ........................................... 46 Passenger safety
Odometer ........................................... 121
see Occupant safety
Oil, oil level Pedals ................................................. 254
see Engine oil Pelvis air bags ..................................... 41
On-board computer
Phone
see Control system
see Telephone
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 112
Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 265
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 14
14 Index
Power assistance .............................. 255 Rear fog lamp

Power outlets .................................... 210 see Fog lamps
Power seats Rear lamps
see Seats see Tail lamps
Power steering Rear seat head restraints
Messages in the multifunction see Head restraints
display ........................................... 288 Rear view camera .............................. 188
Power tilt/sliding sunroof Cleaning the camera lens .............. 263
Operation ....................................... 196 Rear window defroster ..................... 196
Synchronizing ................................ 199 Recommended tire inflation
Power washer .................................... 261 pressure ..................................... 230, 251
Power windows ................................... 98 Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 354
Cleaning ......................................... 264 Refueling ............................................ 222
Operation ......................................... 98 Regular checks .................................. 224
Rear door window, override Reminder, Seat belt
switch .............................................. 59 see Seat belts, Telltale
Synchronizing .................................. 99 Remote control
ProCarManuals.com
Practical hints ................................... 268 see Key, SmartKey

Problems Remote door lock (Tele Aid) ............. 216
While driving .................................. 104 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 215
With vehicle ..................................... 23 Replacing
With wipers ...................................... 97 Key .................................................. 74
Product information ............................ 20 Replacing bulbs ................................. 313
Production options weight ............... 251 Reporting safety defects .................... 23
Program mode selector switch Research Octane Number
Automatic shift program ................ 111 see RON
Manual shift program ............ 113, 114 Reserve fuel
Proximity key Messages in the multifunction
see Key, SmartKey display ........................................... 291
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 251 Warning lamp ................................. 304
Restraint systems
R see Occupant safety
Retaining hooks ................................. 203
RACETIMER ........................................ 124
Rims ........................................... 251, 344
Radio .................................................. 148
Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 214
Satellite radio ................................ 152
Roller sunblinds ................................. 199
Selecting stations .......................... 126
RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 354
Radio transmitters ............................ 258
Roof rack ............................................ 203
Rain sensor
Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 265
see Intermittent wiping
Rear axle oil ....................................... 351
Rear center console ashtray S
see Ashtrays Safety
Rear doors Driving safety systems ..................... 60
Child safety locks ............................ 59 Occupant safety ............................... 36
Rear door window Reporting defects ............................ 23
Override switch ................................ 59 Safety belts
see Seat belts
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 15
Index 15
Satellite radio .................................... 152 Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73

Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52 Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71
Seat belts ............................................. 48 Shelf below rear window, cleaning .. 265
Children in the vehicle ..................... 54 Side impact air bags ........................... 41
Cleaning ......................................... 265 Side marker lamps
Fastening ......................................... 50 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Height adjustment ........................... 51 Messages in the multifunction
Proper use of ................................... 49 display ........................................... 293
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
Safety notes ..................................... 48 Sidewall (tires) .................................. 252
Telltale ........................................... 301 SmartKey
Seat heating ......................................... 84 see Key, SmartKey
Seating capacity ................................ 239 SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
Seats ..................................................... 79 see Key, SmartKey
Adjustment ...................................... 79 Snow chains ...................................... 253
Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 85 Snow tires
Heating ............................................ 84 see Winter tires
ProCarManuals.com
Memory function .............................. 89 Spare wheel ....................................... 344

Messages in the multifunction Mounting ....................................... 318
display ........................................... 286 Storage location ............................ 270
Split rear seat bench ..................... 204 Speedometer ....................................... 28
Securing cargo Speed settings
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 203 Cruise control ................................ 181
Selective setting Resume function ............................ 183
see Key, SmartKey SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)
Selector lever Indicator lamp ......................... 36, 302
see Gear selector lever Messages in the multifunction
Self-test display ........................................... 284
BabySmart™ .................................... 47 Standing water, driving through ...... 257
OCS (Occupant Classification Starter switch positions
System) ........................................... 46 KEYLESS-GO .................................... 78
Tele Aid .......................................... 212 SmartKey ......................................... 77
Service Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 102
see Maintenance Starting the engine ........................... 101
Service, parts .................................... 332 Steering column
Service and warranty information ..... 20 see Multifunction steering wheel,
Service intervals Adjustment
see Maintenance System, Service Steering wheel
indicator message see Multifunction steering wheel
Service life (tires) .............................. 243 Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 112
Service menu ..................................... 129 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 216
Settings Storage compartments ..................... 205
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 73 Storing tires ....................................... 244
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71 Sunroof
Memory function .............................. 89 see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Menu ............................................. 130 Sunshade
Rear window .................................. 208
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 16
16 Index
Sun visors .......................................... 208 Technical data (electrical system)

T Technical data (engine)
Tachometer .................................. 28, 117
Technical data (weights)
Overspeed range ........................... 117
Tail lamps ........................................... 314
Tele Aid ............................................... 211
Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Emergency calls ............................. 212
Information button ......................... 215
display ........................................... 295
Initiating an emergency call
Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
manually ........................................ 213
Tar stains ........................................... 261
Technical data
display ........................................... 284
Air conditioning refrigerant .... 352, 354
Remote door lock .......................... 216
Brake fluid ............................. 351, 354
Remote door unlock ...................... 215
Capacities fuels, coolants,
Roadside Assistance button .......... 214
lubricants etc. ................................ 349
Search & Send ............................... 215
Coolant .................................. 351, 356
ProCarManuals.com
SOS button .................................... 213

Engine oil additives ........................ 353
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 216
Engine oils ............................. 350, 353
System self-test ............................. 212
Fuel requirements .......................... 354
Telephone .......................................... 167
Gasoline additives .......................... 355
Answering/ending a call ................ 128
Identification labels ....................... 332
Call lists ......................................... 176
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 354
Emergency calls “911” .................. 173
Rims and tires ................................ 344
Hands-free microphone ................... 33
Spare wheel ................................... 349
Making calls ................................... 177
Vehicle specification C 250 ........... 334
Menu ............................................. 128
Vehicle specification
Operation ....................................... 128
C 250 4MATIC ............................... 335
Phone book ........................... 128, 174
Redialing ........................................ 129
C 250 4MATIC Sport ...................... 336
Temperature
Vehicle specification C 250 Sport .. 334
Coolant .......................................... 117
Interior temperature ...................... 192
Outside .......................................... 118
C 300 4MATIC ............................... 339
Tether anchorage points
see Children in the vehicle
C 300 4MATIC Sport ...................... 340
Tie-down rings ................................... 203
Tightening torque
Wheels ........................................... 321
Time setting ....................................... 132
C 350 4MATIC ............................... 343
TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 252
Tire and Loading Information
Vehicle specification C 63 AMG ..... 343
placard ............................................... 238
Washer and headlamp cleaning
Tire and loading terminology ........... 250
system ................................... 352, 358
Tire Identification Number
Technical data (dimensions)
see TIN
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 17
Index 17
Tire inflation pressure Tread depth ........................... 243, 252

Checking ........................................ 232 Treadwear ...................................... 244
Important notes on ........................ 231 Treadwear indicators ............. 243, 252
Label on the inside of fuel filler Vehicle maximum load on .............. 252
flap ................................................ 231 Wear pattern .................................. 245
Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 238 Winter tires ............................ 252, 344
Tire labeling ....................................... 246 Tire speed rating ....................... 247, 252
Tire load rating .................................. 251 Top tether
Tire ply composition and material see Children in the vehicle
used .................................................... 252 Total load limit ................................... 252
Tire pressure loss warning system . 233 Towing
Tires ........................................... 229, 344 Towing eye bolt .............................. 326
Advanced Tire Pressure Vehicle ........................................... 325
Monitoring System (Advanced Towing eye bolt ................................. 326
TPMS) ............................................ 234 Traction ...................................... 244, 252
Air pressure ................................... 230 Transfer case ..................................... 116
Care and maintenance ................... 243 Transmission
ProCarManuals.com
Cleaning ......................................... 244 see Automatic transmission or

Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 242 Manual transmission
Important notes on tire inflation Transmission fluid level .................... 227
pressure ........................................ 231 Transmission gear selector lever
Inflation pressure ........................... 232 see Gear selector lever
Information placard ....................... 238 Transmission positions .................... 109
Inspection ...................................... 243 Traveling abroad ............................... 257
Labeling ......................................... 246 Tread (tires) ....................................... 252
Load index ............................. 246, 251 Tread depth (tires) .................... 243, 252
Load rating .................................... 251 Treadwear .......................................... 244
Messages in the multifunction Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 243, 252
display ................................... 276, 296 Trip menu ........................................... 121
Ply composition and material Trunk
used ............................................... 252 Closing ............................................. 76
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 232 Fuse box ........................................ 329
Retreads ........................................ 229 Messages in the multifunction
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 344 display ........................................... 286
Rotation ......................................... 245 Opening ........................................... 75
Service life ..................................... 243 Tie-down rings ............................... 203
Sizes .............................................. 344 Trunk lid emergency release ............ 76
Snow chains .................................. 253 Unlocking manually ....................... 309
Speed rating .......................... 247, 252 Valet locking .................................... 77
Storing ........................................... 244 Turning off the engine ...................... 106
Temperature .......................... 231, 245 Turn signals ......................................... 93
Terminology ................................... 250 Cleaning lenses ............................. 263
Tire Identification Number ............. 252 Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Tire pressure loss warning system . 233 Messages in the multifunction
TPMS low tire pressure/ display ........................................... 296
malfunction telltale ........................ 306 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314
Traction ................................. 244, 252
Tread ............................................. 252
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 18
18 Index
U C 250 Sport ................................... 334

C 300 ............................................. 337
Uniform Tire Quality Grading C 300 4MATIC ............................... 339
Standards .................................. 244, 252 C 300 4MATIC Sport ...................... 340
Units C 300 Sport ................................... 338
Selecting speedometer display C 350 ............................................. 341
mode ............................................. 131 C 350 4MATIC ............................... 343
Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 354 C 350 Sport ................................... 342
Unlocking the vehicle C 63 AMG ...................................... 343
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 Vehicle status message memory .... 129
Manually ........................................ 309 Vehicle tool kit .................................. 268
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Vehicle washing
Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 266 see Vehicle care
Useful features .................................. 207 Vehicle weights
V
Valet locking ........................................ 77 W
ProCarManuals.com
Vehicle Warning sounds

Battery ........................................... 321 Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
Care ............................................... 260 Parking brake ................................ 281
Control system .............................. 118 Parktronic system .......................... 187
Identification Number (VIN) ........... 332 Seat belt telltale ............................ 301
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70 Warranty coverage ............................ 332
Lowering (wheel change) ............... 321 Washer and headlamp cleaning
Modifications and alterations, system ................................................ 358
Operating safety .............................. 22 Washer fluid
Towing ........................................... 325 Mixing ratio .................................... 358
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 309 Refilling .......................................... 228
Vehicle dimensions Washing the vehicle .......................... 260
see Vehicle specification Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 245
Vehicle Identification Number Weights (vehicle)
(VIN) ................................................... 332 see Vehicle specification
Vehicle jack Wheel
see Jack Changing ....................................... 317
Vehicle lighting .................................... 90 Removing ....................................... 320
Vehicle loading Spare ............................................. 317
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 203 Tightening torque ........................... 321
Instructions .................................... 202 Wheels, sizes ..................................... 344
Load limit ....................................... 239 Wheels, Tires and .............................. 229
Roof rack ....................................... 203 Window curtain air bags ..................... 42
Split rear seat bench ..................... 204 Windows
Terminology ................................... 250 see Power windows
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 252 Windows, cleaning ............................ 264
Vehicle specification Windshield
C 250 ............................................. 334 Cleaning wiper blades .................... 264
C 250 4MATIC ............................... 335 Defogging ...................................... 195
C 250 4MATIC Sport ...................... 336
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 19
Index 19
Washer fluid ................................... 358

Wipers ............................................. 96
Windshield wipers
Replacing wiper blades .................. 316
Winter driving
Instructions .................................... 253
Snow chains .................................. 253
Tires ............................................... 252
Winter tires ................................ 252, 344
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 266
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 20
20 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
ProCarManuals.com
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.

reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 21
Introduction 21
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Control System Warranty Customer Assistance Center
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon One Mercedes Drive
Laws) Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail Maintenance

buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
automobiles
necessary maintenance work which should
Under California law you may be entitled to a be performed at regular intervals.
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
purchase price or lease price, if after a you when you take the vehicle to an
reasonable number of repair attempts authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its service. The service advisor will record each
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix service in the booklet for you.
one or more substantial defects or
ProCarManuals.com
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered

by its express warranty. During the period of Roadside Assistance
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer Program provides factory-trained technical
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
reasonable number of repair attempts is toll-free Roadside Assistance number
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
more of the following occurs: (in the USA) 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
(1) the same substantial defect or will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
malfunction results in a condition that is Customer Assistance Representatives
likely to cause death or serious bodily 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect For additional information refer to the
or malfunction has been subject to repair Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
two or more times, and you have directly Program brochure (in the USA) or the
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in Roadside Assistance section of the Service
writing of the need for its repair, and Warranty Information Booklet (in
(2) the same substantial defect or Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio.
malfunction of a less serious nature than
category (1) has been subject to repair
four or more times and you have directly Change of address or ownership
notified us in writing of the need for its If you change your address, be sure to send
repair, or in the “Change of Address Notice” found in
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of the Service and Warranty Information
repair of the same or different substantial Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at
total of more than 30 calendar days. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or
Customer Service (in Canada) at
Written notification should not be sent to a
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in
dealer, it should be addressed to
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 22
22 Introduction
contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all G Warning!
literature with the vehicle to make it available Work improperly carried out on electronic
to the next operator. components and associated software could
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to cause them to cease functioning. Because the
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used Car” vehicle’s electronic components are
found in the Service and Warranty interconnected, any modifications made may
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes- produce an undesired effect on other
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the systems. Electronic malfunctions could
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes seriously impair the operating safety of your
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in vehicle.
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for repairs or modifications to electronic
components.
Operating your vehicle outside the
Other improper work or modifications on the
USA or Canada
vehicle could also have a negative impact on
ProCarManuals.com
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign the operating safety of the vehicle.
countries, please be aware that: Some safety systems only function while the
RService facilities or replacement parts may engine is running. You should therefore never
not be readily available. turn off the engine while driving.
RUnleaded gasoline for vehicles with G Warning!
catalytic converters may not be available;
Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
the use of leaded fuels will damage the
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and
catalysts.
impair the operating safety of your vehicle.
RGasoline may have a considerably lower Such blows can be caused, for example, by
octane rating, and improper fuel can cause running over an obstacle, road debris or a
engine damage. pothole. If you feel a sudden significant
Certain Mercedes-Benz models are available vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect
for delivery in Europe under our European that damage to your vehicle as occurred:
Delivery Program. For details, consult an Rturn on your hazard warning flashers
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or write to: Rslow down carefully
In the USA:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
European Delivery Department distance from the road
One Mercedes Drive Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle
In Canada: appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other
European Delivery Department qualified maintenance or repair facility for
98 Vanderhoof Avenue further inspection or repairs.
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 23
Introduction 23
Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
For the USA only:
familiar with the following information and
rules: The following text is published as required of
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S.
Rthe safety precautions in this manual Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the
Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual “National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act
Rtraffic rules and regulations of 1966”.
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
Reporting safety defects
G Warning!
Various warning labels are attached to your If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
vehicle. These warning labels are intended to which could cause a crash or could cause
make you and others aware of various risks. injury or death, you should immediately
Do not remove any of these warning labels inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
unless explicitly instructed to do so by Administration (NHTSA) in addition to
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
ProCarManuals.com
information on the label itself. Removing

warning labels may cause you and others to If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
be unaware of certain risks which may result open an investigation, and if it finds that a
in an accident and/or personal injury. safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
Problems with your vehicle individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
If you should experience a problem with your To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
affect its safe operation, we urge you to (TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center www.safercar.gov; or write to:
immediately to have the problem diagnosed Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
and corrected if required. If the matter is not 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
handled to your satisfaction, please discuss Washington, DC 20590.
the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center You can also obtain other information about
management or, if necessary, contact us at motor vehicle safety from
one of the following addresses: www.safercar.gov.
In the USA:
Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC Vehicle data recording
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350 Information regarding electronic
recording devices
In Canada:
Customer Relations Department (Including notice pursuant to California Code
Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc. § 9951)
98 Vanderhoof Avenue Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9 devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 24
24 Introduction
This information helps, for example, to

diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
to continuously improve vehicle safety.
Daimler may access the information and
share it with others
Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
purposes
Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
enforcement or other government agency
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
organization and/or
Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
ProCarManuals.com
Please check the Tele Aid subscription

service agreement for details regarding the
information that may be recorded or
transmitted via that system.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 25
25
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 29
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 32
Door control panel, seat adjust-
ment ..................................................... 33
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 26
26 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
ProCarManuals.com
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Trunk: D Doors:
Locking and unlocking 70, Locking and unlocking 70,
309 309
Opening and closing 75 E Wipers 96
Valet locking 77 Wiper blades, replacing 316
; Rear lamps 314 Wiper blades, cleaning 264
= Rear window defroster 196 F Hood 224
? Fuel filler flap 222 G Front lamps 314
A Exterior rear view mirrors 86 H Headlamp cleaning system 93
B Power tilt/sliding sunroof 196 I Front towing eye 326
Panorama roof with power J Tires and wheels 229
tilt/sliding panel 199
Rims and tires 344
C Windshield:
K Rear towing eye 326
Wiping with washer fluid 97
Cleaning 264
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 27
Cockpit 27
Cockpit
At a glance
ProCarManuals.com

: Steering wheel gearshift H Steering wheel release
control 112 handle (manual) 85
; Cruise control lever 180 I Steering wheel adjustment
stalk (electrical) 85
= Instrument cluster 116
J Combination switch:
? Multifunction steering
wheel 118 Turn signals 93
Wipers 96
A Horn High beam 93
B Front Parktronic warning K Parking brake pedal 105
indicators, Canada only 186
L Parking brake release 105
C Overhead control panel 32
M On-board diagnostics
D Glove box 205 (OBD) socket
E Glove box lock 206 N Hood lock release 224
F Center console 31 O Exterior lamp switch 90
G Starter switch 77 P Door control panel and seat
KEYLESS-GO start/stop adjustment/memory 33
button 78
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 28
28 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance
ProCarManuals.com

: Combination gauge with: = d ESP® warning lamp 62,
302
Fuel gauge 118 ? Speedometer
8 Fuel tank reserve
warning lamp 304 A Multifunction display 120
Coolant temperature gauge 117 B ! Right turn signal
? Coolant temperature indicator lamp 93
warning lamp 305
C Tachometer with:
Indicator/warning lamps:
N Front fog lamps
K High-beam headlamp
indicator lamp 92
indicator lamp 93
R Rear fog lamp
L Low-beam headlamp
indicator lamp 92
indicator lamp 91
å ESP OFF warning 64,
; Engine malfunction
lamp, C 63 AMG only 302
indicator lamp 305
h Combination low tire
$ Brake warning lamp,
pressure/TPMS
USA only 300
malfunction telltale, USA 234,
J Brake warning lamp, only 306
Canada only 300 6 Supplemental
; # Left turn signal Restraint System (SRS) 36,
indicator lamp 93 indicator lamp 302
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 29
Multifunction steering wheel 29
Function Page Multifunction steering wheel

! Antilock Brake
At a glance
System (ABS) indicator 61,
lamp 298
7 Seat belt telltale 51,
301
D Outside temperature
(manual transmission) 118
Permanent display:
Outside temperature or
speedometer 118,
(automatic transmission) 132
E Outside temperature 118,
F Program mode indicator
ProCarManuals.com

G Transmission position
indicator/gear range Function Page
indicator 109,
(automatic transmission) 111 : Multifunction display 120
Additional speedometer ; Press button ~:
(manual transmission) 132 to end a call 128
H Digital clock 132 to reject an incoming call 128
I Instrument cluster Press button 6:
illumination 117 to answer a call 128
to dial1 128
to redial1 129
Press button W or X:
to set the volume 126
to operate the RACETIMER2 124
Press button 8 to mute
= Press button ? to
activate the Voice Control
System3
1 Function only available in telephone menu.

2 AMG vehicles only.
3 The Voice Control System is only available with the COMAND system. Refer to separate operating
instructions.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 30
30 Multifunction steering wheel

? Press button % briefly: Press button a:
At a glance
to go to the next higher to confirm selection or

menu level 120 message 120
to confirm display message 120 to switch to the phone
book1 128
to cancel the Voice Control
System3 to dial a selected phone
number1 128
Press and hold button
% to select the standard
display 120
A Press button = or ;: 120
to call up line for main
menus
to scroll to the left or right
to select menus
ProCarManuals.com
Press button 9 or :
briefly: 120
to select submenus
to scroll up or down through
lists
to select previous or next
track, scene, or stored
station within Audio menu 126
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Tel menu 128
Press and hold button
9 or :: 120
to select previous or next
track or scene with quick
search or to select previous
or next station in waveband
(if no station list is
available) within Audio
menu 126
to start the quick search in
the phone book within Tel
menu 128
instructions.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 31
Center console 31
Center console Function Page

Upper part D Parktronic system
At a glance
deactivation switch,
Canada only 187
E Rear window sunshade
switch 208
F Sport driving mode on/off
button 184
G Dual-zone automatic
climate control 189
Rear window defroster 196
H Seat heating, driver’s side 84
ProCarManuals.com
Function Page
: Audio display cover 139
; Hazard warning flasher
switch 93
= Alarm system indicator
lamp 67
? Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp, USA 42,
only 308
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp, 46,
Canada only 307
A Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 63
B Audio system 136
or
COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
C Seat heating, front
passenger side 84
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 32
32 Overhead control panel
Lower part Overhead control panel

At a glance
ProCarManuals.com

: Ashtray 209 : Rear interior lighting on/off 95
Cigarette lighter 209 ; Interior lighting control 95
; Gear shift lever for manual = Right reading lamp on/off 95
transmission 107
Gear selector lever for ? Power tilt/sliding sunroof
automatic transmission 108 switch 196
or
= Cup holder 207
Power tilt/sliding panel
? Front armrest storage switch 200
compartments 206
A Information button (Tele
A Audio controller 140 Aid system) 215
COMAND controller (see B SOS button (Tele Aid
separate operating system) 213
instructions)
C Interior rear view mirror 86
B Program mode selector
switch for automatic D Integrated electronic
transmission 111 compass 210
E Garage door opener 216
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 33
Door control panel, seat adjustment 33
Function Page Door control panel, seat adjustment

F Hands-free microphone for
At a glance
Tele Aid (emergency call
system), telephone and
Voice Control System4
G Roadside Assistance
button (Tele Aid system) 214
H Left reading lamp on/off 95
I Front interior lighting on/
off 95
ProCarManuals.com
Door control panel, vehicles with memory function

Function Page
: Inside door handle 74
; Central unlocking switch 75
= Seat adjustment 82
? Memory function (for
storing seat, exterior
mirror, and steering wheel
settings) 89
A Exterior rear view mirrors
adjustment 86
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors, Canada only 88
B Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 98
C Rear door window override
switch 59
instructions.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 34
34 Door control panel, seat adjustment
Function Page
D Trunk opening switch 75
At a glance
E Central locking switch 75

ProCarManuals.com
Seat adjustment, vehicles without memory

function
Function Page
= Seat adjustment 80
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 35
35
Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 60
Driving safety systems ....................... 60
Anti-theft systems .............................. 66
Safety and security

ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 36
36 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
ProCarManuals.com
RSeat belts (Y page 54) for information on

Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH) also known as ISOFIX
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RAir bag system components with started.
- Front passenger front air bag off The SRS components are in operational
indicator lamp readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
- USA only: Front passenger seat with 6 is not lit while the engine is running.
Occupant Classification System (OCS)
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Although the systems are independent, their
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 37
Occupant safety 37
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
6 to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rfailsto go out after approximately asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
4 seconds after the engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on after the engine was started or soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
while driving breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
For your safety, we strongly recommend that air by opening a window or door.
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center immediately to have the system G Warning!
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
activated when needed in an accident, which bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS and front passenger to always be in a properly
might also deploy unexpectedly and
ProCarManuals.com
seated position and to wear their respective

unnecessarily which could also result in injury seat belt.
as well.
For maximum protection in the event of a
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates collision always be in normal seated position
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or with your back against the seat backrest.
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
on the SRS must therefore only be performed properly positioned on your body.
by qualified technicians. Contact an
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
speed and force, a proper seating position
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system and correct positioning of the hands on the
to accommodate a person with disabilities, steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes properly or are too close to the air bag can be
(1-800-367-6372) for details. seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
Air bags
position that is as upright as possible with
G Warning! your back against the seat backrest.
Air bags are designed to reduce the potential RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
of injury and fatality in certain possible, still permitting proper operation
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s of vehicle controls. The distance from the
side knee bag) center of the driver’s chest to the center of
the air bag cover on the steering wheel
Rside impacts (side impact air bags, window
must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
curtain air bags and pelvis air bags) You should be able to accomplish this by
However, no system available today can adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 38
38 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
order to do its job.

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
ProCarManuals.com
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
side knee bag)
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or Rside impacts (side impact air bags, pelvis
booster seat recommended for the size and air bags and window curtain air bags) if the
weight of the child. system determines the need for air bag
RCanada
deployment
only: Children 12 years old and
under must never ride in the front seat, Only in the event of such a situation will they
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized provide their supplemental protection.
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which The driver and passengers should always
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
deactivation system installed in the vehicle possible for the air bags to provide their
to deactivate the front passenger front air supplemental protection.
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise In case of other types of impacts and impacts
they will be struck by the air bag when it below air bag deployment thresholds, air
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious bags will not deploy. The driver and
or fatal injury will result. passengers will then be protected to the
Failure to follow these instructions can result extent possible by a properly fastened seat
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you needed to provide the best possible
make the buyer aware of this safety protection in a rollover.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Operator’s Manual. Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
G Warning! air bags.
Accident research shows that the safest place It is important to your safety and that of your
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. passengers to have deployed air bags
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 39
Occupant safety 39
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the trims.
air bags will continue to provide supplemental RDo not install additional electrical/
crash protection for occupants.
electronic equipment on or near SRS
components and wiring.
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Safety and security

Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) RKeep area between air bags and occupants
and air bag free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,

umbrellas, etc.).
G Warning! RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have
from the coat hooks or handles over the
been subjected to stress in an accident door. These items may be thrown around in
must be replaced. Their anchoring points the vehicle and cause head and other
must also be checked. Only use seat belts injuries when the window curtain air bag is
installed or supplied by an authorized deployed.
Mercedes-Benz Center.
RAir bag system components will be hot after
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
ProCarManuals.com
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain

RNever place your feet on the instrument
perchlorate material, which may require
special handling and regard for the panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
environment. Check with your local keep both feet on the floor in front of the
government’s disposal guidelines. seat.
California residents, see RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
Perchlorate/index.cfm. causing unintended air bag deployment.
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function Work on the SRS must therefore only be
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD performed by qualified technicians.
that has deployed must be replaced. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
RFor your protection and the protection of
They could tear.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
RDo not make any modification that could ETD, our safety instructions must be
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. followed. These instructions are available
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
severely weaken them. In a crash they may Center.
not be able to provide adequate protection. RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
RNo modifications of any kind may be made required inflation volume, and the material
to any components or wiring of the SRS. of the air bags, there is the possibility of
RDo no change or remove any component or
abrasions or other, potentially more serious
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
part of the SRS.
RDo not install additional trim material, seat If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
covers, badges, etc. over the steering recommend that you inform the subsequent
wheel hub, front passenger front air bag owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
cover, outboard sides of the seat Also refer them to the applicable section in
the Operator’s Manual.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 40
40 Occupant safety
Front air bags stage inflation of the front passenger front air
bag.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
deployment thresholds. You will then be
Safety and security
protected by the fastened seat belts.

The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
front air bag ; are designed to provide based on OCS weight sensor readings,
increased protection for the driver and front detects that the front passenger seat is
occupied
ProCarManuals.com
passenger against the risk of injuries to the

head and thorax. Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center
Driver and front passenger front air bag and console is not lit (USA only: (Y page 42),
driver’s side knee bag are deployed Canada only: (Y page 46))
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rif the system determines that air bag threshold
deployment can offer additional protection ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
to that provided by the seat belt deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
Rdepending on whether the respective seat place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
belt is in use the front passenger seat. This could cause
Rindependently of the side impact air bags, the front or side impact air bag on the front
pelvis air bags and/or the window curtain passenger side to deploy in a crash which
air bags exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Knee bag
the air bags to have different rates of inflation. Knee bag = is designed to provide increased
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle protection for the driver against the risk of
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag injuries to the knees, thighs and lower legs.
control unit. Knee bag = is located on the driver side
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front lower instrument panel. It is designed to
passenger front air bag deployment is operate together with the driver front air bag
additionally influenced by the passenger’s in certain frontal impacts if the system
weight category as identified by the Occupant determines that air bag deployment can offer
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42). additional protection to that provided by the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the seat belt. Knee bag = operates best in
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the conjunction with a properly positioned and
vehicle deceleration rate required for second fastened seat belt.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 41
Occupant safety 41
Side impact air bags seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the
G Warning! front passenger side impact air bag will
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
deploy independently of the empty seat.
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
Safety and security

control are located in the doors. Do not
modify any components of the doors or door
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
trim panels including, for example, the
properly inserted into the buckle.
addition of door speakers. Side impact air bags : are not deployed in
Improper repair work on the doors or the side impacts which do not exceed the
modification or addition of components to the system’s deployment threshold.
doors create a risk of rendering the side Side impact air bags : will not deploy in the
impact air bags inoperative or causing event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
doors must therefore only be performed by the preset deployment threshold for side
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized impact air bags :.
ProCarManuals.com
! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag

deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
Side impact air bags : are designed to interfere with or prevent the deployment of
provide increased protection for the thorax the side impact air bags and/or pelvis air
but not the head, neck and arms of the driver bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
or front passenger. Center for availability.
The side impact air bags : are deployed
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle Pelvis air bags
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
vehicle deceleration or acceleration Pelvis air bags are not available on C 63 AMG.
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 42
42 Occupant safety
interfere with or prevent the deployment of

the side impact air bags and/or pelvis air
bags. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center for availability.
Safety and security
Window curtain air bags

G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Pelvis air bags : are designed to provide

increased protection for the pelvis.
Pelvis air bags : are deployed
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
ProCarManuals.com
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle

Rindependently of whether the seat belt is in
use Window curtain air bags : are designed to
Rindependently of the front air bags provide increased protection for the head but
Rindependently
not the chest or arms.
of the ETDs
Window curtain air bags : are deployed
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: Front
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
passenger pelvis air bag : will not deploy if
the OCS senses that the front passenger seat Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
is empty and the front passenger seat belt is vehicle deceleration or acceleration
not fastened. With the front passenger seat Rindependently of the front air bags
empty and the seat belt fastened, front
Rregardless of whether the front passenger
passenger pelvis air bag : will deploy
independently of the empty seat. Whether a seat is occupied
seat belt is recognized as fastened depends Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the
on whether or not the latch plate is properly impacted side of the vehicle is in use
inserted into the buckle. Window curtain air bags : are not deployed
Pelvis air bags : are not deployed in side in impacts which do not exceed the system’s
impacts which do not exceed the system’s deployment threshold.
deployment threshold. Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area
Pelvis air bags : will not deploy in the event indicated by the arrows.
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of lateral
deceleration or acceleration exceeds the
preset deployment threshold for pelvis air Occupant Classification System
bags :.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
G Warning! standard equipment in USA.
Only use seat covers which have been tested The OCS activates or deactivates the front
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your passenger front air bag automatically. The
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may respective status is based on the classified
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 43
Occupant safety 43
occupant weight category determined by front passenger seat is classified as being

weight sensor readings from the front empty.
passenger seat. When the OCS senses that the front
The system does not deactivate passenger seat occupant is classified as
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag being up to or less than the weight of a typical
Safety and security

12-month-old child in a standard child
Rthe pelvis air bag
restraint, the 45 indicator lamp will
Rthe window curtain air bag illuminate when the engine is started and
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
To be classified correctly, the front passenger
When the OCS senses that the front
must sit
passenger seat is classified as being empty,
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate
Rin a position that is as upright as possible when the engine is started and remain
with the back against the seat backrest illuminated, indicating that the front
Rwith
the feet on the floor
When the OCS senses that the front
ProCarManuals.com
If the occupant’s weight is transferred to passenger seat occupant is classified as

another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning being heavier than the weight of a typical
on armrests), the OCS may not be able to 12-month-old child seated in a standard child
properly approximate the occupant’s weight restraint or as being a small individual (such
category. as a young teenager or a small adult), the
If your seat, including the trim cover and 45 indicator lamp will illuminate for
cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take approximately 6 seconds when the engine is
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz started and then, depending on occupant
Center. weight sensor readings from the seat, remain
Only seat accessories approved by illuminated or go out. With the 45
Mercedes-Benz may be used. indicator lamp illuminated, the front
Both the driver and the front passenger passenger front air bag is deactivated. With
should always use the 45 indicator the 45 indicator lamp out, the front
lamp as an indication of whether or not the passenger front air bag is activated.
front passenger is properly positioned. When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat occupant is classified as an
G Warning!
adult or someone larger than a small
If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates individual, the 45 indicator lamp will
when an adult or someone larger than a small illuminate for approximately 6 seconds when
individual is in the front passenger seat, have the engine is started and then goes out,
the front passenger reposition himself or indicating that the front passenger front air
herself in the seat until the 45 bag is activated.
indicator lamp goes out.
If the 45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
In the event of a collision, the air bag control the front passenger front air bag is
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag deactivated and will not be deployed.
deployment when the OCS has classified the
front passenger seat occupant as weighting
as much as or less than a typical 12-month-
old child in a standard child restraint or if the
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 44
44 Occupant safety
If the 45 indicator lamp is not Children can be killed or seriously injured by

illuminated, the front passenger front air bag an inflating air bag. Note the following
is activated and will be deployed important information when circumstances
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts require you to place a child in the front
passenger seat:
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
Safety and security
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag

threshold
technology designed to deactivate the front
Rindependently of the side impact air bags passenger front air bag in your vehicle
or pelvis air bag when the system senses the weight of a
If the front passenger front air bag is typical 12-month-old child or less along
deployed, the rate of inflation will be with the weight of a standard appropriate
influenced by child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
assessed by the air bag control unit front passenger seat will be seriously
Rthe
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front passenger’s weight category as
front air bag inflates in a collision which
identified by the OCS
could occur under some circumstances,
ProCarManuals.com
For more information on air bag display even with the air bag technology installed
messages in the multifunction display, see in your vehicle. The only means to
(Y page 272). completely eliminate this risk is to never
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
G Warning! in the front seat. We therefore strongly
According to accident statistics, children are recommend that you always place a child
safer when properly restrained in the rear in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
seating positions than in the front seating RIf you must install a rear-facing child
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that restraint on the front passenger seat
children be placed in the rear seats whenever because circumstances require you to do
possible. Regardless of seating position, so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp
children 12 years old and under must be is illuminated, indicating that the front
seated and properly secured in an appropriate passenger front air bag is deactivated.
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster Should the 45 indicator lamp not
seat recommended for the size and weight of illuminate or go out while the restraint is
the child. installed, please check installation.
The infant or child restraint must be properly Periodically check the 45 indicator
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat lamp while driving to make sure the
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and 45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. remains out, do not transport a child on the
Occupants, especially children, should always front passenger seat until the system has
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt been repaired.
properly and use an appropriately sized infant A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat front passenger seat will be seriously
recommended for the size and weight of the
child.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 45
Occupant safety 45

front air bag inflates.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
Safety and security

use the proper child restraint
recommended for the age, size and weight
of the child, and secure child restraint with
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
children larger than the typical 12-month-
45 indicator lamp : will be
old child, the front passenger front air bag
illuminated, except with the SmartKey
may or may not be activated.
removed from the starter switch or with the
Deployment of the driver front air bag does starter switch in position 0.
not mean that the front passenger front air G Warning!
bag also should have deployed. If the red SRS indicator lamp 6 in the
ProCarManuals.com
The OCS may have determined instrument cluster and the 45

Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there
weight up to or less than that of a typical is a malfunction in the OCS. The front
12-month-old child seated in a standard passenger front air bag will be deactivated in
child restraint – both of which are instances this case. Have the system checked by
where the system suppresses deployment qualified technicians as soon as possible.
of the front passenger front air bag even Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
though the impact met the criteria and was Center.
of sufficient severity to deploy the driver Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an
front air bag authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rthat the seat was occupied by a small In order to ensure proper operation of the air
individual (such as a young teenager or a bag system and OCS:
small adult) or a child who weighs more RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
than the weight of a typical 12-month-old position that is as upright as possible with
child in a standard child restraint – both of your back against the seat backrest.
which are instances where the system may
RWhile seated, an occupant should not
suppress deployment of the front
passenger front air bag even though the position him/herself in such a way as to
impact met the criteria and was of cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front from the seat bottom as this may result in
air bag the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
chapter.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 46
46 Occupant safety
OCS Self-test G Warning!

After turning the SmartKey in the starter According to accident statistics, children are
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the safer when properly restrained in the rear
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or seating positions than in the front seating
twice, the 45 indicator lamp position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
Safety and security
illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly children be placed in the rear seats whenever
sitting on the front passenger seat and the possible. Regardless of seating position,
system classifies the occupant as an adult, children 12 years old and under must be
the 45 indicator lamp will illuminate seated and properly secured in an appropriate
and go out after approximately 6 seconds. infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
seat recommended for the size and weight of
If the seat is not occupied and the system
the child.
classifies the front passenger seat as being
empty, the 45 indicator lamp will The infant or child restraint must be properly
illuminate and not go out. secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and
G Warning! top tether strap, fully in accordance with the
If the 45 indicator lamp does not child seat manufacturer’s instructions.
ProCarManuals.com
illuminate, the system is not functioning. You Occupants, especially children, should always
must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt
Center before seating any child on the front properly and use an appropriately sized infant
passenger seat. restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat
recommended for the size and weight of the
For more information, see the “Practical
child.
hints” section (Y page 308).
Children can be killed or seriously injured by
G Warning! an inflating air bag. Note the following
Never place anything between seat cushion important information when circumstances
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces require you to place a child in the front
the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and passenger seat:
back of the child seat must make full contact RChildren 12 years old and under must never
with the passenger seat cushion and ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
backrest. Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger child seat, which operates with the
seat backrest. BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause to deactivate the front passenger front air
injuries to the child in case of an accident, bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
instead of increasing protection for the child. they will be struck by the air bag when it
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
installation of child seats. or fatal injury will result.
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
front passenger seat will be seriously
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation injured or even killed if the front passenger
system front air bag inflates in a collision which
could occur under some circumstances,
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
even with the air bag technology installed
is standard equipment in Canada.
in your vehicle. The only means to
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 47
Occupant safety 47
completely eliminate this risk is to never indicator lamp go out while the restraint is
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint installed, please check installation. If the
in the front seat. We therefore strongly 45 indicator lamp remains out, do not
recommend that you always place a child use the BabySmart™ restraint to transport a
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. child on the front passenger seat until the
Safety and security

RIf you must install a BabySmart™ system has been repaired.
compatible rear-facing child restraint on
the front passenger seat because
circumstances require you to do so, make
sure the 45 indicator lamp is
illuminated, indicating that the front
Should the 45 indicator lamp not
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
installed, please check installation.
Periodically check the 45 indicator
lamp while driving to make sure the
ProCarManuals.com
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If

Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats,
the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz
remains out, do not transport a child on the
system, are required for use with the
front passenger seat until the system has
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
been repaired.
Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the Center for information on availability. With
front passenger seat will be seriously the special child seat installed properly, the
injured or even killed if the front passenger front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
45 indicator lamp : will be
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- illuminated, except with the SmartKey
facing child restraint on the front passenger removed from the starter switch or with the
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, starter switch in position 0.
use the proper child restraint The system does not deactivate
Rthe side impact air bag
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child Rthe pelvis air bag
seat manufacturer’s instructions. Rthe window curtain air bag
G Warning! Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
When using a BabySmart™ compatible child
seat on the front passenger seat, the front Self-test BabySmart™ without special
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if child seat installed
the 45 indicator lamp remains After turning the SmartKey in the starter
illuminated. switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
Please be sure to check the 45 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
indicator lamp every time you use a twice, the 45 indicator lamp comes
BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the on for approximately 6 seconds and then
front passenger seat. Should the 45 goes out.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 48
48 Occupant safety
If the 45 indicator lamp should not Seat belts

come on or is continuously lit, the system is
not functioning. You must see an authorized Safety notes
Mercedes-Benz Center before seating any The use of seat belts and infant and child
child on the front passenger seat. More restraint systems is required by law in all 50
information can be found in the “Practical
Safety and security
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S.

hints” section (Y page 307). territories and all Canadian provinces.
G Warning! Even where this is not the case, all vehicle
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile occupants should have their seat belts
phones, electronic tags such as those used in fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion.
ski passes and like electronic devices on the i See “Children in the vehicle”
front passenger seat. Signals from such (Y page 54) for information on
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™ Rinfants and children traveling with you in
air bag deactivation system. Such signal the vehicle
interference may cause the 45
Rrestraint systems for infants and children
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp 6 and/or the G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
45 indicator lamp could be

Always fasten your seat belt before driving off.
continuously lit, indicating that the system is Always make sure all of your passengers are
not functioning. The front passenger front air properly restrained. You and your passengers
bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to should always wear seat belts.
deploy in an accident.
Failure to wear and properly fasten and
G Warning! position your seat belt greatly increases your
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
accident.
will ONLY work with a special child seat
designed to operate with it. It will not work If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can
with child seats which are not BabySmart™ be considerably more severe without your
compatible. seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat
belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
Never place anything between seat cushion
the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system. The bottom of the child In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
seat must make full contact with the front death is lessened if you are properly wearing
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the as intended if the occupants are properly
child in case of an accident, instead of wearing their seat belts.
protecting the child.
G Warning!
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
installation of special child seats.
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
this can be dangerous. You could slide under
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the seat belt would apply force at the
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 49
Occupant safety 49
seat belt provide the best restraint when the SRS (driver front air bag, driver side knee
wearer is in a position that is as upright as bag, front passenger front air bag, side
possible and the seat belt is properly impact air bags, pelvis air bags, window
positioned on the body. curtain air bags for side windows),
Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs),
G Warning!
Safety and security

seat belt force limiters, and front seat knee
Never let more people ride in the vehicle than bolsters.
there are seat belts available. Make sure The system is designed to enhance the
everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly protection offered to properly belted
restrained with a separate seat belt. Never occupants in certain frontal (front air bags,
use a seat belt for more than one person at a driver’s side knee bag, and ETDs) and side
time. (side impact air bags, pelvis air bags,
window curtain air bags, and ETDs) impacts
G Warning! which exceed preset deployment
Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have thresholds.
been subjected to stress in an accident must
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
ProCarManuals.com
points must be checked.

In a frontal crash, your body would move
Only use seat belts which have been approved too far forward. That would increase the
by Mercedes-Benz. chance of head and neck injuries. The seat
Do not make any modifications to the seat belt would also apply too much force to the
belts. This can lead to unintended activation ribs or abdomen, which could severely
of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when injure internal organs such as your liver or
necessary. spleen.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
severely weaken them. In a crash they may section is located as close as possible to
not be able to provide adequate protection. the middle of the shoulder. It should not
Have all work carried out only by qualified touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
technicians. Contact an authorized portion of the seat belt under your arm.
Mercedes-Benz Center. RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
your hips and not across the abdomen. If
Proper use of seat belts the lap belt is positioned across your
abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
G Warning! a crash.
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY
RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
RSeat belts can only protect when used breakable objects in or on your clothing,
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
way than as described in this section, as these might cause injuries.
that could result in serious injuries in case
RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
of an accident.
snugly. Take special care of this when
REach occupant should wear their seat belt wearing loose clothing.
at all times, because seat belts help reduce
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
the likelihood of and potential severity of
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
The integrated restraint system includes
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 50
50 Occupant safety
around a person and another person or children 12 years old and under must be
other objects at the same time. seated and properly secured in an
RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
crash, you would not have the full width of restraint, or booster seat recommended for
the seat belt to distribute impact forces. the size and weight of the child. For additional
Safety and security
The twisted seat belt against your body information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
could cause injuries. A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
significantly increased if the child restraints
RPregnant women should also always use a
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
or the child is not properly secured in the child
should be positioned as low as possible on
restraint.
the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
the abdomen. G Warning!
RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
as upright as possible. deactivation system, Canada only: Children
RCheck your seat belt during travel to make 12 years old and under must never ride in the
sure it is properly positioned. front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz
ProCarManuals.com
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child

RNever place your feet on the instrument seat, which operates with the BabySmart™
panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always system installed in the vehicle to deactivate
keep both feet on the floor in front of the the front passenger front air bag when it is
seat. installed properly. Otherwise they will be
RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
restraints, toddler restraints, or children in crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
booster seats, always follow the child seat will result.
manufacturer’s instructions.
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
This could damage the seat belt.
Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that of seat belt outlet :.
children be placed in the rear seats whenever X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
possible. Regardless of seating position, across the top of your shoulder and the lap
portion across your hips.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 51
Occupant safety 51
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it Releasing the seat belts
clicks. X Press seat belt release button ?
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
(Y page 50).
correct height (Y page 51). Allow the retractor to completely rewind
X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
Safety and security

snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up. (Y page 50).
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
belt have special seat belt retractors to ! Make sure the seat belt retracts
secure child restraints properly. For more completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
information on special seat belt retractors, latch plate could get caught or pinched in
see “Infant and child restraint systems” the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
(Y page 55). damage the seat belt and impair its
effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
To release the seat belt with seat belt release
door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
button ?, see (Y page 51).
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Seat belt outlet height adjustment
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
ProCarManuals.com
You can adjust the height of the seat belt Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
outlet for the driver’s and front passenger Center.
seat.
Enhanced seat belt reminder system
When the engine is started, the seat belt
telltale 7 will always illuminate for
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
the engine is started, an additional warning
chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
after approximately 6 seconds or once the
driver’s seat belt is fastened.
If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height
front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
adjuster upward.
passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
The seat belt outlet height adjuster
front doors closed,
engages in different positions.
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains
X Lowering: Press and hold release illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
button :. or front passenger’s seat belt is not
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster fastened.
downward. Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
X Release release button : and make sure
15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
the seat belt outlet height adjuster engages 7 starts flashing and a warning chime
into place. sounds with increasing intensity for a
maximum of 60 seconds or until the
driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
fastened.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 52
52 Occupant safety
If you and/or your passenger release the limiters, when activated, are employed to
seat belt during driving, the seat belt help reduce the peak force exerted by the
telltale 7 starts flashing and the seat belts on occupants during a crash.
warning chime sounds as described before. i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
Safety and security
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds,

The ETDs do not pull occupants back
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat
toward the seat backrest.
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but
continues to be illuminated. G Warning!
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale replaced.
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed For your safety, when disposing of the
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h). pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if instructions. These are available at any
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
seat belt (with the front passenger seat
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is
ProCarManuals.com
standing still and a front door is opened. NECK-PRO active front head
For more information, see “Practical hints” restraints (except C 63 AMG)
(Y page 301). The NECK-PRO active front head restraints
are intended to offer the driver and front
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), passenger increased protection from
seat belt force limiter whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear-
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head
The seat belts for the front seats and rear
restraints on the front seats are designed to
outer seats are equipped with ETDs and seat
move forward in the direction of travel. They
belt force limiters.
thus provide the head with increased support
The ETDs are designed to activate in the earlier on in the collision sequence. The
following cases: NECK-PRO active front head restraints will
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding move forward whether the seats are occupied
the system’s preset deployment threshold or not.
Rin side impacts exceeding the system’s G Warning!
preset deployment threshold on the far Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
side of the impact head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
Rif the restraint systems are operational and PRO active front head restraints may not be
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator able to function properly or offer the intended
lamp” (Y page 36) degree of protection they were designed for
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate in the event of a rear-end collision.
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
G Warning!
properly inserted into buckle).
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
The ETDs for the rear seats will activate with have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
or without the respective seat belts fastened. Benz for your vehicle model.
In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the Using other seat or head restraint covers may
seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit interfere with or prevent the activation of the
more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 53
Occupant safety 53
NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/ Rrear view mirror adjustment
or the deployment of the front side impact air Rfastening of seat belts
bags or pelvis air bags.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Safety and security

When the NECK-PRO active front head
restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO
active front head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see
“Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 311).
ProCarManuals.com
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active

front head restraints.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close Steering wheel
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head G Observe Safety notes, see page 84.
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for XPosition steering wheel : properly. See
injury to the head and neck in the event of an (Y page 85) for manual adjustment and
accident or similar situation. (Y page 85) for electrical adjustment.
Make sure:
For information on head restraint adjustment,
see “Head restraint height” (Y page 82), or RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment” arms slightly bent at the elbows.
(Y page 82). RYou can move your legs freely.
RAll displays (including malfunction and
Correct driver seat adjustment indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible.
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle Seat belt
control the following must be done before the
vehicle is put into motion: G Observe Safety notes, see page 48.
X Fasten and position your seat belt ;
Rseat adjustment
correctly (Y page 50).
Rhead restraint adjustment
Rsteering wheel adjustment
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 54
54 Occupant safety
Make sure: Children in the vehicle

RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
Safety notes
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
the middle of the shoulder. vehicle:
Safety and security
X Secure the child using an infant or child

RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
as possible on your hips.
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
Seat and head restraint secured at all times while the vehicle is in
G Observe Safety notes, see page 79. motion.
XPosition seat = and head restraint G Warning!
properly. See (Y page 80) for seat and When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
head restraint adjustment. SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
Observe the following points: take the SmartKey with you and lock the
RAlways be in a properly seated position. vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
ProCarManuals.com
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child

RThe position should be as far rearward from
restraint system, or with access to an
the front air bag in the steering wheel as unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
possible, while still permitting proper access to a vehicle could result in an accident
operation of vehicle controls. and/or serious personal injury. The children
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating could
position that still allows you to reach the Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
vehicle equipment that can be operated
is as nearly upright as possible. even if the SmartKey is removed from the
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
your legs. adjustment, or the memory function
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as If children open a door, they could injure other
close to the head as possible and the persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
center of the head restraint supports the themselves or be injured by following traffic.
back of the head at eye level. Do not expose the child restraint system to
RNever place hands under the seat or near direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
any moving parts while the seat is being metal parts, for example, could become very
adjusted. hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger compartment or trunk unless they
are firmly secured in place.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 55
Occupant safety 55
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo G Warning!

increases a child’s risk of injury in the event Never release the seat belt buckle while the
of vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
Rstrong braking maneuvers retractor will be deactivated.
Rsudden changes of direction
Safety and security

Ran accident
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 57).
Infant and child restraint systems For information on LATCH-type (ISOFIX)
G Observe Safety notes, see page 54. child seat anchors (Y page 58).
We recommend all infants and children be The use of infant or child restraints is required
properly restrained at all times while the by law in all 50 states, the District of
vehicle is in motion. Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canada only: Canadian provinces.
Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child Infants and small children should be seated
restraint for the front passenger seat in this in an appropriate infant or child restraint
ProCarManuals.com
vehicle. system. They must be properly secured in

All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat accordance with the manufacturer’s
belt have special seat belt retractors for instructions for the child restraint. All infant
secure fastening of child restraints. or child restraint systems must comply with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
mounting.
A statement by the child restraint
To activate the special seat belt retractor: manufacturer of compliance with these
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and standards can be found on the instruction
let it retract. label on the restraint and in the instruction
During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting manual provided with the restraint.
sound can be heard to indicate that the When using any infant restraint, toddler
special seat belt retractor is activated. restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
The seat belt is now locked. carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
X Push down on child restraint to take up any instructions for installation and use.
slack. Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
infant or child restraints.
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
seat belt retract completely. G Warning!
The seat belt can then again be used in the According to accident statistics, children are
usual manner. safer when properly restrained in the rear
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor seating positions than in the front seating
for the front passenger seat, the front position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
passenger seat must be in the most backward children be placed in the rear seats whenever
position. possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 56
56 Occupant safety
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
seat recommended for the size and weight of front passenger seat will be seriously
the child. injured or even killed if the front passenger
The infant or child restraint must be properly front air bag inflates in a collision which
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat could occur under some circumstances,
Safety and security
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and even with the air bag technology installed
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the in your vehicle. The only means to
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. completely eliminate this risk is to never
Occupants, especially children, should always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt in the front seat. We therefore strongly
properly and use an appropriately sized infant recommend that you always place a child
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
recommended for the size and weight of the RIf you must install a rear-facing child
child. restraint on the front passenger seat
Children can be killed or seriously injured by because circumstances require you to do
an inflating air bag. Note the following so, make sure the 45 indicator lamp
important information when circumstances is illuminated, indicating that the front
ProCarManuals.com
require you to place a child in the front passenger front air bag is deactivated.
passenger seat: Should the 45 indicator lamp not
RUSA
illuminate or go out while the restraint is
only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
installed, please check installation.
bag technology designed to deactivate the
Periodically check the 45 indicator
front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
lamp while driving to make sure the
when the system senses the weight of a
45 indicator lamp is illuminated. If
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate the 45 indicator lamp goes out or
child restraint on the front passenger seat. remains out, do not transport a child on the
front passenger seat until the system has
RUSA only: For children larger than the been repaired.
typical 12-month-old child, the front
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
passenger front air bag may or may not be
front passenger seat will be seriously
activated. Always make sure the
45 indicator lamp is illuminated,
indicating that the front passenger front air
bag is deactivated. RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
facing child restraint on the front passenger
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
under must never ride in the front seat,
use the proper child restraint
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
operates with the BabySmart™ system
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
front passenger front air bag when it is
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
G Warning!
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury Infants and small children should never share
will result. a seat belt with another occupant. During an
accident, they could be crushed between the
occupant and seat belt.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 57
Occupant safety 57
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is

significantly increased if the child restraints
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
or the child is not properly secured in the child
restraint.
Safety and security

Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt X Move the respective head restraint : to
fits properly without a booster. its uppermost position (Y page 83).
When the child restraint is not in use, remove X Lift up anchorage ring cover ; from
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat anchorage ring =.
belt to prevent the child restraint from
becoming a projectile in the event of an
ProCarManuals.com
accident.
Installation of infant and child restraint

systems
G Warning!
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their X Guide top tether strap A between head
upright position before installing top tether restraint : and top of the seat backrest.
straps or when the extended cargo X Securely fasten hook ?, which is part of
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
top tether strap A, to anchorage ring =.
seat backrests are secured properly by
pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If Make sure
a seat backrest is not locked properly, the Rhook ? is attached to anchorage ring =
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would beyond the safety catch, as illustrated
no longer be supported properly or positioned
Rtop tether strap A is not twisted
to provide its intended benefit. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries. Rhead restraint : is installed (if removable)
and positioned such that top tether strap
This vehicle is equipped with tether A can pass freely between head
anchorages for a top tether strap at each of
restraint : and top of the seat backrest
the rear seating positions.
Top tether straps enable an additional X Lower head restraint : if necessary
connection to be made between child (Y page 83).
restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
(ISOFIX) anchors and rear seats. This can
further reduce the risk of injury.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 58
58 Occupant safety
Once hook ? is attached, the child restraint Vehicles with non-foldable rear bench seat:
itself can be secured. The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors are
X
blended with covers. Vehicles with split rear
Install the child restraint system and
bench seat: The LATCH-type (ISOFIX) anchors
tighten top tether strap A according to the
are located between the seat cushion and the
child restraint manufacturer’s instructions.
backrest.
Safety and security
After removing the child restraint system and

top tether strap A:
X Pull down and close anchorage ring
cover ; from respective anchorage ring
=.
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type

(ISOFIX)
G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
Non-foldable rear bench seat

Children too big for a toddler restraint must Information sign : indicates the position of
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position anchor =.
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
X Remove anchorage ring covers ; from
face or neck.
anchors = by pulling it in direction of
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
arrow.
proper seat belt positioning for children over
X Store anchorage ring covers ;, for
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a example in the storage compartment of the
booster. rear center armrest.
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
instructions.
The child seat must be firmly attached to both
anchors.
An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
loose during an accident which could result in
serious injury or death to the child.
Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
Each rear outer seat has two LATCH-type

(ISOFIX) anchors for the installation of a Split rear bench seat, child seat anchors
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat with matching
mounting fittings.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seats may
also be used and can be installed using the
vehicle’s seat belt system. Install child seat
according to the manufacturer’s instructions.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 59
Occupant safety 59
X Install a LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seat Override switch

according to the manufacturer’s G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.
instructions.
With the override switch you can disable the
A rigid connection between the child seat
rear door window switches in the rear door
and the body of the vehicle is established.
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear
Safety and security

you have children riding in the rear passenger
center seat can operate freely with a child compartment.
seat installed.
G Warning!
Child safety Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
Child safety locks children may otherwise injure themselves,
G Observe Safety notes, see page 54. e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
window opening.
G Warning!
Children could open a rear door from the
inside. This may cause serious personal injury
ProCarManuals.com
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear

doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors

enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
X Activating: Press override switch :.
unlocked.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
The rear door windows can no longer be
operated using the respective switch
located in the rear doors.
You can still operate the rear door windows
using the switches located on the door
control panel of the driver’s door.
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
again.
The rear door windows can be operated
again using the respective switch located
X Securing: Press the lever up in direction of in the rear doors.
arrow :. For more information on power windows, see
X Check to make sure the child safety locks the “Controls in detail” section
are working properly. (Y page 98).
X Releasing: Press the lever down in
direction of arrow ;.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 60
60 Driving safety systems
Panic alarm i Canada only:

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause interference,
Safety and security
and
2. this device must accept any
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Any unauthorized modification to this
device could void the user’s authority to
X Activating: Press and hold ! operate the equipment.
button : for at least 1 second.
An audible alarm and flashing exterior
lamps will operate. Driving safety systems
ProCarManuals.com
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again. Introduction

or This section contains information about the
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch. following driving safety systems:
or RABS (Antilock Brake System)
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
RAdaptive Brake
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
inside the vehicle.
REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
i USA only:
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the i In winter operation, the maximum
following two conditions: effectiveness of most of the driving
1. This device may not cause harmful systems described in this section is only
interference, and achieved with winter tires, or snow chains
2. this device must accept any as required.
interference that may cause undesired Safety notes
operation.
G Warning!
Any unauthorized modification to this The following factors increase the risk of
device could void the user’s authority to accidents:
operate the equipment.
RExcessive speed, especially in turns
RWet and slippery road surfaces
RFollowing another vehicle too closely
The driving safety systems described in this
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 61
Driving safety systems 61
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or Braking

steering efficiency beyond that afforded by At the instant one of the wheels is about to
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
or the traction afforded. brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can ABS is in the regulating mode.
Safety and security

prevent accidents. X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the pedal while you feel the pulsation.
driving safety systems described in this
Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
section must never be exploited in a reckless
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
namely braking power and the ability to steer
the user’s safety or the safety of others.
the vehicle.
Always adjust your driving style to the
The pulsating brake pedal can be an
prevailing road and weather conditions and
indication of hazardous road conditions and
keep a safe distance to other road users and
functions as a reminder to take extra care
objects on the street.
while driving.
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
ProCarManuals.com
Emergency brake maneuver

indicator and warning lamps that may come
on as well as messages in the multifunction X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
display that may appear. pedal.
G Warning!
If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety
ABS
systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also
G Observe Safety notes, see page 60. switched off. Observe indicator and warning
lamps that may come on as well as messages
G Warning! in the multifunction display that may appear.
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
during hard braking, reducing steering
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS
capability and extending the braking distance.
and significantly reduces braking
effectiveness.
The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates BAS

the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
lock during braking. This allows you to G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.
maintain the ability to steer your vehicle. The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in
The ABS is functional above a speed of emergency situations. If you apply the brakes
approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent very quickly, the BAS provides full brake
of road surface conditions. boost automatically, thereby potentially
reducing the braking distance.
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until
respond even to light brake pressure.
the emergency braking situation is over.
The ABS indicator lamp ! in the
The ABS will prevent the wheels from
instrument cluster comes on when you switch
locking.
on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
is running.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 62
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes ESP®

function again as normal. The BAS is then
deactivated. G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.
G Warning! The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running.
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still
Safety and security
It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of

functions, but without the additional brake
adhesive friction between the tires and the
boost available that the BAS would normally
road surface) and handling.
provide in an emergency braking maneuver.
Therefore, the braking distance may increase. The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
from the direction of travel as intended by the
driver. By applying brakes to individual
wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
Adaptive Brake
ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
Adaptive Brake provides a high level of ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
braking safety as well as increased braking on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
comfort. Adaptive Brake takes driver and also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
vehicle characteristics into consideration, steering maneuvers.
ProCarManuals.com
thus achieving an optimal braking effect.

The ESP® warning lamp d in the
In addiditon, Adaptive Brake provides the hill- instrument cluster comes on when you switch
start assist system (Y page 183). on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
For more information on the brake system, is running.
see (Y page 255).
The ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
EBP engaged.
G Warning!
Never switch off the ESP® when you see the
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
of the braking effort in straight-line braking follows:
without a loss of vehicle stability. RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as
possible.
G Warning!
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
still function with full brake boost. However, pedal.
the rear wheels could lock up during RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
emergency braking situations, for example. prevailing road conditions.
You could lose control of the vehicle and
Failure to observe these guidelines could
cause an accident.
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot
Adapt your driving style to the changed prevent accidents resulting from excessive
driving characteristics. speed.
i Vehicle status messages in the

multifunction display (Y page 270) will
refer to the ESP® as ESC.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 63
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Electronic Traction System

Only conduct operational or performance (ETS/4-ETS)
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized G Observe Safety notes, see page 60.
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could The ETS (Electronic Traction System) and
otherwise seriously damage the brake 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
Safety and security

system or the transfer case which is not System, vehicles with 4MATIC only) are
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited components of the ESP®. The ETS/4-ETS
Warranty. improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
available traction, especially under slippery
! Vehicles with 4MATIC: road conditions by applying the brakes to a
Because the ESP® operates automatically, spinning wheel. Vehicles with 4MATIC also
the engine and ignition must be shut off transfer more power to the wheel(s) with
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or traction.
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in When you switch off the ESP®, the
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is ETS/4-ETS is still enabled.
being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
ProCarManuals.com
Active braking action through the ESP® Switching the ESP® off or on (except
may otherwise seriously damage the brake C 63 AMG)
system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. G Warning!
The ESP® should not be switched off during
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: normal driving other than in the
Because the ESP® operates automatically, circumstances described below. Disabling
the engine and ignition must be shut off the system will reduce vehicle stability in
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or driving maneuvers.
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is wheel is mounted.
being tested on a brake test dynamometer
or the vehicle is being towed with the front To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
axle raised. the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
Active braking action through the ESP® and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
may otherwise seriously damage the brake example
system which is not covered by the Rwhen driving with snow chains
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Rin deep snow
! The ESP® will only function properly if you Rin sand or gravel
use wheels of the recommended tire size
as specified in the “Technical data” section G Warning!
of this Operator’s Manual. Switch on the ESP® immediately if the
aforementioned circumstances do not apply
i The cruise control switches off anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not
automatically when the ESP® engages. stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid
or a wheel is spinning.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 64
When you switch off the ESP®, ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle extended period with the ESP® switched
off. This may cause serious damage to the
Rthe engine output is not limited, which drivetrain which is not covered by the
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
into surfaces for better grip
Safety and security
X Switching on: Press ESP® switch : until

Rthe ETS/4-ETS will still apply the brakes to
a spinning wheel the ESP® warning lamp d in the
instrument cluster goes out.
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you You are now again in normal driving mode
are braking
with the ESP® switched on.
Rthe cruise control cannot be activated
Rthe cruise control switches off if activated C 63 AMG
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or Switching ESP® SPORT on or off
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
G Warning!
warning lamp d in the instrument
ESP® SPORT should not be switched on
ProCarManuals.com
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will

during normal driving.
then not stabilize the vehicle.
Switching ESP® SPORT on will result in the
following:
Rno restriction to engine torque
Rsystem-supported traction control is
limited
ESP® SPORT is designed for driving on closed
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer
and understeer characteristics are desired
and requires a highly skilled and experienced
driver able to handle these critical driving
situations.
X Switching off: With the engine running,
You could lose control of your vehicle and
press ESP® switch : until the ESP® cause an accident.
warning lamp d in the instrument
Please be aware of these limits when you
cluster comes on.
switch on ESP® SPORT.
The ESP® is switched off.
Do not switch on ESP® SPORT when a spare
G Warning! wheel is mounted.
When the ESP® warning lamp d is To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch on
illuminated continuously, the ESP® is ESP® SPORT. This allows the drive wheels to
switched off or is not operational due to a spin and thus cut into surfaces for better grip,
malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard for example
driving maneuvers is reduced.
Rwhen driving with snow chains
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
road conditions and to the non-operating Rin deep snow
status of the ESP®. Rin sand or gravel
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 65
G Warning! ESC-SPORT appears in the multifunction

Switch off ESP® SPORT and switch on the display.
X Switching off: With the engine running,
ESP® immediately if the aforementioned
circumstances do not apply anymore. press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.
Otherwise ESP® SPORT will only stabilize the The ESP® warning lamp d in the
Safety and security

vehicle to a limited extent when it is starting instrument cluster goes out. The message
to skid or a wheel is spinning. ESC-ON appears in the multifunction
display.
When you switch on ESP® SPORT
ESP® SPORT switches off automatically when
Rthe ESP® stabilizes the vehicle only to a you turn off the engine. When starting the
limited extent engine, the ESP® is activated automatically.
Rthe engine output is limited, but only to the
i Vehicle status messages in the
extent that allows the drive wheels to spin multifunction display (Y page 270) will
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip refer to the ESP® as ESC.
Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheel Switching the ESP® off or on
ProCarManuals.com
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you G Warning!

are braking hard The ESP® should not be switched off during
Rthe
normal driving.
cruise control cannot be activated
Disabling of the system will result in the
Rthe cruise control switches off if activated following:
i When ESP® SPORT is switched on and Rno restriction to engine torque
one or more drive wheels are spinning, the Rloss of system-supported traction control
ESP® warning lamp d in the instrument
“ESP® OFF” is designed for driving on closed
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will
tracks when the vehicle’s natural oversteer
then stabilize the vehicle only to a limited
and understeer characteristics are desired
extent.
and requires a highly skilled and experienced
driver able to handle these critical driving
situations.
You could lose control of your vehicle and
cause an accident.
Please be aware of these limits when you
switch off the ESP®.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
wheel is mounted.
To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off

the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
X Switching on: With the engine running, and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly. example
The ESP® warning lamp d in the Rwhen driving with snow chains
instrument cluster comes on. The message
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 66
66 Anti-theft systems
G Warning! i Vehicle status messages in the

Switch on the ESP® immediately if the multifunction display (Y page 270) will
aforementioned circumstances do not apply refer to the ESP® as ESC.
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not G Warning!
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid
When the ESP® warning lamp d and the
Safety and security
or a wheel is spinning.
ESP® OFF warning lamp å are illuminated
When you switch off the ESP®, continuously, the ESP® is switched off.
Vehicle stability in standard driving
Rthe ESP® will not stabilize the vehicle
maneuvers is reduced.
Rthe engine output is not limited, which Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut road conditions and to the non-operating
into surfaces for better grip status of the ESP®.
Rthe ETS will still apply the brakes to a
spinning wheel ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you extended period with the ESP® switched
are braking hard off. This may cause serious damage to the
ProCarManuals.com
Rthe
drivetrain which is not covered by the
cruise control cannot be activated
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Rthe cruise control switches off if activated
X Switching on: With the engine running,
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or press ESP® SPORT switch : briefly.
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP® The ESP® warning lamp d and the
warning lamp d in the instrument ESP® OFF warning lamp å in the
cluster does not flash. The ESP® will then instrument cluster go out. The message
not stabilize the vehicle. ESC-ON appears in the multifunction
display.
Anti-theft systems
Immobilizer
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized
persons from starting your vehicle.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The
engine can be started by anyone with a valid
X Switching off: With the engine running, SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
press ESP® SPORT switch : until the
ESP® warning lamp d and the ESP OFF Activating
warning lamp åin the instrument X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey
cluster come on. from the starter switch.
The message ESC-OFF appears in the X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
multifunction display.
open the driver’s door.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 67
Anti-theft systems 67
Deactivating i If the alarm stays on for more than

X
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
Switch on the ignition.
call to the Customer Assistance Center
i Starting the engine will also deactivate automatically. The Tele Aid system will
the immobilizer. initiate the call provided that
Safety and security

In the event that the engine cannot be Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is service
charged), the system is not operational. Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz properly
Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
supply and GPS coverage are available
Anti-theft alarm system

Once the alarm system has been armed, a
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
someone opens
ProCarManuals.com
Ra door
Rthe trunk
Rthe hood
The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element, a door, for example, is closed
immediately. X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
The alarm system will also be triggered when SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
Rthe
The turn signal lamps flash three times and
vehicle is opened with the mechanical
an acoustic warning sounds three times to
key
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
Ra door is opened from the inside lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
Rthe trunk is opened with the emergency system is armed.
release button i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
To cancel the alarm after it has been times and the acoustic warning does not
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm” sound three times, a door or the trunk may
(Y page 68). not be properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once and an
acoustic warning sounds once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 68
68 Anti-theft systems
i Unless you open a door or the trunk within

approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
Safety and security
rearmed.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
ProCarManuals.com
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of

the vehicle.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 69
69
Vehicle equipment .............................. 70

Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 77
Seats .................................................... 79
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 84
Mirrors ................................................. 86
Memory function ................................. 89
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 90
Wipers .................................................. 96
Power windows ................................... 98
Driving and parking .......................... 101
Manual transmission ........................ 107
Automatic transmission ................... 108
Transfer case .................................... 116
ProCarManuals.com
Instrument cluster ............................ 116

Control system .................................. 118
Audio system .................................... 136
Driving systems ................................ 180
Climate control system .................... 189
Rear window defroster ..................... 196
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 196
Panorama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel ...................................... 199
Loading and storing .......................... 202
Useful features ................................. 207
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 70
70 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle

(Y page 310).
i This Operator’s Manual describes all X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
features, standard or optional, potentially battery connections checked at an
available for your vehicle at the time of authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
purchase. Please be aware that your If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
vehicle might not be equipped with all Roadside Assistance or an authorized
features described in this manual. Mercedes-Benz Center.
ProCarManuals.com Controls in detail
Locking and unlocking SmartKey

Notes Your vehicle comes supplied with two
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
G Observe Safety notes, see page 54. removable mechanical key.
When unlocking or locking the vehicle with The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks
the SmartKey an acoustic signal sounds. The
Rthe doors
acoustic signal is activated at the factory. If
you wish to deactivate the feature, or adjust Rthe trunk lid
its signal volume, contact an authorized Rthe fuel filler flap
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. An acoustic signal sounds
once, and the locking knobs in the doors
move up. The anti-theft alarm system is
disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. An acoustic signal sounds
three times, and the locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm
system is armed.
All doors and the trunk must be closed. : & Lock button
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with ; F Unlock button for trunk lid
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey = % Unlock button
are discharged, the SmartKey is
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is i USA only:
drained. This device complies with Part 15 of the
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
(Y page 73) and replace them if following two conditions:
necessary. 1. This device may not cause harmful
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the interference, and
driver’s door and the trunk (Y page 309). 2. this device must accept any
operation.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 71
Locking and unlocking 71
Any unauthorized modification to this X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
device could void the user’s authority to flap: Press button % once.
operate the equipment. X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice.
i Canada only:
X Global locking: Press button &.
This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
KEYLESS-GO
Controls in detail
and Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
2. this device must accept any with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
interference received, including with remote control and a removable
interference that may cause undesired mechanical key.
operation of the device. The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Any unauthorized modification to this checked every time you grasp an outside door
device could void the user’s authority to handle.
ProCarManuals.com
When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle

unlocks
Factory setting
Rthe doors
X Global unlocking: Press button %.
Rthe trunk lid
Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking Rthe fuel filler flap
the vehicle:
i USA only:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. This device complies with Part 15 of the
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
rearmed. following two conditions:
X Global locking: Press button &. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Selective setting 2. this device must accept any
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish interference that may cause undesired
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing operation.
button % will then only unlock the driver’s
door and the fuel filler flap.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons operate the equipment.
% and & simultaneously for
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 72
i Canada only: cannot be locked or the engine started via

This device complies with RSS-210 of the KEYLESS-GO system.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
the following two conditions: (e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with
1. This device may not cause interference, the SmartKey)
and - when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
2. this device must accept any stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the outside door handle the

interference that may cause undesired message Key Not Detected appears in
operation of the device. the multifunction display
Any unauthorized modification to this - with the engine running, the red message
device could void the user’s authority to Key Not Detected appears in the
operate the equipment. multifunction display while driving off
Find the SmartKey or change its present
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO location immediately (e.g. place it on the
RYou
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
can also use the SmartKey with
pocket).
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
(Y page 70). RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
turn it off again by
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
with button &). button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you. - inserting the SmartKey into the starter
switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
RNever store the SmartKey together with and the automatic transmission is in park
- electronic items such as a mobile phone position P
or another SmartKey
RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
- metallic objects such as coins or metal unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
foil of the vehicle and
Doing so could impair the function of the - an outside door handle is splashed with
KEYLESS-GO system. water
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey or
must be located outside the vehicle within - you attempt to clean an outside door
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the
handle
trunk.
RRemember that the engine can be started
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle inside the vehicle.
and switch on the ignition once to activate Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
the KEYLESS-GO function. one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away If you leave the SmartKey behind when
from the vehicle, the system may no longer exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle appears in the multifunction display.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 73
Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle, X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
no SmartKey outside the vehicle): flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door
When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle, handle.
the message Key Detected in Vehicle X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door
appears in the multifunction display. The handle other than the driver’s outside door
vehicle will not be locked. handle.
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door
Factory setting handle :.
Controls in detail
X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
handle.
Checking SmartKey batteries
Unless you open a door or the trunk within
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be
rearmed.
ProCarManuals.com
X Press button & or % on the

SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
X Global locking: Touch outside of a door briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
handle :. are discharged.
X Replace the batteries (Y page 312).
Selective setting
i You can obtain the required batteries at
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i If the batteries are checked within signal
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. range of the vehicle, pressing button
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
% and & simultaneously for accordingly.
approximately 6 seconds until the battery
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
Loss of the SmartKey
KEYLESS-GO will then function as follows:
If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
you should do the following:
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 74
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an Opening the doors from the inside
You can open a door from the inside even
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
when it is locked unless it is secured with the
mechanical key to your car insurance
child safety lock (Y page 59).
company immediately.
Open door only when conditions are safe to
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
do so.
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement. For

information on replacing the SmartKey, see
“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 74).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Benz Center will require proof of identity and Example illustration driver’s door
vehicle ownership with original documents, If the vehicle has previously been locked with
including the following: the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration theft alarm system.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 68).
license X Front doors: Pull on inside door
handle ; on the respective front door.
If you are an authorized person:
If the door was locked, locking knob : will
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration move up.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers
X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
license for the authorized individual respective rear door to unlock door.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the X Pull on the inside door handle on the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is respective rear door.
being requested
i Duplicated or photocopied
documentation will not be accepted. Automatic central locking
The doors and the trunk lock automatically
Activating the key when the vehicle is set into motion.
Once you, or an authorized person, has You can open a locked front door from the
provided the appropriate documents, the inside. Open door only when conditions are
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to safe to do so.
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it The doors are designed to unlock
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- automatically after an accident if the force of
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
The vehicle locks automatically when the
ignition is switched on and the wheels are
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 75
turning at a vehicle speed of above 9 mph

(15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
on a test stand.
Controls in detail
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.
When the front passenger door is closed,
the vehicle locks.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
X Switching off: Press and hold central switch :.
unlocking switch : until an acoustic signal You can open a locked front door from the
ProCarManuals.com
sounds. inside. Open door only when conditions are

X Switching on: Press and hold central safe to do so.
locking switch ; until an acoustic signal If the vehicle was previously locked with the
sounds. central locking switch
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
i If you press and hold either switch and no
acoustic signal sounds, the respective the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
setting has already been selected. front door is opened from the inside
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective
i You can also switch on or off the settings, only the front door opened from
automatic central locking using the control the inside is unlocked
system (Y page 135).
Opening the trunk

Locking and unlocking from the inside
G Warning!
Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the is running and while driving. Among other
inside using the central locking or unlocking dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
switch. This can be useful, for example, if you may enter vehicle interior resulting in
want to lock the vehicle before starting to unconsciousness and death.
drive.
The central locking or unlocking switch does ! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
not lock or unlock the fuel filler flap. swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
You can open the trunk when the vehicle is
stationary.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 76
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.80 m) Closing the trunk

is required to open the trunk lid.
G Warning!
Opening the trunk from the outside Make sure the trunk is closed when the engine
is running and while driving. Among other
dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases
may enter vehicle interior resulting in
unconsciousness and death.
G Warning!
To prevent possible personal injury, always
keep hands and fingers away from the trunk
opening when closing the trunk lid. Be
especially careful when small children are
around.
X Press and hold button F (Y page 70) on G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.
the SmartKey until the trunk unlocks and Do not leave the SmartKey in the open trunk.
begins to open. You may lock yourself out.
or If the vehicle was previously locked centrally
X Pull on handle :. with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the trunk
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The lid will lock automatically when closed. All
vehicle must be unlocked. turn signal lamps flash three times and an
acoustic signal sounds three times to confirm
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked
locking.
separately (Y page 77).
Opening the trunk from the inside
X Lower the trunk lid using handle : or ;.

X Close trunk lid with hands placed flat on
trunk lid.
X Press remote trunk opening switch : until
the trunk begins to open.
If the trunk does not open, it is still locked Trunk lid emergency release
separately (Y page 77).
The trunk lid can be opened from inside the
trunk with the emergency release button.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 77
Starter switch positions 77
X Valet locking: Close the trunk.

X Remove the mechanical key from the
SmartKey (Y page 309).
X Insert the mechanical key in the trunk lid
lock.
X Turn the mechanical key clockwise to
position 2 and remove the mechanical
key in that position to lock the trunk.
Controls in detail
The trunk remains locked even when the
vehicle is centrally unlocked.
X Briefly press emergency release You can then only open the trunk with the
button :. mechanical key.
The emergency release button unlocks and X Canceling: Insert the mechanical key in
opens the trunk while the vehicle is standing the trunk lid lock.
still or in motion. X Turn the mechanical key counterclockwise
Illumination of the emergency release button: to neutral position 1 and remove the
ProCarManuals.com
RThe
mechanical key in that position to unlock
button flashes for 30 minutes after
the trunk.
opening the trunk.
You can now open the trunk.
RThe button flashes for 60 minutes after
closing the trunk.
The emergency release button does not open Starter switch positions
the trunk, if the vehicle battery is discharged
or disconnected. SmartKey
Valet locking
You can lock the trunk separately with the
mechanical key. This denies unauthorized
access to the trunk, e.g. when you valet park
the vehicle.
X Leave only the SmartKey less its
mechanical key with the vehicle.
Starter switch
g For removing SmartKey
Vehicles with automatic transmission:
Gear selector lever must be in park
position P.
1 Power supply for some electrical
consumers, e.g. wipers
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 78
78 Starter switch positions
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical KEYLESS-GO

consumers) and driving position
3 Starting position
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
the instrument cluster come on. The low- integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
indicator lamps, and the indicator lamps for
inserted in the starter switch and the

the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
SmartKey present in the vehicle.
If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
come on when the ignition is switched on, Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
have it checked and replaced if necessary. If without depressing the brake pedal
a lamp in the instrument cluster remains on corresponds to the various starter switch
after starting the engine or comes on while positions (Y page 77).
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument cluster” Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
(Y page 297). with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
If the SmartKey is left in starter switch start the engine (Y page 101).
position 0 for an extended period of time, it The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
can no longer be turned in the starter switch. pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
In this case, the steering is locked. To unlock, then insert the SmartKey into the starter
remove SmartKey from the starter switch and switch.
reinsert. i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
The steering is locked when the SmartKey is not need to be removed from the starter
removed from the starter switch. switch when you leave the vehicle.
X Always remove the SmartKey from the However, always take the SmartKey with
starter switch when the engine is not in you when you leave the vehicle. As long as
operation. the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s
This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle electrical systems can be switched on or
battery discharge or a completely the engine can be started using the
discharged vehicle battery. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
sufficiently charged.
X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
necessary (Y page 323).
or
X Get a jump start (Y page 323).
i If the SmartKey does not belong to the

vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start. : KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
; Starter switch
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 79
Seats 79
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Ignition (or position 2)

into the starter switch (if not inserted
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
already).
twice.
i Allow for 2 seconds until the system has This supplies power for all electrical
detected the KEYLESS-GO start/stop consumers.
button. When you switch on the ignition, all lamps
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift in the instrument cluster come on. The low-
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam
Controls in detail
the manual transmission into the neutral
position (no gear selected). headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
or
the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
the automatic transmission into neutral come on when the ignition is switched on,
position N. have it checked and replaced if necessary.
X Do not depress the brake pedal. If a lamp in the instrument cluster remains
on after starting the engine or comes on
while driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
ProCarManuals.com
cluster” (Y page 297).

i When you now press the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button once and the driver’s
door is open, the power supply is switched
off.
Seats
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Safety notes
= USA only
? Canada only
G Warning!
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the
Position 0
vehicle is put into motion:
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop Rseat adjustment
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
Rhead restraint adjustment
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Rsteering wheel adjustment
Position 1 Rrear view mirror adjustment
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button Rfastening of seat belts
once.
This supplies power for some electrical G Warning!
consumers, e.g. wipers. Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving.
i When you now open the driver’s door, the Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
power supply is switched off. the driver to lose control of the vehicle.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
backrest in an excessively reclined position as
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 80
80 Seats
this can be dangerous. You could slide under position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under children be placed in the rear seats whenever
it, the seat belt would apply force at the possible. Regardless of seating position,
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious children 12 years old and under must be
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat seated and properly secured in an
belts provide the best restraint when the appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
wearer is in a position that is as upright as restraint, or booster seat recommended for
possible and seat belts are properly the size and weight of the child. For additional
positioned on the body. information, see “Children in the vehicle”.

A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
G Warning! significantly increased if the child restraints
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
correctly fasten your seat belt. or the child is not properly secured in the child
Observe the following points: restraint.
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are
G Warning!
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel. For your protection, drive only with properly
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
position that still allows you to reach the
to the head as possible and the center of the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
head restraint supports the back of the head
position should be as far back as possible
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
with the driver still able to operate the
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
controls properly.
accident or similar situation.
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
close to the head as possible. The center of restraints. Head restraints are intended to
the head restraint must support the back of help reduce injuries during an accident.
the head at eye level.
RNever place hands under the seat or near
any moving parts while a seat is being Seat adjustment
adjusted.
! When moving the seats, make sure there
Failure to do so could result in an accident are no items in the footwell or behind the
and/or serious personal injury. seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
G Warning!
The power seats can be operated at any time.
Semi-electrical seat adjustment
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked This seat adjustment is only available on
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a C 63 AMG.
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 81
Seats 81
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes

after either front door has been opened.
The counter resets each time
Ryou open or close a front door
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
Controls in detail
starter switch
Ryou switch the ignition on or off
Just like in vehicles with memory function,
i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat the power seats can be operated at any
with an integrated head restraint. It is time when the ignition is switched on.
therefore not possible to set the height and
angle of the head restraint. i Vehicles with memory function:
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch The memory function (Y page 89) lets you
store the settings for the seat position
ProCarManuals.com
forward or backward in direction of

arrow :. together with the settings for the steering
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
wheel and the exterior rear view mirrors.
in direction of arrow ;.
X Seat cushion tilt: Turn handwheel =
forward or backward until your upper legs
are lightly supported.
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Lift
handle ?.
X Slide the seat to the desired position.
X Allow handle ? to reengage with an
audible click.
X Check for proper engagement before
driving. Vehicles without memory function
i AMG vehicles are equipped with a seat

Power seats with an integrated head restraint. It is
The seat adjustment switch is located on the therefore not possible to set the height and
entry side of each front seat base. The seat angle of the head restraint.
adjustment switches for vehicles with
memory function are located on the front
doors.
i Vehicles without memory function:
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 82
82 Seats
X Raising: Adjust the height of the head

restraint by pulling it upward.
X Lowering: Press release button : and
push down on the head restraint.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

Vehicles with memory function

X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
switch forward or backward in direction of
arrow =.
X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
forward or backward in direction of
arrow ?. X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
X Seat height: Press the switch up or down restraint cushion to the desired position.
X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
down in direction of arrow : until your Lumbar support
upper legs are lightly supported. You can adjust the contour of the front seat’s
X Head restraint height (vehicles with lumbar support to help enhance support to
memory function): Press the switch up or your spine.
down in direction of arrow A.
Head restraint height adjustment,

manual
This feature is only available in vehicles
without memory function.
X Move adjustment lever : in direction of

the arrows until you have reached a
comfortable seating position.
Seat with adaptive backrest

This feature is only available on C 63 AMG.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 83
Seats 83
The contour of the front seat backrests can Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
be individually adjusted to provide optimum restraints installed when the rear seats are
support for your back. occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Rear seat head restraint height

adjustment
Controls in detail
X Switch on the ignition.
X Upper back support: Use button : to
adjust the upper back support to the
ProCarManuals.com
desired position.
X Lumbar region support: Use button ; to X Raising: Pull head restraint upward to the
adjust the lumbar region support to the desired position.
desired position. X Lowering: Press release button : and
X Lateral support: Use button = to adjust push down on head restraint.
the lateral support to the desired position.
i If, after a period of time, the seat no longer Rear seat head restraint fore and aft
adjustment
provides the desired contour, then repeat
the adjustment procedure.
Rear seat head restraints

G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it
is as close to the head as possible and the
center of the head restraint supports the back
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the X Adjust the head restraint to the desired
potential for injury to the head and neck in the position by pushing or pulling on the lower
event of an accident or similar situation. edge of the head restraint cushion.
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
lowest non-use position and have the
occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 84
84 Multifunction steering wheel
Rear seat head restraints, removing The red indicator lamps in seat heating
and installing (vehicles with split switch : come on to show which heating
foldable rear seat backrest) level you have selected.
i The rear seat head restraints cannot be The seat heating switches from level 3 (high)
removed on vehicles which do not have the to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
split foldable rear seat backrest. The seat heating switches from level 2 to level
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes.
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the
seat heating switches off automatically.

X Switching on: Press seat heating
switch :.
Three red indicator lamps in seat heating
switch : come on.
X Press seat heating switch : repeatedly
until the desired seat heating level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat heating
X Removing: Unlock the rear seat backrest switch : repeatedly until all indicator
(Y page 204) and fold it slightly forward. lamps go out.
X Pull head restraint to its highest position.
If there is insufficient voltage the seat heating
X Press release button : and pull out head switches off automatically.
restraint. The seat heating will switch back on again
X Installing: Position the head restraints so automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
that the notches on the rod are on the left available.
when looking in the direction of travel.
X Insert head restraint and push it down until
it engages. Multifunction steering wheel
X Fold the rear seat backrest back until it
Safety notes
engages.
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Seat heating Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
feature can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 85
Multifunction steering wheel 85
Make sure Steering wheel adjustment, electrical

Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows
Ryou can move your legs freely
Rall displays (including malfunction and
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
are clearly visible
Controls in detail
Steering wheel adjustment, manual
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:

Move stalk in direction of arrows :.
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move
stalk in direction of arrows ;.
ProCarManuals.com
i The memory function (Y page 89) lets

you store the settings for the steering
wheel together with the settings for the
seat position and the exterior rear view
mirrors.
: Release handle
; Adjusting steering wheel, up or down
= Adjusting steering wheel, in or out Easy-entry/exit feature
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to This feature allows the driver an easier entry
its stop limit. into and exit from the vehicle. When entering
X Move steering wheel to the desired
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is
in its uppermost position.
position.
X Locking: Push release handle : all the
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated
or deactivated in the Convenience submenu
way up until it engages.
of the control system (Y page 135).
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely
locked by trying to move it up and down as G Warning!
well as in and out before driving off. You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated.
To stop steering wheel movement, move
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one
of the memory position buttons.
Do not leave children unattended in the
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Children could open the driver’s door and
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 86
86 Mirrors
feature, which could result in an accident The crash-responsive exit aid can only be
and/or serious personal injury. triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is
activated via the control system.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with Mirrors
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when Notes
you insert the SmartKey into the starter Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop mirrors before driving so that you have a good
button once with the driver’s door closed. view of the road and traffic conditions.
i The last set steering wheel position is
stored when the ignition is switched off or
the position is stored in memory Interior rear view mirror
(Y page 89). X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated, manually.
the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch. Interior rear view mirror, antiglare
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when position
you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
i When the current position for the steering
wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
steering wheel will no longer be able to
move upward when the easy-entry/exit
feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly
interrupted when the engine is started.
G Warning!
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by
Let the system complete the adjustment
moving lever : towards the windshield.
procedure before setting the vehicle in
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose Exterior rear view mirrors
control of the vehicle. G Warning!
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
Crash-responsive exit aid exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
When you open the driver’s door after an is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
accident has occurred, the steering column wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the closer than they appear. Check your interior
starter switch is insignificant. This function rear view mirror and glance over your
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle shoulder before changing lanes.
occupants.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 87
Mirrors 87
The rear view mirrors will not react if the

automatic transmission is set to reverse gear
R (manual transmission to reverse gear) or
the interior lighting is switched on.
G Warning!
The auto dimming function does not react if
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
Controls in detail
in the interior rear view mirror.
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not
X Switch on the ignition. react, for example, if the rear window
sunshade is in raised position.
X Press button : for the driver’s side
exterior rear view mirror or button ; for Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
the passenger-side exterior rear view
you may not be able to observe traffic
mirror.
conditions and could cause an accident.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
ProCarManuals.com
comes on.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
Exterior rear view mirror parking
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
position
You will then have to select the desired To assist during parking maneuvers, you can
exterior rear view mirror again before set the passenger-side exterior rear view
adjustments can be made. Adjustments mirror so that you can see the rear wheel and
can only be made with the indicator lamp the road curb.
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated. Setting and storing the parking position
X Press adjustment button = up, down, left
or right according to the desired setting.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors X Switch on the ignition.

The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s X Press button ;, to select the passenger-
side and the interior rear view mirror will side exterior rear view mirror.
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 88
88 Mirrors
X Shift the automatic transmission into The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
reverse gear R (manual transmission to returns to its previously stored driving
reverse gear). position
The passenger-side exterior rear view R10 seconds after you have put the gear
mirror moves to the preset parking selector lever out of reverse gear R (manual
position. transmission out of reverse)
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
view mirror with adjustment button = so
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)

that you see the rear wheel and the road
curb. Rimmediately when you press button : to
The exterior rear view mirror parking select the driver’s side exterior rear view
position is stored. mirror
Vehicles with memory function: You can also
store the parking position using the memory
button M ?: Power-folding exterior rear view
mirrors
X Press button ;, to select the passenger- This feature is only available in Canada
side exterior rear view mirror. vehicles.
X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear ! Before you drive the vehicle through an
view mirror with adjustment button = so automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
that you see the rear wheel and the road view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
curb. damaged.
X Press memory button M ? and within
3 seconds, press one of the arrows of Folding in and out automatically
adjustment button =. The function must be activated in the
The parking position is stored if the exterior Convenience submenu (Y page 136).
rear view mirror does not move.
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in
i If the exterior rear view mirror does move, automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked
repeat the above steps. After the setting is from the outside.
stored, you can move the exterior rear view The exterior rear view mirrors fold out
mirror again. automatically as soon as the vehicle is
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger
Calling up the parking position door is subsequently opened.
Resetting the automatic exterior rear
X Press button ;, to select the passenger- view mirror fold-in function
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
You need to reset the automatic exterior rear
view mirror fold-in function whenever the
reverse gear R (manual transmission to
battery was disconnected or discharged.
reverse gear).
The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the stored parking
position.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 89
Memory function 89
Memory function
Notes
With the memory function you can store up
to three different configurations per front
seat.
Each memory position button on the driver’s
side can store all of the following settings:
Controls in detail
RSeat position
RSteering wheel position
X Switch on the ignition. RExterior rear view mirrors’ position
X Briefly press button :.
G Warning!
i You need to manually fold in the mirrors Do not activate the memory function while
once, so that the automatic fold-in function driving. Activating the memory function while
will work, see “Setting fold-in function for driving could cause the driver to lose control
ProCarManuals.com
exterior rear view mirrors” (Y page 136). of the vehicle.
Folding in and out manually Each memory position button on the front
passenger side can store the setting of the
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if seat position.
they are not folded out completely.
X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
i At speeds above approximately 9 mph
(15 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
exterior mirrors in.
X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.
! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear),
reposition it manually by applying firm Storing positions into memory
pressure until it snaps back into place. X Adjust the seats.
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is X On the driver’s side, also adjust the
forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the steering wheel and exterior rear view
front), press button : to fold mirrors in. mirrors to the desired positions.
Then press button : again to fold mirrors
X Press memory button M once and within
out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
3 seconds press memory position button
may damage the adjustment mechanism.
1, 2 or 3.
The mirror housing is then properly
When the settings are stored to the
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
selected position, an acknowledgement
the usual manner.
signal sounds.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 90
90 Lighting
Recalling positions from memory Exterior lamp switch

X Press and hold desired memory position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved
to the stored position completely. On the
driver’s side, also wait for the steering
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
move to the stored position.
i Releasing the memory position button

stops movement to the stored positions
immediately.
1 W Standing lamps, left

Lighting 2 X Standing lamps, right
Notes 3 $ Off
Daytime running lamp mode
i If you drive in countries with left-hand 4 c Automatic headlamp mode
driving, you must have the headlamps Daytime running lamp mode
modified for symmetrical low beams.
5 T Parking lamps (also tail lamps,
Relevant information can be obtained at
license plate lamps, side marker
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
lamps and instrument panel lamps)
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon 6 L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
headlamps: headlamps
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase 7 N Front fog lamps
usable illumination over conventional 8 R Rear fog lamp
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of i The exterior lamps (except standing
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to lamps or parking lamps) go out
either side according to the vehicle’s automatically when you remove the
steering angle and speed. SmartKey from the starter switch or open
the driver’s door with the ignition switched
off.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp are switched on and you remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch and open
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal
sounds.
In addition the message Switch Off
Lights appears in the multifunction
display.
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog
lamp manually.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 91
Lighting 91
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps ambient lighting conditions require you to do
when leaving the vehicle may result in a so.
discharged battery. In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
from position c to L with the vehicle
Low-beam headlamps at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on from c to L will briefly switch off the
and off with the exterior lamp switch. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
Controls in detail
accident.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
switch to position L.
to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
The following lamps come on:
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
RLow-beam headlamps
RTail lamps X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp

RParking
switch to position c.
lamps
The following lamps come on and go out
RLicense plate lamps depending on the brightness of the ambient
ProCarManuals.com
RSide marker lamps light with the SmartKey in starter switch

RInstrument panel lamps position 1 or the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button pressed once:
RGreen indicator lamp L in the
RTail lamps
instrument cluster
RParking lamps
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position $. RLicense plate lamps
RSide marker lamps
Automatic headlamp mode When the engine is running, the low-beam
The following lamps come on and go out headlamps will also come on and turn off
automatically depending on the brightness of automatically.
the ambient light: Canada only: High-beam headlamps are only
RLow-beam headlamps available in low ambient lighting conditions.
RTail lamps Daytime running lamp mode
RParking lamps
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
RLicense plate lamps mandatory and therefore in a constant mode.
RSide marker lamps In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode
is deactivated by default.
G Warning!
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
If the exterior lamp switch is set to c, the using the control system, see “Switching
headlamps will not automatically come on daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA
under foggy conditions. only)” (Y page 133).
To minimize risk to you and to others, activate X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to $ or c.
L when driving or when traffic and/or
When the engine is running, the low-beam
headlamps come on.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 92
92 Lighting
In low ambient lighting conditions, the Fog lamps

following lamps will come on additionally:
Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
RTail lamps exterior lamp switch in position c.
RParking lamps
G Warning!
RLicense plate lamps In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
RSide marker lamps only switch from position c to L with
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
With the daytime running lamp mode

activated and the engine running, you cannot Switching from c to L will briefly
switch off the low-beam headlamps manually. switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
Canada only result in an accident.
You can only switch on the high-beam
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions. Fog lamps will operate with the parking lamps
and/or the low-beam headlamps on. Fog
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
lamps should only be used in conjunction with
When the engine is running, and you low-beam headlamps. Consult your State or
Rshift from a driving position to park Province Motor Vehicle Regulations
position P with the vehicle at a standstill regarding permissible lamp operation.
(vehicles with automatic transmission) or X Switch on the ignition.
the parking brake is engaged, the low-beam X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
headlamps will go out with a delay of T or L (Y page 90).
3 minutes
X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position exterior lamp switch to first stop.
T, the low-beam headlamps, the tail The green indicator lamp N in the
and parking lamps, the license plate lamps instrument cluster comes on.
and the side marker lamps come on X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position exterior lamp switch to second stop.
L, the manual headlamp mode has The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
priority over the daytime running lamp green N and the yellow indicator lamp
mode R in the instrument cluster come on.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
(Y page 90). lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
USA only
You can only switch on the high-beam Locator lighting
headlamps in low ambient lighting conditions.
The high-beam flasher is available at all times. The locator lighting is described in the
“Control system” section, see “Switching
When the engine is running, and you turn the
locator lighting on or off” (Y page 134).
exterior lamp switch to position T or
L, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
The corresponding exterior lamps come on
(Y page 90).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 93
Lighting 93
Combination switch High-beam flasher

X Switching on: Pull the combination switch
briefly in direction of arrow =.
Hazard warning flasher

The hazard warning flasher can be switched
Controls in detail
on at all times, even with the SmartKey
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
automatically when an air bag deploys.
Turn signals
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow ; or ?.
The corresponding turn signal indicator
ProCarManuals.com
lamp ! or # in the instrument

cluster flashes.
The combination switch resets automatically
after major steering wheel movements.
To signal minor directional changes:
X Press the combination switch only to the X Switching on: Press hazard warning
point of resistance in direction of flasher switch :.
arrow ; or ? and release. All turn signal lamps are flashing.
The corresponding turn signal lamps will
flash three times. i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
High beam left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position ignition is switched on.
L (Y page 90). X Switching off: Press hazard warning
X Switching on: Push the combination
flasher switch : again.
switch in direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp i If the hazard warning flasher has been
K in the instrument cluster comes on. activated automatically, press hazard
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch warning flasher switch : to switch it off.
in direction of arrow = to its original
position.
Headlamp cleaning system
i Also note the information on high-beam
The headlamps will be cleaned with a high-
headlamps with activated automatic
pressure water jet automatically when the
headlamp mode (Y page 91) or the daytime
engine is running and you have
running lamp mode (Y page 91).
Rswitched on the headlamps
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 94
94 Lighting
and front fog lamp on the side of the turn signal

Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the comes on.
windshield with washer fluid for the first or
time X Turn the steering wheel in the desired
The headlamps are cleaned every tenth time direction.
the windshield is washed with washer fluid. Driving forward: The front fog lamp on the
side of your steering direction comes on.
The counter resets when you switch off the
Driving in reverse: The front fog lamp
ignition.
opposite to your steering direction comes
For information on filling up the washer
on.
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 228). The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will
come on automatically depending on the
steering angle, even if you did not switch on
Corner-illuminating front fog lamps either turn signal. If the corner-illuminating
front fog lamps came on automatically, they
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will also go out automatically depending on
improve illumination of the area in the the steering angle and vehicle speed.
direction into which you are turning. The corner-illuminating front fog lamps
The corner-illuminating front fog lamps will temporarily come on on both sides of the
only operate vehicle if you turn the steering wheel in one
Rin low ambient lighting conditions direction and then again in the other direction
Rat
shortly thereafter.
vehicle speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) The corner-illuminating front fog lamp
remains lit for a short time only. It then goes
Rwith the front fog lamps switched off out automatically.
Rwhen the engine is running
Switching off
Switching on
X Switch off the left or right turn signal.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position or
L or c. X Steer straight ahead.
or
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode
i There may be a brief delay before the
(Y page 91). corner-illuminating front fog lamps go out.
X Switch on the left or right turn signal,
depending on whether you are turning left
or right.
The respective front fog lamp comes on. If
you have switched on the turn signal for
one side but turn the steering wheel in the
other direction, the corner-illuminating
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 95
Lighting 95
Interior lighting in the front Manual control

! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Controls in detail
X Switching front interior lighting on/
off: Press switch c.
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective button p.
Emergency lighting
ProCarManuals.com
: v Rear interior lighting on/off

When the interior lighting is set to automatic
; ~ Automatic control on/off mode, the interior lighting comes on
= p Right front reading lamp on/off automatically if the vehicle is involved in an
? c Front interior lighting on/off accident.
A p Left front reading lamp on/off Switching off:
B Front reading lamps X Press hazard warning flasher switch
C Front interior lighting (Y page 93).
or
Automatic control X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
X Activating: Press button ~.
Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
Interior lighting in the rear
the other buttons.
The interior lighting comes on, when you ! An interior lamp switched on manually
Runlock the vehicle does not go out automatically.
Rremove the SmartKey from the starter Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
switch (Interior Lighting Delay: extended period of time with the engine
must be switched on (Y page 135)) turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
Ropen a door
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps

go out automatically after approximately
5 minutes.
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
Button ~ engages.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 96
96 Wipers
Windshield wipers
X Observe notes on page (Y page 96).
Switching on/off
: p Right rear reading lamp on/off

; p Left rear reading lamp on/off
= Left reading lamp
? Rear interior lamp
A Right reading lamp
Combination switch
X Switching rear reading lamps on/off: 1 $ Windshield wipers off
Press respective reading lamp switch 2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping5
p.
3 Å Fast intermittent wiping6
4 ° Slow continuous wiping
Wipers 5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
Notes washer fluid
! Do not operate the wipers when the X Switch on the ignition.
windshield is dry. Dust that accumulates on
X Turn the combination switch to the desired
a windshield might scratch the glass and/
or damage the wiper blades when wiping position, depending on the intensity of the
occurs on a dry windshield. If it is necessary rain.
to operate the wipers in dry weather i When the windshield wipers are switched
conditions, always operate the wipers with on and you stop the vehicle, the wipers
washer fluid. operate more slowly.
! If the windshield wipers leave smears on
Intermittent wiping
the windshield after the car has been driven
through an automatic car wash, then wax Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
or other residue is on the windshield. weather conditions or in the presence of
Shortly after washing the car in an precipitation.
automatic car wash, clean the windshield
! Vehicles with rain sensor: Do not leave
with washer fluid.
windshield wipers on an intermittent
setting when the vehicle is taken to an
automatic car wash or during windshield
cleaning. Windshield wipers will operate in
5 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

6 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 97
Wipers 97
the presence of water sprayed on the Wiping with washer fluid

windshield, and windshield wipers may be
X Press the combination switch in direction
damaged as a result.
of arrow B past the resistance point.
! Vehicles with rain sensor: If you have set The windshield wipers operate with washer
intermittent wiping, dirt on the surface of fluid.
the rain sensor or optical effects may cause i To prevent smears on the windshield or
the windshield wipers to wipe in an noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
Controls in detail
undesired fashion. This could then damage washer fluid every now and then even when
the windshield wiper blades or scratch the it is raining.
windshield. You should therefore switch off
the windshield wipers when weather For information on filling up the washer
conditions are dry. reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
cleaning system” (Y page 228).
Vehicles with rain sensor: Intermittent wiping For information on cleaning the headlamps
interval is dependent on the wetness of the with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
windshield. After the initial wipe, pauses system” (Y page 93).
between wipes are controlled by the rain
ProCarManuals.com
sensor automatically.
X Turn the combination switch to position Problems with wipers
Ä or Å.
Intermittent wiping starts with selected ! If anything blocks the windshield wipers
wiping interval. (leaves, snow, etc.), switch them off
immediately.
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is For safety reasons, do the following before
opened. This protects persons getting into or attempting to remove any blockage:
out of the vehicle from being sprayed. RStop the vehicle in a safe location.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
doors are closed and switch.
Rthe clutch pedal is depressed (vehicles with
or
manual transmission)
RTurn off the engine by pressing the
or
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive open the driver’s door (with the driver’s
position D or reverse gear R (vehicles with door open, starter switch is in position
automatic transmission) 0, same as with SmartKey removed from
or starter switch).
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the REngage the parking brake.
combination switch RRemove blockage.
RTurn the windshield wipers on again.
Single wipe
X Press the combination switch briefly in
direction of arrow B to the resistance
point.
The windshield wipers wipe one time
without washer fluid.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 98
98 Power windows
If the windshield wipers fail to function at If a door window encounters an obstruction

all with the combination switch in position that blocks its path in a circumstance where
Ä or Å, you are closing the door windows by pressing
Rset the combination switch to the next and holding button & on the SmartKey or
higher wiper speed by pressing and holding the sensor surface
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at
door handle, the automatic reversal function
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
will not operate.
Center
Activate the override switch when children
are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
children may otherwise injure themselves,
Power windows e.g. by becoming trapped in the door window
Opening and closing opening.
The door windows are opened and closed G Warning!

electrically. The switches for all door windows Do not keep any part of your body up against
are located on the driver’s door control panel. the window pane when opening a window. The
The switches for the respective door windows downward motion of the pane may pull that
are located on the front passenger door and part of your body down between the window
on the rear doors. pane and the door frame and trap it there. If
i Operating the rear door windows from there is a risk of entrapment, release the
the rear is not possible when you activate switch and pull it to close the window.
the override switch (Y page 59).
i You can also open or close the door
G Observe Safety notes, see page 54. windows using the SmartKey, see
G Warning! “Summer opening feature” (Y page 99)
When opening or closing the door windows, and “Convenience closing feature”
make sure there is no danger of anyone being (Y page 100).
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
i After switching off the ignition or
The door windows are equipped with the
removing the SmartKey from the starter
express operation and automatic reversal
switch, you can operate the door windows
function. If in express operation mode a door
until you open the driver’s or front
window encounters an obstruction that
passenger door. If no door was opened you
blocks its path, the automatic reversal
can operate the door windows for up to
function will stop the door window and open
5 minutes.
it slightly.
The door windows operate differently when
the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
when a door window is blocked” section in
this chapter for details.
The closing of the door windows can be
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
if the switch was pulled past the resistance
point and released, by either pressing or
pulling the respective switch.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 99
Power windows 99
X Switch on the ignition. Synchronizing door windows

X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold
The door windows must be synchronized if
switch : to ? to the resistance point.
they cannot be fully closed (express
The corresponding door window moves operation).
downward or upward until you release the
Each door window must be synchronized
switch.
separately.
X Express operation: Press or pull X Close all doors.
Controls in detail
switch : to ? past the resistance point
and release.
X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ?
The corresponding door window opens or
closes completely. (Y page 98) until the respective door
X Stopping during express operation:
window is closed.
The door window opens again slightly.
Press or pull the respective switch again.
X Pull and hold the respective switch once
more immediately until the door window is
Closing when a door window is blocked closed completely.
G Warning! X Hold the respective switch for
ProCarManuals.com
Make sure that nobody can become trapped approximately 1 second.

and be seriously or even fatally injured when The door window is synchronized.
closing a door window with greater force or
without automatic reversal function.
Summer opening feature
If the upward movement of a door window is
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
blocked during the closing procedure, the
the vehicle before driving off by
door window will stop and open slightly.
simultaneously
X Immediately after the door window has Ropening the door windows
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof
door window is fully closed. Ropening the panorama roof with power tilt/
The door window closes with greater force. sliding panel and roller sunblinds
If the door window is blocked again and opens The summer opening feature can only be
slightly: activated via the remote control of the
X Immediately after the door window was SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
blocked, pull and hold the respective proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
switch upward until the door window is fully X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
closed. the driver’s outside door handle.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function. Vehicles with tilt/sliding sunroof
G Warning! X Press and hold button % on the
Pulling and holding the switch to close the SmartKey until the door windows and the
door window immediately after it had been
blocked two times will cause the door window
to close without any reversal function for as
long as you hold the switch.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 100
100 Power windows
tilt/sliding sunroof have reached the G Warning!

desired position. When closing the door windows and the tilt/
The vehicle unlocks. sliding sunroof or panorama roof with power
X Release button % on the SmartKey to tilt/sliding panel, make sure there is no
interrupt the opening procedure. danger of anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
Vehicles with panorama roof with If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
power tilt/sliding panel
RRelease button & to stop the closing

When roller sunblinds are extended: procedure. To open, press and hold button
X
%. To continue the closing procedure
Press and hold button % on the
after making sure that there is no danger of
SmartKey.
anyone being harmed by the closing
The vehicle unlocks.
procedure, press and hold button &.
The door windows open and the roller
sunblinds begin to retract after Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
approximately 1 second. RRelease the sensor surface on the outside
X With the door windows opened and the door handle to stop the closing procedure.
roller sunblinds fully retracted, press and RImmediately pull on the same outside door
hold button % on the SmartKey again. handle and hold firmly. The door windows
The tilt/sliding panel opens. and the tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama
X Release button % on the SmartKey to roof with power tilt/sliding panel will open
interrupt the opening procedure. for as long as the door handle is held but
the door not opened.
When roller sunblinds are retracted:
X Press and hold button % on the
With SmartKey
SmartKey.
The door windows and the tilt/sliding panel The SmartKey must be in close proximity to
opens after approximately 1 second. the driver’s outside door handle.
X Release button % on the SmartKey to X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the
interrupt the opening procedure. driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button & on the
SmartKey until the door windows and the
Convenience closing feature tilt/sliding sunroof or panorama roof with
When locking the vehicle, you can power tilt/sliding panel are closed
simultaneously close completely.
X Release button & on the SmartKey to
Rthe door windows
interrupt the closing procedure.
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof X Vehicles with panorama roof with
Rthe panorama roof with power tilt/sliding power tilt/sliding panel: Press and hold
panel button & on the SmartKey once more.
Afterward, you can extend the roller The roller sunblinds extend.
sunblinds of the panorama roof with power X Release button & on the SmartKey to
tilt/sliding panel. interrupt the extending procedure.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 101
Driving and parking 101
With KEYLESS-GO effort is necessary to brake and steer the

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
located outside the vehicle within
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door.
X Close all doors.
Starting the engine
X Touch and hold the sensor surface on an G Warning!
outside door handle (Y page 71) until the Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
Controls in detail
door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
or panorama roof with power tilt/sliding monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
panel are closed completely. unconsciousness and possible death.
i Make sure you are only touching the Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
sensor surface. as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
X Release the sensor surface to interrupt the entering the vehicle while driving, have the
closing procedure. cause determined and corrected
X Vehicles with panorama roof with immediately. If you must drive under these
ProCarManuals.com
power tilt/sliding panel: Touch and hold conditions, drive only with at least one
the sensor surface once more. window fully open at all times.
The roller sunblinds extend.
X Release the sensor surface to interrupt the Manual transmission
extending procedure.
Driving and parking

Safety notes
G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
still have sufficient clearance. k Reverse gear
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers 1 to 6 Forward gears
the objects could get caught between or For more information, see “Manual
under the pedals. You could then no longer transmission” (Y page 107).
brake or accelerate. This could lead to
X Depress the brake pedal.
accidents and injury.
X Make sure the manual transmission is in
G Warning! the neutral position (no gear selected).
With the engine not running, there is no power X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
assistance for the brake and steering Otherwise the engine cannot be started
systems. In this case, it is important to keep due to the integrated safety interlock.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 102
102 Driving and parking
Automatic transmission You can start your vehicle without the

SmartKey in the starter switch using the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission

j Park position with gear selector lever lock
k Reverse gear
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
i Neutral position
: USA only
h Drive position
; Canada only
For more information, see “Automatic
transmission” (Y page 108). X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in button is inserted in the starter switch
park position P. (Y page 78).
i To start the engine with the SmartKey
With SmartKey instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
X
remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
from the starter switch. Proceed as
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to described in “With SmartKey”
position 3 (Y page 77) and release it. (Y page 102).
The engine starts automatically. X Depress the brake pedal during the starting
procedure.
With KEYLESS-GO X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
G Warning! X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button

As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the once.
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave The engine starts automatically.
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
could otherwise accidentally start the engine. Starting difficulties
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
! Remember that extended starting
not leave children unattended in the vehicle, attempts can drain the battery.
or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A The engine does not start. You can hear
child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could the starter.
result in an accident and/or serious personal
There could be a malfunction in the engine
injury.
electronics or in the fuel supply system.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 103
Carry out the following steps: Driving off

X If you are starting the engine with the
G Warning!
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
procedure. order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
GO: Close any doors that may be open to this type of loss of control.
allow for better detection of the SmartKey.
Controls in detail
or ! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop speeds. Running a cold engine at high
button from the starter switch. engine speeds may shorten the service life
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio of the engine. This is not covered by the
signals from another source may be Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function. C 63 AMG: At engine temperatures below
X Repeat the starting procedure. 68‡ (20†), the engine’s maximum speed
If the engine does not start after several is restricted in order to protect it from
ProCarManuals.com
starting attempts: damage. Avoid driving your vehicle at full

speed when the engine is cold to prevent
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz premature engine wear and/or diminished
Center or call Roadside Assistance. comfort.
The engine does not start. You cannot ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
hear the starter. message Release Parking Brake
The battery may not be charged sufficiently. appears in the multifunction display when
X Get a jump start (Y page 323). driving off, you have forgotten to release
the parking brake.
If the engine will not start despite a jump
Release the parking brake.
start:
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
Center or call Roadside Assistance. cause serious damage to the drivetrain
The starter has been exposed to excessive which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
temperatures. Limited Warranty.
X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
! Simultaneously depressing the
X Repeat the starting procedure.
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
If the engine does not start after several reduces engine performance and causes
starting attempts: premature brake and drivetrain wear which
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Center or call Roadside Assistance.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the
automatic central locking function engages
and the locking knobs in the doors move
down.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 104
The automatic central locking function can X Depress the brake pedal.
be switched off (Y page 135). The gear selector lever lock is released.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Manual transmission position D or reverse gear R.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
X Fully depress the clutch pedal. park position P is only possible with the
! Only shift the manual transmission into brake pedal depressed.
reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped. Only depressing the brake pedal releases
Otherwise the manual transmission could the gear selector lever lock.
be damaged. X Wait for the gear selection process to
X Shift the manual transmission into 1st gear complete before setting the vehicle in
or reverse gear R. motion.
X If engaged, release the parking brake. X If engaged, release the parking brake.
X Release the brake pedal. X Release the brake pedal.
X Simultaneously slowly release the clutch X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
pedal and carefully depress the accelerator After a cold start, the automatic transmission
pedal. shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows
the catalytic converter to reach its operating
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds. temperature earlier.
This may result in serious engine damage
For more information on driving, see “Driving
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
instructions” (Y page 254).
Limited Warranty.
Shift gear in a timely manner.
For more information on driving, see “Driving Problems while driving
instructions” (Y page 254).
The engine runs erratically and misfires
Automatic transmission RAn ignition cable may be damaged.
G Warning!
RThe engine electronics may not be
operating properly.
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral RUnburned gasoline may have entered the
position N if the engine speed is higher than catalytic converter and damaged it.
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the X Give very little gas.
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
X Have the problem checked at an authorized
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right The coolant temperature is above
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. 248‡ (120†)
The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
! Only shift the automatic transmission into the engine.
reverse gear R or park position P when the X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the as possible.
automatic transmission could be damaged.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 105
X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off. RAutomatic transmission: Shift the
X Check the coolant level and add coolant if automatic transmission into park position
necessary (Y page 227). P.
RSlowly release the brake pedal.
In case of accident RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the
If the vehicle is leaking fuel: front wheels towards the road curb.
X Do not start the engine under any RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
Controls in detail
circumstances. position 0 and remove the SmartKey from
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-
roadway. GO start/stop button.
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities. RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
vehicle when leaving.
If the extent of the damage cannot be
determined:
G Warning!
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Manual transmission:
Center or call Roadside Assistance. Wait until the vehicle is stationary before
ProCarManuals.com
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel removing the SmartKey from the starter
system, and engine mount can be switch. The vehicle cannot be steered when
determined: the SmartKey is removed from the starter
switch.
X Start the engine in the usual manner.
Parking brake
Parking G Warning!
G Warning! Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
Do not park this vehicle in areas where
up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
combustible materials such as grass, hay or
cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
leaves can come into contact with the hot
brake lights do not light up when the parking
exhaust system. These materials could be
brake is engaged.
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Vehicle movement can cause serious G Warning!
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
the vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
the following before turning off the engine and you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
leaving the vehicle: children unattended in the vehicle, or with
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal. access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
REngage
release the parking brake and/or shift the
the parking brake.
automatic transmission out of park position
RManual transmission: Shift the manual P (manual transmission: shift into the neutral
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear position), either of which could result in an
R. accident and/or serious personal injury.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 106
transmission: shifting into 1st gear or

reverse gear R).
With SmartKey
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Automatic transmission: The SmartKey can
only be removed from the starter switch with
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :. the automatic transmission in park position
When the ignition is switched on or the P.
engine is running, the brake warning lamp
$ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in With KEYLESS-GO
the instrument cluster goes out.
X Engaging: Step on parking brake
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
pedal ; firmly. switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
When the engine is running, the brake door opened, the starter switch is set to
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
(Canada only) in the instrument cluster from the starter switch (Y page 77).
comes on.
If an acoustic warning sounds, you have tried
to turn off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
start/stop button while the automatic
Turning off the engine transmission was not in park position P.
G Warning! Read and observe messages that may appear
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle in the multifunction display (Y page 276).
has come to a complete stop. With the engine i In an emergency you can turn off the
not running, there is no power assistance for engine while driving by pressing and
the brake and steering systems. In this case, holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
it is important to keep in mind that a for approximately 3 seconds.
considerably higher degree of effort is
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle. If you have started the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
X Manual transmission: Shift the manual turn it off as described above:
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
R. button from the starter switch.
X Automatic transmission: Shift the X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
automatic transmission into park position The engine turns off. The starter switch is
P. in position 0 (Y page 77).
X Engage the parking brake.
i Always engage the parking brake in
addition to shifting the automatic
transmission into park position P (manual
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 107
Manual transmission 107
Manual transmission Gearshift lever

Introduction
For information on driving with a manual
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 101).
G Warning!
Controls in detail
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Gearshift pattern for manual transmission
still have sufficient clearance.
k Reverse gear
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
1 to 6 Forward gears
the objects could get caught between or
under the pedals. You could then no longer G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
brake or accelerate. This could lead to On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
accidents and injury. order to obtain braking action. This could
G Warning! control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
When working on the vehicle, engage the this type of loss of control.
parking brake and shift the manual
transmission into 1st gear or reverse gear R. ! When you are shifting the manual
Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which transmission into the 5th or 6th gear,
could result in an accident and/or serious make sure you move the gearshift lever to
personal injury. the right. Otherwise, you could accidentally
shift into the 3rd or 4th gear and damage
! Allow the engine to warm up under low the manual transmission.
load use. Do not place full load on the
Downshifting gears leading to overrevving
engine until the operating temperature has
the engine can result in engine damage that
been reached.
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an Limited Warranty.
extended period when driving off on
Never hold the vehicle stopped on a hill by
slippery road surfaces.
using the clutch pedal. The clutch may be
This may cause serious damage to the damaged which is not covered by the
engine and the drivetrain which is not Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds.
This may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Shift gear in a timely manner.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 108
108 Automatic transmission
Shifting into reverse gear R This may cause serious damage to the
engine and the drivetrain which is not
! Only shift the manual transmission into covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
reverse gear R when the vehicle is stopped. Warranty.
Otherwise the manual transmission could
be damaged. i During the brief warm-up, transmission
X
upshifting is delayed. This allows the
Stop the vehicle completely.
catalytic converter to heat up more quickly
X Fully depress the clutch pedal.
to operating temperature.
X Shift the manual transmission into the
neutral position (no gear selected).
X Move the gearshift lever to the left until you Gear selector lever
feel a certain resistance.
X Push the gearshift lever past this resistance
and hold.
X Move the gearshift lever forward to select
reverse gear R.
Automatic transmission
Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
j Park position with gear selector lever lock
(Y page 101).
k Reverse gear
G Warning! i Neutral position
h Drive position
Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all G Warning!
obstacles. If there are any floormats or It is dangerous to shift the automatic
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals transmission out of park position P or neutral
still have sufficient clearance. position N if the engine speed is higher than
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
the objects could get caught between or brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
under the pedals. You could then no longer quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
brake or accelerate. This could lead to control of the vehicle and hit someone or
accidents and injury. something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right
! Allow the engine to warm up under low foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
load use. Do not place full load on the
engine until the operating temperature has ! Only shift the automatic transmission into
been reached. reverse gear R or park position P when the
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the
extended period when driving off on automatic transmission could be damaged.
slippery road surfaces.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 109
Automatic transmission 109
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of sporty driving. The degree to which you
park position P is only possible with the perceive double-clutching acoustically varies
brake pedal depressed. depending on the selected program mode.
Only depressing the brake pedal releases
the gear selector lever lock.
Transmission positions
i The current gear selector lever position The current transmission position appears in
corresponds with the current transmission the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
position.
The current transmission position P, R, N,
or D appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 109).
There are additional indicators on the cover
of the shifting gate showing the current gear
selector lever position.
The indicators come on when you insert the
SmartKey into the starter switch, and go out
ProCarManuals.com
when you remove the SmartKey from the

starter switch.
: Transmission position indicator
Shifting procedure
The automatic transmission selects individual
gears automatically, depending on
Rthe selected gear range (Y page 111)
Rthe selected program mode:

C/S (Y page 111)
or
M (vehicles with dynamic handling package
and C 63 AMG only) (Y page 113)
Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
Rthe vehicle speed
With drive position D selected, you can
influence transmission shifting by
Rlimiting the gear range
Rextending the gear range
Rchanging the gears manually (vehicles with
dynamic handling package and C 63 AMG
only)
C 63 AMG:
Double-clutching is active when downshifting
in all program modes. Double-clutching
reduces load-alteration effects and supports
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 110
Effect Effect
B Park position A Neutral position
Shift the automatic transmission No power is transmitted from the
into park position P only when the engine to the drive axle. When the
vehicle is stopped. The park position brakes are released, the vehicle can
is not intended to serve as a brake be moved freely (pushed or towed).
when the vehicle is parked. Rather, To avoid damage to the
the driver should always engage the transmission, never shift the
parking brake in addition to shifting automatic transmission into neutral
the automatic transmission into position N while driving.
park position P to secure the
Exception: If the ESP® is switched
vehicle. off or malfunctioning, shift the
The SmartKey can only be removed automatic transmission into neutral
from the starter switch with the gear position N if the vehicle is in danger
selector lever in park position P. of skidding.
With the SmartKey removed from
the starter switch, the gear selector ! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
lever is locked in park position P. for any other reason with the
automatic transmission in neutral
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
position N can result in
malfunctioning, the gear selector
transmission damage that is not
lever could remain locked in park
covered by the Mercedes-Benz
position P. To unlock the gear
Limited Warranty.
selector lever manually, see
“Manually unlocking the gear 7 Drive position
selector lever” (Y page 311). The automatic transmission shifts
C Reverse gear automatically. All forward gears are
available.
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the
vehicle is stopped.
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles except AMG vehicles:
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles and AMG vehicles:
Depress the accelerator pedal past the
point of resistance.
gear.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 111
Working on the vehicle Automatic shift program

G Warning!
When working on the vehicle, engage the
parking brake and shift the automatic
transmission into park position P. Otherwise
the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
Controls in detail
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D and driving in automatic program Program mode selector switch
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
C Comfort For comfort driving
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 112). S Sport For sporty driving
The current gear range appears in the
ProCarManuals.com
Program mode selector switch on C 63 AMG

: Gear range indicator
C Comfort For standard driving
Effect
S Sport For sporty driving
= With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine. M Manual For manual gearshifting
5 Allows the use of the engine’s

braking effect when driving
Ron steep downgrades
Rin mountainous regions

Runder extreme operating
conditions
4 For maximum use of the engine’s
braking effect on very steep or
lengthy downgrades.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 112
The current program mode appears in the One-touch gearshifting

With the automatic transmission in drive
position D and driving in automatic program
mode C or S, you can limit or extend the gear
range using the gear selector lever or the
steering wheel gearshift control.
Steering wheel gearshift control is available
on vehicles with dynamic handling package

and on C 63 AMG only.
Vehicles with dynamic handling package and
C 63 AMG: For information on using the gear
selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
: Program mode indicator control in manual program mode M, see
“Manual shift program” (Y page 113).
You should only change the program mode
when the automatic transmission is in park
position P.
Automatic program mode S will not be stored.
When the engine is turned off with the
automatic program mode S selected, the
automatic transmission will go to the
automatic program mode C when the engine
is restarted.
X Press the program mode selector switch
repeatedly until the letter of the desired
program mode appears in the multifunction Steering wheel gearshift control (example
display. illustration)
For selecting automatic program mode (C or
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel
S) on vehicles with dynamic handling
gearshift control when the automatic
package, see “Dynamic handling package
transmission is in park position P, neutral
with sport driving mode” (Y page 184).
position N, or reverse gear R.
Selecting program mode C means:
RThe vehicle starts out more gentle, both Limiting gear range
forward and reverse, except when driving
off with full throttle. G Warning!
RTraction
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
and driving stability are improved
order to obtain braking action. This could
on icy roads.
RUpshifts occur earlier even when you give control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
more gas. The engine then operates at this type of loss of control.
lower revolutions and the wheels are less
likely to spin.
Selecting program mode S means that
upshifts occur later.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 113
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the Shifting into optimal gear range
left in the D- direction.
X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
or the left in the D- direction.
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. or
The automatic transmission will shift into X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
the next lower gear as permitted by the
The automatic transmission will select the
shift program. This action simultaneously
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
limits the gear range of the automatic
Controls in detail
and deceleration automatically. This will
transmission.
involve shifting down one or more gears.
i To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s Manual shift program
maximum speed would be exceeded.
The manual shift program is available on
vehicles with dynamic handling package and
Extending gear range on C 63 AMG only.
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the Manual program mode M differs with regard
ProCarManuals.com
right in the D+ direction. to spontaneity, response time, and shifting

or smoothness from automatic program mode
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;. S.
The automatic transmission will shift into In manual program mode M, system-
the next higher gear as permitted by the controlled automatic gearshifting is switched
shift program. This action simultaneously off. You need to change the gears by manually
extends the gear range of the automatic upshifting or downshifting using the gear
transmission. selector lever or the steering wheel gearshift
control.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range,
the automatic transmission will upshift
beyond any gear range limit selected.
Canceling gear range limit

X Press and hold the gear selector lever to
the right in the D+ direction until the gear
range indicator disappears from the
Program mode selector switch on vehicles with
or dynamic handling package
X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until
the gear range indicator disappears from M Manual For manual gearshifting
the multifunction display.
The automatic transmission will shift from
the current gear range directly into drive
position D.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 114
i Vehicles with dynamic handling package:

Manual program mode M will not be stored.
When the engine is turned off with manual
program mode M selected, the automatic
transmission will go to automatic program
mode C when the engine is restarted.
i C 63 AMG: Manual program mode M will

not be stored. When the engine is turned

off with manual program mode M selected,
the automatic transmission will go to
Program mode selector switch on C 63 AMG automatic program mode (C or S) when the
engine is restarted.
C Comfort For standard driving
S Sport For sporty driving Upshifting
M Manual For manual gearshifting i Vehicles with dynamic handling package:
If you press on the accelerator pedal when
The current program mode appears in the the engine has reached the revolution limit
multifunction display (Y page 112). of the current gear, the automatic
For information on automatic program mode transmission will upshift beyond manual
(C or S), see “Automatic shift program” program mode M selected.
(Y page 111) and “One-touch gearshifting”
! C 63 AMG:
(Y page 112).
In manual program mode M, the automatic
transmission will not upshift, even if the
Activating manual shift program engine has reached its overrevving range.
X Vehicles with dynamic handling package: Shift up into the next gear before the
Press the program mode selector switch engine has reached its overrevving range.
once. Make absolutely certain that the engine
M appears in the multifunction display. speed does not reach the red marking on
The automatic transmission switches to the tachometer. Otherwise the engine
manual program mode M. Automatic could be damaged which is not covered by
shifting is switched off. The gear range is the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
not limited. X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the
X C 63 AMG: Press the program mode right in the D+ direction.
selector switch repeatedly until M appears or
in the multifunction display.
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;
The automatic transmission switches to
manual program mode M. Automatic (Y page 112).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
shifting is switched off. The gear range is
next higher gear.
not limited.
You can change the gears manually with drive
position D selected. You can upshift or
downshift through the gears in succession.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 115
Upshift indicator (C 63 AMG only) i For maximum acceleration, press and

hold the gear selector lever to the left in the
D- direction or pull and hold the left
gearshift control. Depending on the engine
speed the automatic transmission selects
the optimal gear for maximum
acceleration.
Controls in detail
i When you brake or stop, the automatic
transmission shifts down into a gear from
which you can easily accelerate or take off.
In manual program mode M, upshift Kickdown

indicator ; in the multifunction display AMG vehicles: Using the kickdown while
advises you to upshift before the engine driving in manual program mode M is not
reaches the overspeed range. Thus you can possible.
drive at the maximum engine speed for each All vehicles except AMG vehicles: You can
ProCarManuals.com
gear without overrevving the engine. also use the kickdown while driving in manual
X Shift the automatic transmission from program mode M when you want maximum
current gear : into the next higher gear. acceleration.
The fuel supply will otherwise be X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the
interrupted to prevent the engine from
accelerator pedal.
overrevving.
Downshifting gear.
X Canada vehicles: Depress the accelerator
G Warning!
pedal past the point of resistance.
order to obtain braking action. This could
gear.
this type of loss of control. i You cannot shift with the gear selector
lever or the steering wheel gearshift control
X Briefly press the gear selector lever to the when using the kickdown.
left in the D- direction.
or
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :
(Y page 112).
The automatic transmission shifts into the
next lower gear.
i Vehicles with dynamic handling package:
To avoid overrevving the engine when
downshifting, the automatic transmission
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s
maximum speed would be exceeded.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 116
116 Instrument cluster
Deactivating manual shift program Transfer case

X Vehicles with dynamic handling package:
Press the program mode selector switch This section applies to vehicles equipped with
once more. all-wheel drive (4MATIC) only. Both the front
The last selected automatic program mode and rear axles are powered at all times when
C or S appears in the multifunction display. the vehicle is being operated.
or ! Only conduct operational or performance
X Restart the engine.

The automatic transmission will go to the tests are necessary, contact an authorized
last selected automatic program mode (C Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
or S). otherwise seriously damage the brake
X C 63 AMG: Press the program mode
system or the transfer case which is not
selector switch repeatedly until C or S
Warranty.
appears in the multifunction display.
or ! Because the ESP® operates
X Restart the engine. automatically, the engine and ignition must
The automatic transmission will go to be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
automatic program mode (C or S). position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Manual program mode M is not stored. button in position 0 or 1) when the parking
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer.
Emergency operation (limp-home Active braking action through the ESP®
mode) may otherwise seriously damage the brake
If vehicle acceleration becomes less system which is not covered by the
responsive or sluggish or the automatic Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
transmission is most likely operating in limp-
home (emergency operation) mode. In this Instrument cluster
mode only second gear and reverse gear R Introduction
can be selected.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
For a full view illustration of the instrument
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
(Y page 28).
position P.
X Turn off the engine. G Warning!
X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting. No messages will be displayed if either the
instrument cluster or the multifunction
X Restart the engine.
display is inoperative.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
As a result, you will not be able to see
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
information about your driving conditions,
R.
such as
X Have the automatic transmission checked
Rspeed
at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
soon as possible. Routside temperature
Rwarning/indicator lamps
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 117
Instrument cluster 117
Rmalfunction/warning messages Coolant temperature gauge

Rfailure of any systems The coolant temperature gauge is located on
Driving characteristics may be impaired. the left side in the instrument cluster
(Y page 28).
If you must continue to drive, do so with added
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes- G Warning!
Benz Center as soon as possible. Driving when your engine is overheated can
cause some fluids which may have leaked into
Controls in detail
The language setting for the multifunction
display can be changed with the audio system the engine compartment to catch fire. You
(Y page 148) or with the COMAND system. could be seriously burned.
Vehicles with COMAND system: Refer to Steam from an overheated engine can cause
separate operating instructions. serious burns which can occur just by opening
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Activating the instrument cluster Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
The instrument cluster is activated when you
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
ProCarManuals.com
Ropen the driver’s door the engine has cooled down.

Rswitch on the ignition
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†), i.e close to the
Adjusting the instrument cluster red zone of the temperature gauge.
illumination
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
The engine should not be operated with a
coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†),
i.e. in the red zone of the coolant
temperature gauge. Doing so may cause
serious engine damage which is not
Warranty.
Tachometer
X To brighten illumination: Turn
dimmer : clockwise. The red marking on the tachometer
(Y page 28) denotes excessive engine speed.
X To dim illumination: Turn dimmer :
counterclockwise. ! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
i The instrument cluster illumination is that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
dimmed or brightened automatically to suit Limited Warranty.
ambient light conditions.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
The instrument cluster illumination will also interrupted if the engine is operated within
be adjusted automatically when you switch the red marking.
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 118
118 Control system
Outside temperature indicator driver when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
The outside temperature indicator is
displayed in the multifunction display Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(Y page 120). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
G Warning! 14 m) every second.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device The control system relays information to the
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose. multifunction display.

Indicated temperatures just above the
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
Multifunction steering wheel
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. The displays in the multifunction display and
the settings in the control system are
controlled by using the buttons on the
Fuel gauge multifunction steering wheel.
The fuel gauge is on the left-hand side of the

instrument cluster (Y page 28). Once the fuel
level has fallen below the reserve mark, the
yellow fuel tank reserve warning lamp 8
for the fuel reserve comes on.
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 2.
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to call up statistical
data on your vehicle, and much more. : Multifunction display
G Warning! ; Press button
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic ~ to end a call
conditions must always be his/her primary
focus when driving. to reject an incoming call
6 to answer a call
For your safety and the safety of others,
selecting features through the multifunction to dial7
steering wheel should only be done by the to redial7
8 to mute

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 119
Control system 119
Press button Press and hold button

W to set the volume 9 within Audio menu to select a
X to operate the RACETIMER8 : track or scene with quick
search or to select previous or
= Press button next station in station list or
? to activate the Voice Control wave band
System9 within Tel menu to start the
Controls in detail
quick search in the phone book
? Press button briefly
Press button
% to cancel the Voice Control
System9 a to confirm selection or
messages
to go back
to confirm messages
Depending on the selected menu, pressing
Press and hold button the buttons on the multifunction steering
% to select the standard display wheel will alter what appears in the
ProCarManuals.com
A Press button The information available in the multifunction
; to call up line for menus and to display is arranged in menus and
= select menus accompanying functions and submenus.
The individual functions are then found within
Press button briefly the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
9 to select submenu or scroll under Audio, for example). These functions
: through lists serve to call up relevant information or to
customize the settings for your vehicle.
within Audio menu to select
previous or next track, scene or It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
stored station functions within each menu, as being
arranged in a circular pattern.
within Tel menu to switch to
the phone book and select a In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
name or number you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 130).
The number of menus available in the system
depends on which optional equipment is
installed in your vehicle.

instructions.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 120
120 Control system
Using the control system = Outside temperature indicator

X To select a menu: Press button = ? Automatic transmission program mode
or ;. indicator
X To select a submenu: Press button :
A Transmission position/gear range
or 9. indicator (automatic transmission)
Additional speedometer (manual
X To go to the next higher menu level:
transmission)
Press button %. B Digital clock
X To select the standard display: Press

button % repeatedly until the standard Settings, functions, submenus as well as any
malfunctions appear in the text field.
display featuring the odometer and
speedometer appears. For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
or
submenus” (Y page 121).
X Press and hold button % until the
standard display featuring the trip
odometer and the main odometer appears.
X To confirm selection: Press button a.
X To confirm display message: Press
button a or %.
The control system saves certain display
messages. Calling up display messages
(Y page 129).
For information about warning and
malfunction messages appearing in the
multifunction display (Y page 270).
Multifunction display
: Text field
; Line for main menus
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 121
Control system 121
Menus and submenus
Controls in detail
ProCarManuals.com
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset

Function
(Y page 122)
: Trip menu (Y page 121) RResetting values (Y page 122)
; AMG10 menu (Y page 123) RRemaining driving range and current fuel
consumption (Y page 123)
= Navi menu (Y page 126)
RDigital Speedometer (Y page 123)
? Audio menu (Y page 126)
A Tel menu (Y page 128) Standard display
B Service menu (Y page 129)
C Settings menu (Y page 130)
Trip menu
In the Trip menu, you can show an additional
display for the speedometer and call up or In the standard display, the trip
reset your vehicle’s statistical data. odometer : and the main odometer ;
appear in the multifunction display.
The following information is available:
If another display appears instead of the
RStandard display (Y page 121) standard display:
RFuel consumption statistics since start X Press button = or ; to select the
(Y page 122) Trip menu.
or
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 122
122 Control system
X Press button % repeatedly until the

standard display appears.
or
X Press and hold button % until the
standard display appears.
Fuel consumption statistics since start : Distance driven since last reset
X Press button = or ; to select the ; Time elapsed since last reset

Trip menu. = Average speed since last reset
X Press button : or 9 to select From ? Average fuel consumption since last reset
Start.
Resetting values
You can reset the values for the following
functions:
RTrip odometer
RFuel consumption statistics since start
RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
: Distance driven since start
X Press button = or ; to select the
; Time elapsed since start
Trip menu.
= Average speed since start
X Press button : or 9 to select the
? Average fuel consumption since start function you wish to reset.
All statistics stored since the last engine start X Press button a.
will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Fuel consumption statistics since last Example illustration: Reset fuel consumption
reset statistics since start
X Press button = or ; to select the X Press button : to select Yes.
Trip menu. X Press button a to confirm.
X Press button : or 9 to select From
Reset.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 123
Control system 123
Remaining driving range and current The shift indicator is meant as a

fuel consumption recommendation for an economical driving
style. Always observe traffic conditions, as
your driving style is determined in the first
Trip menu. instance by the traffic situation.
estimated remaining driving range and
current fuel consumption display. AMG menu
Controls in detail
Note that the values are calculated based
on the current fuel tank level and the This function is only available in AMG
current driving style. Make sure to refuel in vehicles.
time. X Press button = or ; to select the
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a AMG menu.

vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
instead of the estimated remaining driving
range.
ProCarManuals.com
: Current fuel consumption11

: Digital speedometer
; Estimated remaining driving range
; Gear indicator
Digital speedometer = Upshift indicator

? Engine oil temperature indicator
A Coolant temperature indicator
Trip menu.
X Press button : or 9 to select the The engine oil temperature flashes if the
digital speedometer. engine oil temperature has not yet reached
176‡ (80†). During this time, avoid driving
at full engine speed.
The upshift indicator = indicates that the
engine has reached the overrevving range.
The upshift indicator = blocks other
messages in the multifunction display until
you have shifted up.
Example illustration for upshift indicator Use buttons : or 9 to select the
: Upshift indicator12 following functions in the AMG menu:
; Digital speedometer
11 Not available on AMG vehicles.

12 Vehicles with manual transmission only
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 124
124 Control system
RSETUP (Y page 124)

RRACETIMER (Y page 124)
ROverall analysis (Y page 125)
RLap analysis (Y page 126)
SETUP

AMG menu.
X Press button 9 to select SETUP.
: Digital speedometer
; Gear indicator
= RACETIMER
? Lap number
You can start the RACETIMER when the
engine is running or the starter switch is in
position 2 (Y page 77).
While the RACETIMER is being displayed, you
cannot adjust the audio volume using buttons
W or X.
: Automatic transmission program mode X Starting: Press button W.
indicator X Displaying intermediate time: Press
; ESP mode indicator button X while the timer is running.
The intermediate time is shown for
RACETIMER 5 seconds.
X Stopping: Press button W.
G Warning!
When you stop the vehicle and turn the
The RACETIMER feature is only for use on SmartKey to position 1 (Y page 77) or, in
roads and in conditions where high speed
vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, turn off the
driving is permitted. Racing on public roads is
engine and do not open the driver’s door, the
prohibited under all circumstances. The driver
RACETIMER stops timing. Timing is resumed
is and must always remain responsible for
when you press button W after switching
following posted speed limits.
the ignition back on or restarting the engine.
The RACETIMER allows you to time and save
Saving lap time and starting a new lap
driving stretches.
You can save up to 16 laps.
X Press button X while the timer is
AMG menu.
running.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the
The intermediate time will be shown for
RACETIMER appears in the multifunction 5 seconds.
display.
X Press button X within 5 seconds.
The intermediate time shown will be saved
as a lap time.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 125
Control system 125
The RACETIMER begins timing the new lap.

The new lap begins to be timed as soon as
the intermediate time is called up.
Controls in detail
X Press button : to select Yes and
confirm with button a.
The saved laps are deleted.
: Gear indicator
; RACETIMER Overall analysis
= Best lap time This function is only available if you have
ProCarManuals.com
? Lap number saved at least one lap and have stopped the
RACETIMER.
Resetting current lap
X Press button W while the timer is
AMG menu.
running.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the
The timer stops.
overall analysis appears in the
X Press button X.
The lap time is reset to “0”.
Deleting all laps

It is not possible to delete a single saved lap.
X Press button W while the timer is
running.
The timer stops.
X Press button a.
The reset menu appears in the
: Overall analysis of RACETIMER

; Overall driving time
= Average speed
? Overall distance driven
A Maximum speed
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 126
126 Control system
Lap analysis the name of the street currently traveled

on appear in the multifunction display.
This function is only available if you have
saved at least two laps and have stopped the RWith the COMAND system switched on
RACETIMER. and route guidance activated, maneuver
instructions appear in the multifunction
display.
AMG menu.
X Press button 9 repeatedly until the lap Please refer to separate COMAND system
analysis appears in the multifunction operating instructions for instructions on how

display. to activate the route guidance system.
Each lap is shown in its own submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing Audio menu
symbol :.
The functions in the Audio menu operate the
audio equipment which you have currently
switched on.
The following functions are available:
RSelecting radio station (Y page 126)
ROperating audio devices/audio media
(Y page 127)
ROperating video DVD (Y page 127)
If the audio system or the COMAND system
is currently switched off, the message Audio
: Lap number
Off appears in the multifunction display.
; Lap time
X To adjust the volume: Press button
= Average speed during lap W or X on the multifunction steering
? Lap length wheel.
A Maximum speed during lap
X
Selecting radio station
Press button : or 9 to see other lap
analyses. i The SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio is treated
as a radio application.
Additional optional satellite radio
Navi menu equipment and a subscription to a satellite
The Navi menu contains the functions radio service provider are required for
needed to operate your navigation system. satellite radio operation. Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
details and availability for your vehicle.
Navi menu.
For more information on satellite radio
The message shown in the multifunction
operation, see “Satellite radio”
display depends on the status of the
(Y page 152).
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched on
Vehicles with COMAND system:
Refer to separate COMAND system
or off and route guidance not activated,
operating instructions.
the direction of travel and, if applicable,
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 127
Control system 127
X Switch on the audio system (Y page 144) being played audio device/audio media
and select radio mode. appear in the multifunction display.
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
Audio menu.
The currently tuned station appears in the
Controls in detail
Example illustration
: Disc number
; Current track
X Selecting next or previous track: Press

button : or 9 briefly.
X Selecting a track from the track list
Example illustration for FM radio (quick search): Press and hold

ProCarManuals.com
: Stored memory position button : or 9.

; Station frequency The current track does not appear during
= Wave band setting
Audio AUX mode operation.
X Selecting next or previous stored Operating video DVD

station: Press button : or 9 briefly
This function is only available if your vehicle
to select a stored station. is equipped with the COMAND system.
X Selecting next or previous station in
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
wave band: Press and hold button : or
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
9 to select a station.
system operating instructions.
You can only store new stations using the X Press button = or ; to select the
corresponding feature on the radio
Audio menu.
(Y page 151).
Refer to separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual
manner.
Operating audio devices/audio media : Disc number

X Switch on the audio system and select the ; Current scene
CD or MP3 mode (Y page 158).
X Selecting next or previous scene: Press
Refer to separate COMAND system button : or 9 briefly.
operating instructions. X Selecting a scene from the scene list
X Press button = or ; to select the (quick search): Press and hold

Audio menu. The settings for the currently button : or 9.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 128
128 Control system
Tel menu Answering a call
G Warning! When your telephone is ready to receive calls,

you can answer a call at any time. In the
A driver’s attention to the road must always
multifunction display you will then see the
be his/her primary focus when driving. For
following message:
your safety and the safety of others, we
recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the

telephone while driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph X Press button 6.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is You have answered the call.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately The caller’s number appears only if it is
14 m) every second. transmitted.
You can connect your telephone to the audio The caller’s name appears only if the number
system (Y page 167) or to the COMAND and the name are stored in the phone book.
system via Bluetooth®, see separate
COMAND system operating instructions. Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
X Switch on the audio system (Y page 144)
call
or the COMAND system, see separate X Press button ~.
COMAND system operating instructions.
X Press button = or ; to select the Dialing a number from the phone book
Tel menu.
One of the following messages will appear When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
in the multifunction display: you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
RNo Service: No network is available.
RReady
i To use the phone book of the audio
for Bluetooth Telephony...:
system you can import business cards
The telephone has not been connected
to the audio system or COMAND system (vCards) from external Bluetooth® phones
into your audio system’s phone book
via Bluetooth® yet.
(Y page 174). Vehicles with COMAND, see
X Connect the telephone to the audio
separate operating instructions.
system or COMAND system via
Bluetooth®. X Press button = or ; to select the
Tel menu.
RPhone READY or name of the network
X Press button : or 9 or a to
provider (if available): The telephone has
found a network and is ready for use. You switch to the phone book.
can operate it using the control system. The stored names are displayed in
ascending alphabetical order.
desired entry.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 129
Control system 129
If you press and hold button : or Redialing

9 the system scrolls rapidly through the
The control system stores the most recently
list of names (quick search). After holding dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the
button : or 9 for a short while the need to search through your entire phone
scrolling speed increases. Release the book.
button to stop the quick search. The search
stops automatically at the end of the list.
Tel menu.
Controls in detail
X Press button 6.
desired number or name.
X Press button 6 or a.
The control system dials the selected
phone number.
: Selected name from the phone book
Service menu
ProCarManuals.com
X If the Symbol G appears on the right-hand

side of the name several entries are In the Service menu the following functions
present for the same name: Press button are available:
6 or a and select the desired entry. RVehicle status message memory
(Y page 129)
X Press button 6 or a.
RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
The control system dials the selected
phone number. system (Canada only) (Y page 234)
If the connection is successful and this RChecking tire inflation pressure
feature is supported by your network electronically with the Advanced TPMS
provider, the name of the party (if stored in (USA only) (Y page 234)
your phone book) you are calling will RCalling up the maintenance service
appear in the multifunction display. indicator display (Y page 259)
The control system stores the dialed
number in the redial memory. Vehicle status message memory
or
X
Use the vehicle status message memory
Press button ~ or % if you do not
function to scan malfunction and warning
want to make the call.
messages that may be stored in the system.
Such messages appear in the multifunction
display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
recorded.
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
malfunction and warning messages are
simply a reminder with respect to the
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 130
130 Control system
operation of certain systems. They do not collection of submenus (Y page 130) with
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s which you can make individual settings for
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s your vehicle.
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on Resetting to factory settings
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
You can reset most of the settings of the
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
submenus to the factory settings.
malfunction and warning messages.
For safety reasons, the function Daytime

X Press button = or ; to select the Running Lamps in the Lights submenu
Service menu. cannot be reset while driving.
If conditions have occurred causing status X Press button = or ; to select the
messages to be recorded, the number of Settings menu.
messages appears in the multifunction X Press button : or 9 to select the
display:
Factory Setting function.
X Press button a.
The function Reset All Settings?
appears in the multifunction display.

messages function.
X Press button a to confirm.
The stored messages will now be displayed X Press button : or 9 to select Yes or
in the order in which they have occurred.
No. Select Yes if you want to reset to
For malfunction and warning messages, factory settings.
see “Vehicle status messages in the
X Press button a to confirm.
multifunction display” (Y page 270).
The confirmation message appears in the
X Use button : or 9 to scroll through
the messages.
If you turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
Submenus in the Settings menu
to position 0 and then back to position 2, all
messages will be deleted from the message X Press button = or ; to select the
memory. Settings menu.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two
functions: The function Factory Setting
(Y page 130), with which you can reset the
settings to the original factory settings and a
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 131
Control system 131
X Press button : or 9 to select a Convenience submenu

submenu. RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
Scroll down with button :, scroll up with (Y page 136)
button 9. RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
With the selection marker on the desired view mirrors on or off (Canada only)
submenu, use the button a to access the (Y page 136)
individual functions within that submenu.
Once within the submenu, you can use button
Controls in detail
Instrument cluster submenu
9 to move to the next function or
button : to move to the previous function Access the Instr. Cluster submenu via
within that submenu. the Settings menu. Use the Instr.
Cluster submenu to change the instrument
The following lists show what settings can be
cluster display settings.
changed within the various menus. Detailed
instructions on making individual settings can The following functions are available:
be found on the following pages. RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 131)
Instrument cluster submenu
ProCarManuals.com
RShowing or hiding additional

RSelecting speedometer display mode
(Y page 131) speedometer15 (Y page 132)
RShowing or hiding additional
RPermanent display16 (speed display or
speedometer13 (Y page 132) outside temperature) (Y page 132)
RPermanent display14 (speed display or Selecting speedometer display mode
outside temperature) (Y page 132) X Press = or ; to select the
Settings menu.
Time/Date submenu
RSetting the time (Y page 132)
Instr. Cluster submenu.
RSetting the date (Y page 133) X Press button a.
Lights submenu X Press button : or 9 to select the

RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on Display Unit Speed-/Odometer:
or off (USA only) (Y page 133) function.
The current setting is shown.
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
(Y page 134)
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
on or off (Y page 135)
Vehicle submenu
RSwitching automatic central locking on or
off (Y page 135)
13 Vehicles with manual transmission

14 Vehicles with automatic transmission
15 Vehicles with manual transmission
16 Vehicles with automatic transmission
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 132
132 Control system
X Press button a to change the setting. Permanent display (vehicles with

Depending on the previous setting the automatic transmission)
Display Unit Speed-/Odometer: will be You can use the Permanent Display:
set to miles or km. function to choose to display either the
The selected display unit is valid for: outside temperature or the speed in
ROdometer
kilometers (USA) or miles (Canada)
and trip odometer
permanently.
RTrip computer X Press button = or ; to select the
RDigital speedometer in the trip menu Settings menu.

RCruise control X Press button : or 9 to select the
RNavigation displays Instr. Cluster submenu.

X Press button a.
Showing or hiding additional X Press button : or 9 to select the
speedometer (vehicles with manual Permanent Display: function.
transmission) The current setting is shown.
You can have an additional digital
speedometer shown on the multifunction
display. The speed is shown in the unit of
kilometers/hour (USA) or miles/hour
(Canada).
Settings menu.
X Press button a to change the current
Instr. Cluster submenu.
status.
X Press button a.
Depending on the previous status, the
X Press button : or 9 to select the Permanent Display: will be switched
Additional Speedometer function. between Outside temperature or
The current setting is shown. Speedometer (km/h) (USA)/
Speedometer (miles) (Canada).
Time/Date submenu
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date display
settings.
X Press button a to change the current The following functions are available:
status. RSetting the time (Y page 132)
additional speedometer will be switched RSetting the date (Y page 133)
On or Off.
Setting the time
This function is not available if your vehicle is
equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 133
Control system 133
Vehicles with COMAND system: X Press button : or 9 to select the

For information on setting the time in the Date function.
COMAND system, refer to the separate X Press button a.
COMAND system operating instructions. The current date appears in the
X Press button = or ; to select the multifunction display.
Settings menu. X To set a new date press button a again.
X Press button : or 9 to select the X Press button = or ; to select the
Time/date submenu.
Controls in detail
setting you wish to change: month, day or
X Press button a. year.
Time function.
X Press button a.
The current time appears in the
X To set a new time press button a again.
ProCarManuals.com
setting you wish to change: hours or X Press button : or 9 to change the

minutes. setting which is highlighted.
X Press button a to store the entry.
Lights submenu
Access the Lights submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Lights submenu to
change the lamp and lighting settings on your
vehicle.
X Press button : or 9 to change the The following functions are available:
setting which is highlighted.
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
X Press button a to store the entry.
or off (USA only) (Y page 133)
Setting the date RSwitching locator lighting function on or off
This function is not available if your vehicle is (Y page 134)

equipped with the COMAND system and RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
navigation module. on or off (Y page 135)
For information on setting the date in the Switching daytime running lamp mode on
COMAND system, refer to the separate or off (USA only)
COMAND system operating instructions. X Press button = or ; to select the
X Press button = or ; to select the Settings menu.

Settings menu. X Press button : or 9 to select the
X Press button : or 9 to select the Lights submenu.

Time/date submenu.
X Press button a.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 134
134 Control system
X Press button a. Switching locator lighting on or off

X Press button : or 9 to select the With the Locator Lighting: function
Daytime Running Lamps: function. activated and the exterior lamp switch in
The current setting Enabled or Disabled position c
is shown. Rthe exterior lamps will come on during
darkness when the vehicle is unlocked with
the SmartKey.
The lamps will go out when the driver’s door
is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey,
the lamps will go out automatically after
X
approximately 40 seconds.
Press button a to change the current
status. Rthe exterior lamps will remain on for
Depending on the previous status, the 15 seconds during darkness after exiting
Daytime Running Lamps: mode will be the vehicle and closing all doors.
Enabled or Disabled. If, after turning off the engine, you do not
With Daytime Running Lamps mode open or close a door, the lamps will
enabled and the exterior lamp switch at automatically go out after 60 seconds.
position $ or c, the low-beam The following lamps will come on
headlamps are switched on when the engine RParking lamps
is running.
RTail lamps
In low ambient light conditions the following
lamps will come on additionally: RLicense plate lamps
RParking lamps RSide marker lamps
RTail lamps RFront fog lamps
RLicense plate lamps X Press button = or ; to select the
RSide marker lamps Settings menu.
For more information on the daytime running
Lights submenu.
lamp mode, see (Y page 91).
X Press button a.
i Make sure the exterior lamp switch is set
to M or c when you switch off the
Locator Lighting: function.
daytime running lamps while driving at
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
night.
is shown.
For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
of all submenus to the factory settings while
driving (Y page 130) will not deactivate the
daytime running lamp mode.
The following message appears in the
multifunction display:
Cannot Be Completely Reset to
Factory Settings while Driving..
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 135
Control system 135
X Press button a to change the current Vehicle submenu

status.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
Locator Lighting: function will be
to set the automatic central locking.
Enabled or Disabled.
You can temporarily deactivate the Switching automatic central locking on or
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: off
Use this function to switch the automatic
Controls in detail
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the
central locking on or off. With the automatic
SmartKey in the starter switch to
central locking activated, the vehicle is
position 0.
locked centrally at a vehicle speed of
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
position 0.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as Settings menu.
you start the engine. X Press button : or 9 to select the
Vehicle submenu.
Switching interior lighting delayed shut-
ProCarManuals.com
X Press button a.
off on or off X Press button : or 9 to select the
Use this function to set whether you would Automatic Door Lock: function.
like the interior lighting to remain on for The current setting Enabled or Disabled
10 seconds during darkness after you have is shown.
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.
Settings menu.
Lights submenu.
X Press button a.
X Press button : or 9 to select the X Press button a to change the current
Interior Lighting Delay: function. status.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled Depending on the previous status, the
is shown. Automatic Door Lock: feature will be
Enabled or Disabled.
Convenience submenu
Access the Convenience submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Convenience
submenu to activate the easy-entry/exit
feature (Y page 136), or to set the fold-in
X Press button a to change the current function for exterior rear view mirrors
status. (Y page 136).
interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
will be Enabled or Disabled.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 136
136 Audio system
Activating easy-entry/exit feature Use this function to set the exterior rear view
Use this function to activate and deactivate mirrors to be folded in automatically when
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 85). you lock your vehicle.
With this function set to Enabled and the
G Warning! exterior rear view mirrors folded in using the
You must make sure no one can become button on the door control panel
trapped or injured by the moving steering (Y page 88), the exterior rear view mirrors will
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is not fold out when you switch on the ignition.
activated. You will then have to fold out the exterior rear
To stop steering wheel movement, move view mirrors using the button on the door
steering wheel adjustment stalk or press one control panel (Y page 88).
of the memory position buttons. Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are
Do not leave children unattended in the folded out completely before driving off.
vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle. X Press button = or ; to select the
Children could open the driver’s door and
Settings menu.
unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. Convenience submenu.
X Press a.
X Press button = or ; to select the X Press button : or 9 to select the
Settings menu. Fold Mirrors in when Locking:
X Press button : or 9 to select the function.
Convenience submenu. The current setting Enabled or Disabled
X Press button a. is shown.
Easy Entry/Exit: function.
The current setting Enabled or Disabled
is shown.
X Press button a to change the current

status.
automatic fold-in function for exterior rear
X
view mirrors will be Enabled or Disabled.
Press button a to change the current
status.
Easy Entry/Exit: feature will be Audio system
Enabled or Disabled. Audio and telephone operation
Switching fold-in function for exterior These instructions are intended to help you
rear view mirrors on or off become familiar with your Mercedes-Benz
This feature is only available in Canada audio system. They contain useful tips and a
vehicles. detailed description of the user functions.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 137
Audio system 137
G Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should enter system
settings with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the system only when road and traffic
conditions permit. Always pay full attention to
traffic conditions first before operating
system controls while driving.
Controls in detail
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
14 m) every second. Item
? Clear button (Y page 142)
Audio system overview A Audio controller (Y page 140)

B Back button (Y page 141)
ProCarManuals.com
Operating safety
G Warning!
Any alterations made to electronic
components can cause malfunctions.
The radio, amplifier, CD changer, satellite
radio, and telephone are interconnected.
When one of the components is not
operational or has not been removed/
replaced properly, the function of other
components may be impaired.
This condition might seriously impair the
operating safety of your vehicle.
We recommend that you have any service
work on electronic components carried out at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Item
: Audio display (Y page 139)
Audio system components
; Opening button (Y page 139)
With the audio system you can operate the
= Audio control unit (Y page 138) following main functions:
RAudio function with the radio, Satellite
radio, disc (CD audio or MP3 mode) and
Audio AUX
Rthe mobile phone with the phone book
Rvarious system settings
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 138
138 Audio system
The audio system consists of the following: Audio control unit

RAudio control unit With the audio control unit you can
RAudio display Rswitch the audio system on/off
RAudio controller with buttons k and Radjust the volume
2 Rselect the operating modes
In addition, the audio system can also be Renter telephone numbers and accept,
operated with the multifunction steering
reject, initiate and end telephone calls

wheel (Y page 118).
Rload and eject CDs
In these instructions, the keypad (right side
of audio control unit) and the function buttons
are referred to as “buttons”.
Audio control unit overview
Item ? Load/eject button (Y page 161)

: Switching to radio mode A Clear button for deleting digits or
(Y page 149) entire entries (Y page 178)
Calling up wave bands Entering a passcode (Y page 171)
(Y page 149) Entering a telephone number
Switching on Sat mode (Y page 177)
(Y page 154)
; Switching to CD audio or MP3 mode
(Y page 158)
= Disc slot
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 139
Audio system 139
B Keypad K Switching to telephone mode

Tuning to a station via the station (Y page 167)
memory (Y page 150) L Sound settings (Y page 145)
Storing stations manually
(Y page 151)
Audio display
Entering a passcode (Y page 171)
Entering a phone number The audio display has a protective cover.
Controls in detail
(Y page 177) ! Do not place any objects on the cover of
Sending DTMF tones (Y page 180) the audio display. This may obstruct the
CD changer: Selecting a CD movement when the cover is being
(Y page 162) opened/closed. The cover could be
CD: Entering a track number directly damaged. Do not place any objects in front
(Y page 164) of the audio display and/or secure any
objects to the audio display itself. The
C Tuning to a station via station search audio display could be damaged.
(Y page 150) Avoid touching the audio display at all
ProCarManuals.com
Fast forward (Y page 165) times. The display has a very sensitive high-
Skipping forwards to a track gloss surface, there is a risk of it being
(Y page 165) scratched. Do not press directly in the
display face. Otherwise, the audio display
D Switching audio system on/off will be damaged.
(Y page 144)
i For information about cleaning and care
E Adjusting the volume (Y page 144)
of the audio display, see “Audio or
F Tuning to a station via station search COMAND display” (Y page 265).
(Y page 150)
Audio display cover
Fast rewind (Y page 165)
Skipping backwards to a track
(Y page 165)
G Confirming a passcode
(Y page 171)
Accepting a call (Y page 179)
Initiating a call (Y page 177)
Redial (Y page 178)
H Rejecting a call (Y page 179)
Ending an active call (Y page 179)
I Opening system settings menu
(Y page 147)
J Switching sound on/off
(Y page 145)
Switching hands-free microphone
on/off (Y page 179)
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 140
140 Audio system
X Opening: Press opening button :. received via the Bluetooth® interface)

Audio display cover ; opens, the audio (Y page 172).
display is visible, and the audio system RMobile phone network signal strength
switched on. r. This information will only be shown
X Closing: Press audio display cover ; with suitable mobile phones.
down until it engages. RThe receiver symbol indicates whether a
If the audio system is still switched on, you
call is active or not.
can continue to listen to the radio or a CD
¢ No active call
and operate the device via the buttons on
ö Active call
the audio control panel as well as the
buttons on the multifunction steering In this example, the audio main function is set
wheel. to the FM radio mode and main area ; is
active.
i You cannot operate the audio system via
the audio controller when audio display i The layout of the menus may vary
cover ; is closed. depending on your vehicle’s equipment.
This manual shows the menus for a fully
Display equipped vehicle.
The currently selected mode and the
associated menus are shown on the audio Instrument cluster multifunction
display. The audio display is divided into display
several areas.
Please refer to the “Control system” section
of this manual (Y page 118) for function
descriptions and operation of the instrument
cluster multifunction display and
multifunction steering wheel buttons as they
relate to audio functions described in this
section.
Audio controller
Example illustration: Radio selected
Status line = displays the time and the
current settings for radio and telephone
mode.
You can request the required function using
menu bar :.
The selection is made using the audio
controller.
Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
additional information being shown in the
status line:
The menu functions are selected on the audio
RIn the telephone main menu: Name of the display using audio controller :. For this
Bluetooth® device (calls made and purpose, a selected item is highlighted.
In this way, you can open menus or lists, move
within menus or lists, and quit menus or lists.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 141
Audio system 141
Symbol How to use the audio

controller
XVY X Slide
Rto move through horizontal
menus
Rto exit vertical menus
Controls in detail
X Slide and hold
Rfor fast forward or reverse for
Operating audio controller audio CD playback

Audio controller : features the following
options: Back button
Rpress briefly or press and hold W
Rrotate to the left or right cVd
ProCarManuals.com
Rslide to the left or right XVY

Rslide up or down ZVÆ
i You cannot operate the audio system via
audio controller : when the display cover
is closed.
Symbol How to use the audio

controller X Switching to the next highest menu:
W X Press briefly Press button k briefly.
Rto confirm the selection of a The audio system switches to the next
menu item or list entry highest menu level within the currently
active mode.
XPress and hold until the
i You can also exit a menu or list by sliding
selected action has been
the audio controller XVY or ZVÆ.
carried out
Rto save a station X Switching to the main menu: Press and
hold button k.
cVd X Rotate The audio system switches to the basic
Rto move through vertical or menu of the currently active mode.
horizontal menus or through
lists
Rto select program settings
ZVÆ X Slide
Rto move through vertical
menus or lists
Rto exit horizontal menus
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 142
142 Audio system
Clear button Button Mode/Menu

Telephone (Y page 167)
Name (Y page 174)
Call lists (Y page 176)
i System settings menu
System (Y page 147)

Language (Y page 148)
X
Calling up an operating mode
Deleting an individual digit: Briefly press
button 2. X Press the respective button ($, h,
X
%, or i) on the audio control unit.
Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold
button 2 until the entry is deleted. The basic menu of the selected mode
appears in the audio display. The main area
is active. The active area is highlighted.
Menu i The following screens show the audio
The table below shows the structure of the display’s day design. The appearance of the
modes and their menus. Each mode has a highlighted items in the menu will vary
basic menu. Each menu item in turn has depending on the display design.
several submenu items.
Button Mode/Menu
$ Radio mode
Radio (FM/AM) (Y page 148)
Weather Band (Y page 149)
Satellite radio (Y page 152)
Illustration: Radio function basic menu
Presets (Y page 151)
X Moving to the menu bar: Slide VÆ.
Sound (Y page 145)
h Disc mode Horizontal menus
CD/MP3 (Y page 158)

Track list/folder list
(Y page 165)
CD Changer (Y page 162)
Sound (Y page 145)
% Telephone mode
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 143
Audio system 143
X Moving through the menu bar: Slide

XVY or rotate cVd.
The currently selected item is highlighted.
X Confirming the selected menu item:
Press W.
X Exiting the menu bar without
confirming a selection: Slide ZV in the
opposite direction of the list orientation.
Controls in detail
or X Selecting Radio in the menu bar: Slide
X Press button k. XV or rotate cVd.
Vertical submenus
ProCarManuals.com
X Confirming selection: Press W.

The Radio menu is selected and a list of
X
submenus appears.
Moving through the submenu: Slide
ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
The currently selected item is highlighted.
X Confirming the selected submenu
item: Press W.
X Exiting the submenu without
confirming a selection: Slide XVY in the
opposite direction of the list orientation.
or
X Press button k. X Enter Frequency is selected.
X Confirming selection: Press W.
Example of how to use the audio system The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
Example: direct frequency input,

FM 104.5 MHz.
$ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
The individual steps for the above-mentioned
example are described below.
X Press button $ on audio control unit
repeatedly until desired wave band FM has
been selected.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
X Switching to the menu bar: Slide VÆ.
the respective wave band which is outside
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 144
144 Audio system
the frequency range. Frequencies within X Switching on: Press push button q.
the current frequency range, but outside or
the current frequency step width are X Open the audio display cover.
rounded to the next lower allowed
frequency. or
X If the audio system was on as you switched
X Enter 1045 with the keypad on the audio off the ignition, turn the SmartKey in the
control unit. starter switch to position 1.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
The audio system will come back on with

entered. the last selected function.
i If the audio system is switched on without
Operation the SmartKey in the starter switch, it will
automatically switch off again after
In the following description, an operation step approximately 30 minutes.
is described as in the example below.
X Switching off: Press push button q.
X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
or
is the short for
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
position 0 and remove SmartKey from
repeatedly until desired wave band has starter switch.
been selected.
X Slide VÆ. i Should excessively high temperatures
X Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio
occur while the audio system is being
operated, Temperature Too High -
controller to select Radio.
Device switching off now. will appear
X Press the audio controller W.
in the audio display, after which the audio
The Radio menu is selected and a list of system will be switched off for a cooling-
submenus appears. down period.
X Slide ZV or rotate cVd the audio
controller to select Enter Frequency. i When you switch off the audio system,
X Press the audio controller W. you also switch off the currently playing
The Enter Frequency submenu appears audio source. Also, telephone operation via
in the audio display. the audio control unit is not possible.
Adjusting volume
Switching audio system on or off
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 145
Audio system 145
X Adjusting: Turn rotary control :. Adjusting bass or treble

The volume will increase or decrease X Press button J and select Bass or
depending on the direction turned. Treble.
Adjusting volume for telephone calls or
X Select Sound Q Bass or Treble.
In hands-free mode, you can adjust the
volume of a telephone call while the call is A longer and brighter bar indicates the
currently active. previously stored setting. The red pointer
Controls in detail
indicates the currently selected setting.
During a telephone call:
X Turn rotary control :.
The volume will increase or decrease
depending on the direction turned.
i The volume of the audio system or a
telephone call can also be adjusted by
pressing the button W or X on the
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 118).
ProCarManuals.com
Example for adjusting bass

Sound X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotate
X Switching on/off: Press button 8 on cVd until desired treble or bass setting is
the audio control unit (Y page 138). reached.
The sound of the current audio source is X Exiting menu: Press button k or slide
switched on or off. XVY.
i When the sound is switched off, the The setting is stored.
symbol 8 appears in the status line.
Adjusting balance or fader
If you change the audio source, or alter the Balance is used to determine whether the
volume, the sound is automatically sound focus should be shifted toward the
switched on again. driver’s side or the passenger side.
Fader is used to determine whether the sound
Selecting sound settings
focus should be shifted toward the front or
You can select different bass and treble rear of the vehicle.
settings for each individual audio source. The X Press button J repeatedly until Bal/
particular Sound menu can be opened from Fad appears in the audio display.
the basic menu for the desired operating
or
mode, or by pressing the button J on the
X Select Sound Q Bal/Fad.
audio control unit.
The current setting is indicated by a red
Example:
cross hair symbol.
$ Q Sound Q Bass
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 146
146
ProCarManuals.com Controls in detail Audio system
Adjusting balance and fader A dot # indicates the current setting.

X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or XVY until X Selecting setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotate
desired balance/fader setting is achieved. cVd.
X Exiting menu: Press W or button k. X Saving setting: Press W.
The balance/fader setting is stored for all The setting is stored and the menu is
audio sources. exited.
X Exiting menu without saving: Press
Surround sound button k or slide XVY.
If your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ i Balance and fader will be set to the default
kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound system, you value (0/0) automatically by activating or
can choose between Logic7® On and deactivating Logic 7®.
Logic7® Off for surround sound.
harman/kardon Logic 7® Surround Sound is i Please note the following:
available for the following operating modes: RFor an optimal sound experience from all
RRadio (FM only) seats, the balance and fader should be
adjusted to the center of the passenger
RSatellite radio
compartment with Logic 7® switched on.
RCD audio RThe best sound results are achieved
RMP3 when playing high-quality audio CDs.
RAUX RFor MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
least 128 kbit/s.
i By selecting Logic7®
Off, all compatible
RSurround playback cannot be activated
formats are played back as they are
present on the medium. in mono-signal sources as AM or
Weatherband. It will not function for
Adjusting surround sound mono-signal sources as, e.g. mono audio
With surround sound, you can choose tracks on some specific audio CDs.
between Logic7® On and Logic7® Off. RIn the case of poor radio reception
X Press button J repeatedly until Sound quality, e.g. during long tunnel passages,
appears in the audio display. Logic 7® should be switched off, as
or otherwise a dynamic switchover from
X Select Sound Q Sound.
stereo to mono and thus temporary
sound characteristic shifts can occur.
RWith certain stereo recordings, the
resulting sound characteristic may
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 147
Audio system 147
deviate from conventional stereo Bluetooth® settings

playback.
General information about Bluetooth®
Bluetooth® technology is the standard for
SYS menu short-range wireless technologies, suitable
for transmitting voice and data. It is possible
System settings menu overview
to connect Bluetooth® devices wirelessly.
Menu Bluetooth® can be used to exchange vCards
Controls in detail
or to make calls using a hands-free device.
System Bluetooth® technology uses the freely
Display (Y page 147) available ISM (Industrial Scientific Medical)
wave band that works at 2.45 GHz.
Brightness Bluetooth® works within a range of up to 33 ft
Day Mode (10 m).
Night Mode Activate or deactivate Bluetooth®

X i Q System Q Activate
ProCarManuals.com
Automatic
Bluetooth.
Activate Bluetooth®
(Y page 147)
Reset (Y page 147)
Language (Y page 148)
Display settings
You can adapt the brightness of the audio
display to the prevailing light conditions. You have activated or deactivated
Bluetooth®. A checkmark O appears when
Setting the display design Bluetooth® is activated.
X i Q System Q Display.
X Select Brightness, Day Mode, Night Reset
Mode or Automatic. i You can reset the audio system back to
i When you select Brightness, a scale its factory settings. In this case, all personal
appears on which you can set the data (e.g. address book entries, call lists,
brightness manually. paired mobile phones, and presets) are
In the Automatic setting, the audio system deleted. We recommend that you reset the
analyzes the automatic vehicle light sensor values before selling your vehicle.
and switches between the display designs
automatically.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 148
148 Audio system
X i Q System Q Reset. Only use the audio system when road and
A prompt appears asking whether you traffic conditions permit you to do so.
really want to reset. Otherwise you could be involved in an
X Select Yes or No. accident in which you or others could be
If you select Yes another prompt will injured.
appear asking whether you really want to
reset. ! Do not attach metallic window tinting film
X Select Yes or No. to the inside or outside of windows which
If you select Yes, the audio system will be are fitted with an aerial. Obstructing the
reset and restarted. metallic aerial structure on the window will
interfere with radio reception. Cutting the
film on the window can permanently
Setting the system language
damage the aerial wires.
X i Q Language.
i The radio mode is interrupted by an
incoming call on the mobile phone
(Y page 167).
Menu overview
i The components and operating principles
of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 137) and (Y page 143). Information
The language list appears. A dot # in front about sound settings can be found on
(Y page 145).
of an entry indicates the current setting.
X Changing setting: Slide ÆVZ or rotate Menu Function
cVd and select desired language.
Radio Enter frequency
X Saving setting: Press W.
(except Weather
The setting is stored and the menu is Band/satellite Station information
exited. radio) (in FM wave band
X Exiting menu without saving: Press only)
button k or slide XVY. Presets Autostore (except
(except Weather satellite radio)
i The language selected in the Audio
Band)
system is also used for the displays and List of stored
messages in the multifunction display. stations
Info Information menu (if
Radio operation available)
G Warning! Channel List of channels

(only Weather Band)
Please devote your attention first and
foremost to the traffic situation you are in. Sound Treble
Before your journey, please familiarize
Bass
yourself with the radio functions.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 149
Audio system 149
Menu Function Information displayed in the status line

(example)
Balance/Fader
The following information is displayed in the
Surround Sound status line:
RTime (04:38)
Switching to radio mode RStation name (WNYC)
X Press button $ on audio control unit. Mobile phone readiness is indicated by
Controls in detail
The radio basic menu appears in the audio additional information being shown:
display. The radio switches to the last RMobile phone network signal strength
station you have listened to.
r
Weather Band will automatically tune to the
RReceiver symbol ¢ ö
strongest station in the area.
Calling up wave bands

You can select FM, AM, and WB wave bands
ProCarManuals.com
as well as the Sat mode (Y page 152). When

you have selected the Sat mode, pressing
button $ will switch back to FM radio
mode.
Wave band Frequency
Illustration: Radio mode in FM wave band
: Status line FM 87.7......107.9 MHz
; Station name or other information from
AM 530.......1710 KHz
the station
= Station frequency and stored position WB (Weather Band) Weather channels
? Main area with wave band Satellite radio Satellite radio
channels
i Station name or other information ;,
available for the FM wave band, can only be
seen when the station transmits the name X Press button $ on audio control unit
or other information and the function Show repeatedly until the desired wave band has
Station Info in the Radio menu is been selected.
activated. The FM, AM, and WB wave bands and the
X $ Q Radio Q Show Station
satellite radio mode are called up one after
another.
Info
The wave band currently selected appears
In the WB wave band, the audio system
in the main area of the audio display. The
displays the channel number, e.g.
last selected station in the selected wave
Channel 6, instead of the station names
band is heard.
and/or frequency.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 150
150 Audio system
Selecting a station/channel X Press button $ on audio control unit

repeatedly until desired wave band has
The following functions are available:
been selected.
RStation search function X Select Presets.
RChannel list (Weather Band/satellite radio)
or
RStation memory (except Weather Band) X Press W when the main area is selected.
RManual frequency entry (except Weather The memory menu appears. The dot # in
Band/satellite radio) front of a memory position indicates that

the currently selected station is saved
For using satellite radio see (Y page 152). there.
The station search proceeds in the following X Select a station in the memory menu by
frequency increments: rotating cVd or sliding ZVÆ and press
R200 kHz in FM range W.
R10 kHz in AM range or
X Press desired station button k to
Tuning to a station/channel via station/
x, with the keypad in audio control unit
channel search function
briefly.
i The search function searches for the next
receivable station in the FM or AM wave Tuning to a station by entering the
band. In Weather Band (WB) the search frequency manually
function switches to the next channel in the i This function is not available for Weather
channel list. For tuning to a station/ Band/satellite radio.
channel you can also use the buttons on
the multifunction steering wheel, see X $ Q Radio Q Enter Frequency
Audio menu (Y page 126). The menu for manual frequency entry
appears.
repeatedly until the FM/AM/WB wave
band is selected.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main
area in the basic menu is active.
Depending on the direction in which the
controller is being slid or rotated, the
system searches upward or downward and
stops at the next station/channel.
or or
X Press button E or F on audio control X Press button l on the keypad in audio
unit. control unit briefly.
Depending on the pressed button, the The Enter Frequency submenu appears.
system searches downward or upward and
stops at the next station/channel.
Selecting a station using station memory

i This function is not available for Weather
Band.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 151
Audio system 151
Storing stations manually with station

memory menu
X Tune in desired station.
The basic menu appears in the audio
display.
X Press W when the main area is active.
or
Controls in detail
X Select Presets.
X Entering frequency with keypad: Enter The station memory display appears in the
desired frequency with buttons k to audio display.
x on the keypad in audio control unit.
The audio system tunes in to the frequency
entered.
i It is not possible to enter a frequency in
the respective wave band which is outside
the frequency range.
ProCarManuals.com
X Exiting menu without making an entry:

Press button k in the center console
(Y page 141). The dot # in front of a memory position
indicates that the currently tuned station is
Storing stations stored there.
X Selecting a memory position: Slide
You can store ten AM and ten FM stations in
ZVÆ or rotate cVd.
the memory.
X Storing a station to a selected memory
i If you select a memory preset which is position: Press and hold W until a brief
already in use, it will be overwritten by the signal tone sounds.
new station.
or
Storing stations manually with keypad X Press and hold desired station button
X Tune in desired station. k to x on keypad, until a brief signal
The basic menu appears in the audio tone sounds.
display. The station is stored.
X Press and hold desired station button
Autostore – automatic station memory
k to x until a brief signal tone
sounds. i This function is not available for Weather
The station is stored. Band/satellite radio. The autostore
function automatically assigns receivable
stations to the memory. The stations are
sorted according to reception quality at the
moment of performing the autostore. The
stations which were stored in the station
memory manually are overwritten in this
process. If less than ten stations are found,
the remaining entries are left empty.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 152
152 Audio system
X Press button $ on audio control unit Only use the audio system when road and
repeatedly until desired wave band has traffic conditions permit you to do so.
been selected. Otherwise you could be involved in an
The basic menu appears in the audio accident in which you or others could be
display. injured.
X Press W when the main area is active.
or Submenu overview
X Select Presets.

The station memory display appears in the of the audio system can be found on
audio display. (Y page 137) and (Y page 143).
X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd to select
Autostore. Menu Submenu
X Press W. Sat Channel List
The audio system searches for receivable
stations. A corresponding message is Enter Channel
displayed. The available stations are Service
automatically stored in the station
memory. The first received station will be Presets Station presets
automatically played. Info Information menu (if
X Canceling storage procedure: Select available)
Cancel and press W while the message
Rewriting Memory... is being displayed. Category (Cat.) All channels
Select category
Displaying information
Sound Treble
You can display program information or other
additional information when provided by the Bass
radio station you are listening to. Balance/Fader
X $ Q Info (if available).
Surround Sound
The available information appears. The
content and scope of the information
depends on the radio station. Satellite radio
X Closing screen: Slide XVY, rotate cVd, i Additional satellite radio equipment and a
press W or press button k. subscription to SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio
service provider are required for the
satellite radio operation described in this
Satellite radio chapter.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
G Warning!
Center for details and availability for your
Please devote your attention first and vehicle.
foremost to the traffic situation you are in.
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio provides over
Before your journey, please familiarize 130 channels of digital-quality radio,
yourself with the radio functions. including 100 % commercial-free music,
sports, news and entertainment. SIRIUS XM
Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 153
Audio system 153
satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, If the satellite radio service is not activated,
coast to coast, in the contiguous U. S. and the “SIRIUS Preview” display appears.
Canada.
Satellite radio service is not activated
This diverse, satellite-delivered programming
is available for a monthly subscription fee. The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
Service Center and the twelve-digit electronic
For more information and service availability
serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the particular
call the SIRIUS XM Service Center at
receiver are required when calling the SIRIUS
1-888-539-7474 (Y page 157), or visit
Controls in detail
XM Service Center for an activation request.
www.sirius.com (USA) or
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
Q Service.
i Note that categories and channels shown
in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
service provider. Programming content is
subject to change. Therefore, channels and
categories shown in illustrations and
descriptions contained in this manual may
ProCarManuals.com
differ from the channels and categories

delivered by the service provider.
i Satellite radio service may be unavailable X Closing screen: Press W or button k

or interrupted from time to time for a or slide XVY.
variety of reasons, such as environmental X Activating satellite radio service:
or topographic conditions and other things Contact satellite radio service provider at
we cannot control. Service might also not the telephone number displayed in the
be available in certain places (e.g. in service display.
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
After the connection is made:
or within or next to buildings) or near other
obstructions. In such situations, the X Follow the instructions given by the
satellite radio’s main menu shows the No operator.
Service screen. At this point, the radio’s The activation process may take up to
functions are restricted. 10 minutes. If it is successful, you will see
the display with the message Updating
Subscribing to satellite radio Channels... followed by the satellite
radio basic menu.
repeatedly until Sat is selected. i Activating the satellite radio service might
The following conditions are possible: not be available in certain places (e.g. in
tunnels, parking garages, under leafy trees,
RSatellite radio service is not activated or within or next to buildings). If a
(only the preview channel is displayed). subscription is not included with system
RSatellite radio service is activated. purchase, credit card information is
required to activate your account.
i If a satellite receiver is not installed or not The activation process takes
properly installed: approximately 5 to 10 minutes after calling
The message Device Unavailable will the SIRIUS XM Service Center.
appear.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 154
154 Audio system
If a satellite receiver is not installed or not Main satellite radio menu

properly installed: The message Device
Unavailable will appear.
i It is also possible to activate the satellite

radio service online. To do so please visit
SIRIUS XM Satellite Radio’s website at
www.sirius.com (USA) or
www.siriuscanada.ca (Canada).
Preview Channel : Main area with channel display
; Selected program category
= Number of selected channel
? Selected channel
A Sound settings
B Selecting program category
C Current artist and title
D Channel information
E Preset options
i If the satellite radio service has not been
F Satellite radio options
subscribed to, only the preview channel is
available. You cannot tune in another i Main area : displays only channels that
channel. If you try to do this, the message
you have subscribed to. Which channels
Call SIRIUS to activate: appears.
are shown depends on the selected
Satellite radio service is activated program category ;. Only the currently
The basic satellite radio menu appears. You selected channel ? is displayed.
will hear the last tuned channel, provided that Note that categories and channels shown
it can be received. in illustrations are dependent on
programming content delivered by the
Switching on Sat mode service provider. Programming content is
subject to change.
For important subscription information see Therefore, channel and categories shown
“Subscribing to satellite radio” (Y page 153). in illustrations and descriptions contained
X Press button $ on audio control unit in this manual may differ from the channels
repeatedly until Sat is selected. and categories delivered by the service
The message No Service will appear when provider.
the signal is not available. After the audio
system acquires the signal, the satellite Selecting program category
radio basic menu will appear. The last
i The channels are categorized. Categories
tuned station will begin to play.
allow you to tune to stations broadcasting
a certain type of program.
Satellite radio channels are split up into
categories such as News, Sports, Rock, or
Country, if available. The category list is
sorted alphabetically.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 155
Audio system 155
X Calling up category list: $ i Which channels are available depends on

(repeatedly, if necessary) Q Cat. which channels you have subscribed to and
or the program category you have selected
X
(Y page 154). For tuning in channels you
In Sat mode, slide XVY or rotate cVd until
can also use the buttons on the
Cat. is highlighted and press W.
multifunction steering wheel, see “Audio
The category list appears. menu” (Y page 126).
X Selecting a category: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
Tuning in channels using manual channel
Controls in detail
cVd.
number entry
X Setting the selected category: Press W.
The selected program category
(alphabetical order) will appear in the audio Q Enter Channel.
display. The last tuned channel in the new The menu for manual channel number entry
category will begin to play. appears.
When searching, tuning in, or selecting or
from the channel list, the All Channels X In Sat mode, press button l on the
option accesses all of your subscribed keypad in audio control unit briefly.
ProCarManuals.com
channels. X Channel number entry with keypad:
i When you select the category All Enter desired channel number with buttons
Channels, you have access to all the k to x with the keypad in audio
channels you subscribed to, regardless of control unit briefly.
category. Further operation depends on whether the
selected channel number is valid or if the
Tuning in channels channel is included in your subscription.
X Exiting menu without making an entry:
You have the following selection options:
Press button k in the center console
Rthe channel search function (Y page 141).
Rthe manual channel number entry Channel number is valid and channel is
Rthe channel list included in subscription: The audio system
tunes in the channel entered.
Rthe channel presets
Channel number is invalid: The message
Tuning in channels using channel search Invalid Channel appears in the audio
function display.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd when the main X The message disappears automatically or
area in the basic menu is active. press W to close the message.

Depending on the direction in which the Channel number is valid, but channel is
controller is being slid or rotated, the not included in subscription: The message
system searches upward or downward and Call SIRIUS to activate: appears
stops at the next subscribed channel. (Y page 153).
or X Press W to close the message in the audio
X Press button E or F on audio control display.
unit.
Depending on the pressed button, the
system searches upward or downward and
stops at the next subscribed channel.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 156
156 Audio system
Tuning in channels using the satellite X Select station in memory by rotating cVd
radio channel list or sliding ZVÆ.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Sat X Press W to confirm.
Q Channel List. or
The channel list appears. The dot # in X Press desired station button k to
front of a list entry indicates the currently x, with the keypad in audio control unit
selected channel. briefly.
X Select channel by rotating cVd or sliding
The audio system tunes in the corresponding

ZVÆ. channel as long as it is included in your
X Press W to confirm. subscription and is still available.
If the channel is not included in your
i The contents of the channel list depends
subscription, the message Call SIRIUS to
on which channels are included in your
activate: appears.
subscription and which program category
you have selected (Y page 154). The If the channel is no longer available, the
channel list contains only the preview message Invalid Channel appears.
channel if the satellite radio service has not X Closing message: Press W.
been subscribed to.
Tuning in channels using satellite radio Storing channels
channel presets i There are ten preset positions available.
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q
X Press W when the main area is selected.
Presets.
or or
X Press W when the main area is selected in X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q
Sat mode. Presets.
The preset menu appears. The dot # in In both cases, the preset menu will appear in
front of a preset position indicates that this the audio display. The dot # in front of a
is the channel currently selected and being preset position indicates that the channel
listened to. currently selected is stored there.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 157
Audio system 157
X Selecting a preset position: Slide ZVÆ or Calling SIRIUS XM Service Center

rotate cVd.
i It may be necessary to call the SIRIUS XM
X Storing a preset position: Press and hold
Service Center if, for example:
W until you hear a signal.
RYou want to cancel the subscription or
The channel is stored.
re-subscribe at a later date.
or
RYou have questions regarding billing.
X Press and hold desired channel button
Controls in detail
k to x on keypad, until a brief signal RYou sell the car.
tone sounds.
The channel is stored.
Q Service.
Displaying information The telephone number of the SIRIUS XM
Service Center and the twelve-digit
X $ (repeatedly, if necessary) Q Info (if electronic serial number (SIRIUS-ID) of the
available). particular receiver are displayed.
X Closing screen: Slide XVY, press W or
i If the program provider does not offer any
ProCarManuals.com
information, the Info menu item cannot be press button k.

selected.
You will see a screen that may contain the
Channel update
following information: The service provider may conduct a channel
Rthe selected program category update.
During the update, the message Updating
Rthe selected channel Channels... will appear on the audio
Rthe artist of the track currently being played display.
Rthe name of the current track The last tuned channel will be muted until the
update is completed. You cannot operate the
i SIRIUS XM determines what information satellite radio during the update.
is displayed on the screen. If the After completion of the update, the satellite
information is too long, the audio system radio basic menu will appear. The last tuned
shortens it. station will begin to play. If not available, the
With the telephone keypad button m you next subscribed channel starts beginning
can call up a popup screen, if provided by with channel 1.
SIRIUS XM, that shows the artist and title of
the current track being played on the selected Sound settings
channel. For sound adjustment see:
The popup screen disappears automatically. RVolume (Y page 144)
X Closing screen manually: Slide XVY,
RBalance control and fader (Y page 145)
rotate cVd, press W or press button
k. RBass and treble control (Y page 145)
RSurround sound (Y page 146)
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 158
158 Audio system
CD and MP3 mode Safety precautions

Submenu overview G Warning!
The single CD player and the CD changer are
Menu Submenu classified as a Class 1 laser product. You must
not open the casing. There is a risk of
CD or MP3 Normal Track
exposure to invisible laser radiation if you
Sequence
open the casing, or if the casing is faulty or
Random Tracks damaged.

The single CD player and the CD changer do
Random Folders
not contain any parts that you are able to
(MP3 mode only)
maintain yourself. For safety reasons, all
AUX maintenance work must be carried out by
qualified technicians.
Track list (Audio Select track (CD
CD) or Folder mode only) G Warning!
(MP3) In order to avoid distraction which could lead
Select folder and/or
tracks (MP3 mode to an accident, the driver should insert or
only) eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
Changer Select medium road, weather and traffic conditions.
(with CD-changer Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
only) Eject all
Fill empty slots covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Sound Treble 14 m) every second.
Bass General notes

Balance/Fader i Audio CDs with copy protection are not
Surround sound compatible with the CD audio standard and
therefore may not be able to be played by
the single CD player and/or the CD
i The components and operating principles changer. There may be playback problems
of the audio system can be found on when playing copied discs.
(Y page 137) and (Y page 143). There is a large variety of discs, disc-writing
The audio system is fitted with either a single software and writers available. This variety
CD drive or a CD changer. means that there is no guarantee that the
The single CD player and the CD changer can system will be able to play discs that you
play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3 or have written/copied yourself.
WMA files. There may be playback problems if you use
The available menu options will vary CD-R or CD-RW type discs you have
depending on the equipment and the type of compiled yourself with a storage capacity
CD. of more than 700 MB. These CDs are not
compatible with currently applicable
standards.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 159
Audio system 159
! Do not affix stickers or labels to the CDs, instead, wipe it in a straight line starting in
they can become warped due to the heat the center and moving outward. Do not use
that develops in the CD drive or CD solvents, anti-static sprays, etc. for
changer. cleaning.
In certain situations, the CDs can then no RReplace the CD in its case after use.
longer be ejected and cause damage to the RProtect CDs from heat and direct sunlight.
drive. Such damage is not covered by the
Controls in detail
Notes about MP3 mode
! Your CD drive or CD changer has been
The single CD player and the CD changer can
designed to play CDs which correspond to play audio CDs as well as CDs with MP3/
the IEC 60908 standard. You can therefore WMA files.
only use CDs with a maximum thickness of
1.3 mm. i Due to the branched data structure,
If you insert thicker discs, e.g. ones that playback of the first track may be delayed
have data on both sides (one side with DVD slightly.
data, the other side with audio data), they Permissible media for MP3/WMA files
ProCarManuals.com
cannot be ejected and will damage the

RCD-R
drive.
RCD-RW
Do not use CDs with a diameter of 8 cm.
Attempting to play CDs with a diameter of Permissible file systems
8 cm or playing such CDs with an adapter may
RISO9660/Joliet for CDs
cause damage to the CD drive. Such damage
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Multisession CDs
Warranty.
For multisession CDs, the first session type
Only use round discs with a diameter of of the CD determines how the audio system
12 cm. will process the CD.
Should excessively high or low temperatures For example, if the first session type is
occur while in CD changer mode, a message according to the audio CD standard and the
will appear in the display, and the CD will be second session type is according to the data
muted until the temperature has reached an CD standard containing MP3/WMA tracks,
acceptable level for the system to continue the audio system will treat the CD as a
operation. conventional audio CD. This means that it is
Tips on handling CDs only possible to access the audio CD tracks.
ROnly touch the CDs at the edges. Access to the MP3/WMA tracks is not
possible.
RHandle CDs carefully to prevent Similarly, if the first session type is according
interference during playback. to the data CD standard containing MP3/
RAvoid scratches, fingerprints and dust on WMA tracks and the second session type is
the CDs. according to the audio CD standard, the audio
RThe CDs must only be labeled using pens system will treat the CD as a data CD. This
specially designed for this purpose. means that it is only possible to access the
MP3/WMA tracks. Access to the audio CD
RClean CDs from time to time with a tracks is not possible.
commercially available cleaning cloth.
Never wipe the CD in a circular motion;
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 160
160 Audio system
File structure on a disc i The audio system does not support ID3
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, the tags.
MP3/WMA tracks can be organized in
Supported file formats
folders.
Supported file formats are:
A folder can also contain other folders.
RMP3
A disc can contain a maximum of 255 folders.
A folder can contain a maximum of 255 tracks RWMA
and 255 subfolders.

i If music files of file formats other than
A data medium may contain a maximum of MP3 are stored together with MP3 files on
500 tracks. one disc, the loading process may take
The directory depth may not exceed a longer.
maximum of 8 levels. The system will ignore
files in lower levels. Permissible MP3 formats
The audio system supports the MPEG1 Audio
Track and folder names Layer 3 format.
When you create an MP3/WMA disc, you can
assign names to the MP3/WMA tracks and i This format is generally known as “MP3”.
folders. Permissible bit and sampling rates are:
The audio system uses these names for the Rfixed and variable bit rates up to
corresponding display in MP3 mode. Empty 320 kbit/s
folders or folders which contain data other
RSampling rates of 24 kHz – 48 kHz
than MP3/WMA tracks are not displayed by
the audio system. i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of at
If MP3/WMA files are saved in the root least 128 kbit/s or higher and a sampling
directory itself (uppermost directory on rate of at least 44.1 kHz or higher. Smaller
storage medium), the root directory will also rates can cause a noticeable deterioration
be treated as a folder. The audio system will in sound quality. This is especially the case
then show the name of the root directory as if you have the surround sound function
the folder name. activated.
You must observe the following when
assigning track names: WMA (Windows Media® Audio)
RTrack names must have at least one Windows Media® Audio (WMA) is an audio
character. data compression technology developed by
Microsoft®.
RTrack names must have the extension
“mp3” or “wma”. The audio system supports the following
types of audio files:
RThere must be a period between the track Rfixed bit rates of 5 kbit/s up to
name and the extension. 384 kbit/s
Example of a correct track name: RSampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz
Track1.mp3
The audio system does not support the
The audio system is unable to recognize an following WMA files:
MP3/WMA track if RDRM (Digital Rights Management) coded
Rthere is no period between the track title files
and the extension Rvariable bit rates
Rthere is no extension
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 161
Audio system 161
RWMA Pro
R5.1 Surround
Notes on copyright
The music tracks that you create and play
back in the MP3 and WMA format are
generally subject to copyright protection in
accordance with the applicable international
Controls in detail
and national regulations. G Warning!
In many countries, reproductions are not In order to avoid distraction which could lead
permitted without the prior consent of the to an accident, the driver should insert or
copyright holder, not even for private use. eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
Make sure you know the applicable copyright operate the audio system only if permitted by
regulations and that you comply with these. road, weather and traffic conditions.
If you own these rights yourself, e.g. for your Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
own compositions and recordings, or the (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
copyright holder has granted you permission, covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
ProCarManuals.com
these restrictions do not apply. 14 m) every second.
Operating the CD player ! If a CD is already loaded, it must be

ejected before inserting a new CD.
The single CD drive and the CD changer have
Inserting a second CD in the slot with
the same controls.
another CD still loaded will cause damage
to the CD drive which is not covered by the
X Ejecting a CD: Press load/eject
button ;.
The system ejects the CD.
The message Please Remove Disc
appears in the display.
X Remove CD from CD slot :.
The message NO Disc appears in the
display.
: CD slot
; Load/eject button i If you do not take the CD out of the CD
= Forward slot : within approximately 15 seconds,
? Rewind the system automatically pulls the CD back
in and plays it.
Single CD player If you change modes (e.g. Radio) when the
X Switching to CD mode: Press button CD is being ejected, the CD will be
h on the audio control unit. reinserted automatically as well.
The CD display appears when you switch to If a CD is pulled back in, press load/eject
CD mode. CDs start to play automatically button ; again; the CD will then be
when they are inserted. The following ejected.
message will appear if no CD is inserted.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 162
162 Audio system
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this neither side is printed, the side to be played
side must face upwards when loaded. If must face downwards.
neither side is printed, the side to be played If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or
must face downwards. cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
If a CD has been inserted incorrectly or appears in the display.
cannot be read, Disc Unreadable
X Loading an individual magazine
compartment: Press load/eject
X Loading a CD: Insert CD into CD slot :. button ;.

The system automatically pulls the CD into A menu indicates which magazine
the CD slot : and starts to play the audio compartments are currently loaded. The
CD if it has been inserted correctly and is first available magazine compartment is
permissible. indicated by a red number.
X Press desired button k to p in the
CD changer keypad to select a magazine compartment.
The CD changer can hold up to a total of six or
audio CDs.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd to select a
X Switching to CD mode: Press button
magazine compartment.
h on the audio control unit. X Press W to confirm.
The CD changer display appears when you
The CD changer will switch to the selected
switch to CD changer mode. If there is a CD
magazine compartment. The message
in one of the magazine trays, it will start to
Please Wait... appears in the display.
play automatically. The following message
will appear if no CDs are inserted. i Only insert a CD after the audio system
has prompted you to do so with the
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
X Insert CD into CD slot : (Y page 161).
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD
into CD slot : and places it in the selected
Loading Disc <X> appears in the display.
G Warning!
i The loading process may take a while,
In order to avoid distraction which could lead depending on the type of disc. If you do not
to an accident, the driver should insert or insert a disc, the display will switch back to
eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and the CD changer menu after approximately
operate the audio system only if permitted by 20 seconds.
road, weather and traffic conditions.
14 m) every second.
i If the audio CD is printed on one side, this

side must face upwards when loaded. If
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 163
Audio system 163
X Press button h, or load/eject compartment. The message Please

button ; (Y page 161) on the audio Insert Disc <X> appears in the display.
control unit to finish the loading process. X Repeat the steps until all compartments
The CD changer plays the disc if it has been have been loaded.
inserted correctly and is permissible. X Press load/eject button ; on the audio
X Interrupting loading procedure: Press control unit to finish the loading process.
load/eject button ; again. The CD changer plays the last loaded disc
or if it has been inserted correctly and is
Controls in detail
X Press button k in the center console permissible.
(Y page 141). X Interrupting loading procedure: Press
load/eject button ; again.
X Filling an empty magazine
compartment: Press load/eject or
button ;. X Press button k in the center console
A menu indicates which magazine (Y page 141).

compartments are currently loaded. The The loading process has not been
first available magazine compartment is completed, the audio system will play the
ProCarManuals.com
indicated by a red number. last inserted CD.
Ejecting CDs from CD changer

G Warning!
In order to avoid distraction which could lead
to an accident, the driver should insert or
eject CDs with the vehicle at a standstill and
operate the audio system only if permitted by
road, weather and traffic conditions.
X Slide VÆ to select the menu bar. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
controller to select Fill Empty Slots.
14 m) every second.
X Press the audio controller W.
The message Please Insert Disc <X> i If you eject a CD while another is being
played, the audio system interrupts
i Only insert a CD after the audio system playback.
has prompted you to do so with the X Ejecting one CD: Press load/eject
message Please Insert Disc <X>. Only button ;.
insert one CD per magazine compartment.
The magazine menu with active main area
X Insert CD into CD slot :. appears in the audio display. The magazine
The CD changer automatically pulls the CD compartment with the current CD is
into CD slot : and places it in an empty highlighted.
Please Wait... appears in the display. If
the CD is loaded, the CD changer will
switch to the next empty magazine
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 164
164 Audio system
X Remove the CD from CD slot :.

The CD changer switches to the next
occupied magazine compartment and
ejects the CD.
If you do not remove the CD from CD
slot :, the CD changer will automatically
pull the CD back in after a short while.
i If audio source is changed during eject

X Press desired button k to p in the procedure (e.g. pressing button $) the
keypad to select a magazine compartment. eject procedure will be aborted and any
or CDs being ejected will be drawn back into
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio the unit.
controller to select the desired CD. X Repeat the last step until the magazine is
X Press W to confirm. empty.
The CD is ejected.
X Remove the CD from CD slot :. Selecting a CD
If you do not remove the CD from the CD
X h Q Changer
slot, the CD changer will automatically pull
the CD back in after a short while. The list with the magazine compartments
appears in the audio display. The magazine
i If audio source is changed during eject compartment with the current CD is
procedure (e.g. pressing button $) the highlighted.
eject procedure will be aborted and any X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audio
CDs being ejected will be drawn back into controller to select the desired CD.
the unit. X Press W to confirm.
X Ejecting all CDs: Press load/eject
button ;. Playing CDs
The magazine menu with active main area
appears in the audio display. The magazine i The following section is valid for the single
compartment with the current CD is CD player and the CD changer. The
highlighted. illustrations show the audio display of the
CD changer.
Additional button functions
In CD mode, you can use two additional
buttons on the telephone keypad:
m displays information about the track, if
it has been saved with the track on the
CD.
l enables you to enter the track number
X Slide VÆ to select the menu bar. directly.
X Slide XVY or rotate cVd the audio
controller to select Eject All.
X Press W to confirm.
The CDs are ejected one after the other.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 165
Audio system 165
Example display in audio CD mode Selecting a track

X Skipping forwards or backwards to a
track: Rotate cVd or slide XVY.
or
X Briefly press button E or F on audio
control unit.
i Skipping forwards through the tracks
Controls in detail
skips to the next track. Skipping backwards
: Track number through the tracks skips to the beginning
; Track name (only if saved on the disc) of the current track if the track has been
= Elapsed track time
playing for more than 8 seconds. If the
track has been playing for less than
? Disc name (only if saved on the disc) 8 seconds, it skips to the previous track. If
A Disc number (CD changer only) you have switched on the Random Tracks
B Disc type playback option, the order of the tracks is
random.
ProCarManuals.com
Example display in MP3 mode

X Selecting from the track list: h Q
Track List.
or
X Press W when the main area is selected.
The track list appears. In MP3 mode, the
track list of the current folder appears. The
dot # indicates the current track.
X Select a track by rotating cVd or sliding
: Track number ZVÆ.
; File name X Press W to confirm.
= Elapsed track time
? Current playback option (visible if
i In MP3 mode, the list shows all the tracks
activated) in alphabetical order.
A Folder name (only if saved on the disc) Fast forward/rewind
B Disc number (CD changer only) X Select main area.
C Disc type X Slide and hold XVY until desired position
Pause function is reached.

or
X Pausing playback: Press button 8
X Press and hold button E or F on
briefly.
audio control unit.
X Continuing playback: Press button 8
again briefly. Selecting a folder
i This function is only available in audio
MP3 mode.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 166
166 Audio system
X h Q Folder. i The Normal Track Sequence option is

or automatically activated when you select a
X Press W when the main area is selected. different medium. If an option is activated,
it remains activated after the audio system
The track list of the current folder appears.
is switched on/off.
X Move to the superordinate folder: Select
the U symbol.
The display now shows the next higher Audio AUX mode
folder level.
X Selecting a folder: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
An external audio source can be connected
to the AUX socket of the audio system. Please
cVd the audio controller, to select the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
desired folder. for more information.
You will see the tracks in the folder.
i Due to the large amount of information on
an MP3 disc it may take a while before all
folder and track information becomes
available. During this time the folder list
may be unavailable or slow.
X Select a track by sliding ZVÆ or rotating
cVd the audio controller.
The track is played and the corresponding AUX socket : is designed for a 3.5 mm
folder is now the active folder. stereo jack (3-pin), for devices with dedicated
analog audio output or connection via
Playback options headphone port, e.g. MP3 or tape player.
The following options are available:
G Warning!
RNormal Track Sequence
Operating an external audio source while the
Tracks playback in the order on the disc
vehicle is in motion will distract you. You may
(e.g. track 1, 2, 3, etc.).
not notice changing road and/or traffic
RRandom Tracks conditions which may cause an accident.
Tracks playback in a random order (e.g. Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
track 3, 8, 5, etc.). (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
RRandom Folder (in MP3 mode only) covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
Tracks in the active folder and any 14 m) every second.
subfolders playback in random order. For your safety and the safety of others, pull
X Selecting an option: h Q CD/MP3. over to a safe location and stop before
operating an external audio source.
The option list appears. A dot # indicates
which option is switched on.
Calling up AUX mode
X Select an option and press W.
The option is switched on. For all options G Warning!
except Normal Track Sequence, you will Due to the different volumes of the external
see a corresponding indicator in the main audio sources, system messages of the
area.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 167
Audio system 167
vehicle may be much louder. You may need to X Select Volume in AUX mode.
disable these system messages or adjust the The selection list appears. The dot #
volume of these messages manually. indicates the currently selected setting.
X Selecting audio AUX mode:

Press button h repeatedly until the
main menu for AUX operation appears.
or
Controls in detail
X In CD mode: Select CD/MP3 Q Aux.
The audio AUX menu appears. The medium in
the external audio source is heard, provided
it is connected and switched to playback. : Default setting
i Please refer to the relevant operating ; Volume boost
guide for operation of the external audio
source. Switch back to CD mode
The following settings can be made in the X Press button h.
ProCarManuals.com
audio AUX mode: or

RVolume (Y page 144) X Select Back To Disc in the audio AUX
RBalance control and fader (Y page 145) menu.
RBass and treble control (Y page 145)
RSurround sound (Y page 146) Telephone
i The volume of external audio sources is Safety precautions
extremely variable. It is possible that a
device connected as an external audio G Warning!
source will sound quieter or louder in the Please do not forget that your primary
vehicle or that the usual maximum volume responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s
cannot be achieved. On certain devices the attention to the road must always be his/her
volume can be set separately. In this case, primary focus when driving. For your safety
start at a moderate volume and increase it and the safety of others, we recommend that
slowly. In this way, you can determine you pull over to a safe location and stop
whether the system is capable of playback before placing or taking a telephone call.
without distortion, even at high volume. If you choose to use the mobile phone17 while
Volume adjustment for the audio device driving, please use the hands-free device and
only use the mobile phone when road,
You can increase the volume for the AUX weather and traffic conditions permit. Some
socket in case the internal volume of the jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
connected audio device is too low. Use the mobile phone while driving a vehicle.
setting Boost for such devices.
You should set the system back to (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
Standard before connecting a different audio covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
device to the AUX socket. 14 m) every second.
17 Observe all legal requirements.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 168
168 Audio system
i The functions and services available to With a suitable mobile phone, you can use the
you while using the mobile phone depend hands-free device and receive electronic
on your service provider and the type of business cards (vCards) via the Bluetooth®
mobile phone you are using. Also see interface.
separate operating manual of your mobile
phone for instructions on how to use your Calls disconnected while the vehicle is in
mobile phone. motion
Interruptions to the connection may occur if
When the mobile phone is connected via the
Rthere is insufficient mobile network

Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the coverage
following devices: Ryou move from one mobile network
RAudio system (Y page 177) transmitter/receiver area (mobile network
- Audio controller cell) into another and no channels are free
or the cell is full
- Audio control unit
Ryou are using a SIM card that is not
RButtons 6 and ~ on the compatible with the available network
multifunction steering wheel (Y page 118) Rwhen using a mobile phone with
RMobile phone keypad or similar input “Twincard”, the mobile phone is
device simultaneously logged into the network
Please note that these functions are only with the second SIM card
available with Mercedes-Benz approved Operating options
mobile phones.
TEL Menu of the audio system can be found on
(Y page 137) and (Y page 143).
Menu Function When the mobile phone is connected via the
Telephone Bluetooth® Phones Bluetooth® interface to the audio system, you
can operate the mobile phone using the
Receive Business following devices:
Card(s) (vCards) RButtons 6 and ~ and keypad on
Delete external data audio control unit (Y page 138)
RAudio controller in center console
Name Phone book
(Y page 140)
Call lists Call Lists or Mic On/ RMultifunction steering wheel (Y page 118)
Microphone off/ Mic Off
on Please note that these functions are only
Delete Call Lists available with Mercedes-Benz approved
mobile phones. Please contact an authorized
General notes Mercedes-Benz Center for information on
features available for your mobile phone of
Making calls via Bluetooth® interface choice.
The audio system telephone function via the i In order for the functions described in this
Bluetooth® interface is available in
section to work correctly, the Bluetooth®
conjunction with a Bluetooth® enabled telephone must be linked to the audio
mobile phone.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 169
Audio system 169
system. Please make sure any other RIf the mobile phone is locked.
Bluetooth® device linked with the mobile RIf the mobile phone has not yet acquired a
phone is switched off before you use the network signal.
telephone functions with the audio system.
The mobile phone automatically tries to log
Changes or modifications not expressly into a network. If no network is available,
approved by the party responsible for you will also not be able to make a “911”
compliance could void the user’s authority to emergency call. If you attempt to make an
operate the equipment. outgoing call, the No Service message will
Controls in detail
The head unit internal Bluetooth® transmitter appear for a short while.
must not be co-located or operated in RIf you switch off the audio system in the
conjunction with any other antenna or middle of a call, e.g. by switching off the
transmitter. ignition, that call will be cut off. You can
This equipment complies with FCC/IC prevent this from happening as follows:
radiation exposure limits set forth for - Switch the mobile phone to “private
uncontrolled equipment and meets the FCC mode” before switching the audio
radio frequency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in system off (see mobile phone operating
Supplement C to OET65 and RSS-102 of the
ProCarManuals.com
instructions).
IC radio frequency (RF) Exposure rules. This
equipment has very low levels of RF energy
that it is deemed to comply without testing of Activating the mobile phone
specific absorption ratio (SAR).
Prerequisites for the mobile phone
Unless otherwise indicated, the descriptions
For making calls using the audio system via
and illustrations in this section refer to the
the Bluetooth® interface, you will need a
audio system.
Bluetooth® enabled mobile phone.
Caller ID Your mobile phone must support the
The audio system can display the telephone Bluetooth® hands-free profile 1.0 or higher to
number and the name of the caller, e.g. for an make or receive calls (see mobile phone
incoming call and also in other menus or operating instructions).
displays.
i For further information on suitable mobile
For the telephone number to be displayed,
the caller must transmit their telephone phones and connecting Bluetooth®-
number. Otherwise Unknown will be shown on enabled mobile phones to the audio system
the audio display. Rvisit www.mbusa-mobile.com
This is also the case for name displays. For Rcall the Mercedes-Benz Customer
this, the telephone number and the name of Assistance Center at
the caller must also be saved in the telephone 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
book. (1-800-367-6372) (in the USA)
Functional restrictions Rcall Customer Service at
You will not be able to use the mobile phone, 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
or you may have to wait a while, in the
following situations: Activating Bluetooth®
RIf X Switch on the mobile phone (see mobile
the mobile phone is switched off.
phone operating instructions).
RIf the mobile phone is not connected via the
X Enter the PIN (not necessary with some
Bluetooth® interface to the audio system.
mobile phones or network).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 170
170 Audio system
X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the Searching for a mobile phone

mobile phone (see mobile phone operating X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones
instructions). Q Update.
X Press button % on the audio control unit The audio system searches for up to 10
to call up the telephone mode. suitable Bluetooth® telephones within
range and enters them into the telephone
i On certain mobile phones, not only you
list.
will have to activate the Bluetooth®
Authorized Bluetooth® telephones will be
function but in addition, your own device

must be made "visible" for other devices. identified by a telephone-symbol L in front
of the list entry once the telephone list has
Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth®
been updated. The symbol will be grayed
device name. It is recommended to give
out if the authorized mobile phone is not
your mobile phone a personal name, by
which you can clearly recognize your located within the Bluetooth® range.
mobile phone. i The duration of the search procedure
depends on the number and type of
i If the Bluetooth® function on the audio
Bluetooth® telephones. The search may
system is disabled, the message
take a few minutes.
Bluetooth not activated in system
settings appears. i If the telephone list is already full
X Activate Bluetooth® connection on the (15 entries), you must de-authorize one of
audio system (Y page 147). the authorized devices (Y page 172), and
start the search again. Otherwise a new
X i Q System Q Activate
device you are looking for will not appear
Bluetooth. in the list.
You have activated or deactivated
If the audio system does not find your
Bluetooth®. A checkmark appears when mobile phone, external authorization may
Bluetooth® is activated. be necessary (Y page 171).
Registering a mobile phone Authorizing a Bluetooth® device

(authorizing) X Select the desired unauthorized device
from the telephone list by pushing the
When you use your mobile phone in
audio controller.
conjunction with the audio system for the first
time, you must register (authorize) it. or
X Select Options Q Authorize.
It is possible to register up to 15 mobile
phones. The connection is always established The input menu for the passcode appears.
to the last activated mobile phones in signal
range. When you authorize a new mobile
phone, it is activated automatically. You can
switch between the authorized mobile
phones.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 171
Audio system 171
i The passcode is any one- to sixteen-digit X Enter the same passcode on the mobile
number, which you can set yourself. For the phone as you did on the audio system.
quality of coding of the connection it is
recommend to use a passcode of at least i You may need to confirm the authorizing
four digits. You must enter the same on the mobile phone. Check your mobile
passcode into the audio system and the phone display.
device to be authorized. Also refer to the If the message Authorization
operating instructions of the mobile phone. Procedure Unsuccessful appears on the
Controls in detail
audio system display, you may have
On the audio system, you can enter the
exceeded the preset period for
passcode via the digits in the on-screen menu
authorization. Repeat the process.
bar or via the telephone keypad in the audio
control unit. The device is authorized. You can now make
With the audio controller: calls via the audio system hands-free device
using the authorized mobile phone.
X Entering passcode: Select the digits in the
menu bar one by one, by sliding XVY or External authorization
rotating cVd the audio controller.
If the audio system cannot find your mobile
ProCarManuals.com
X Press W to confirm each digit.

phone, this may be due to special security
X Confirming passcode: Select ¬ in the settings on your mobile phone. In this case,
menu bar and press W to confirm. you can check whether, conversely, your
X Deleting digits: Select 2 in the menu mobile phone can find the audio system. The
bar and briefly press W to delete one digit, audio system’s Bluetooth® device name is
or press and hold W to delete all entered “MB Bluetooth”.
digits. X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones
X Canceling entry: Press button k in the Q Update Q Options Q External
center console (Y page 141). Authorization.
The message Ready for External
With keypad on audio control unit:
Authorization appears.
X Entering passcode: Press the desired X Start Bluetooth® search procedure on the
numbers on the keypad.
mobile phone (see mobile phone operating
X Confirming passcode: Press button
instructions).
6 or button m in the audio control X Select the audio system (“MB Bluetooth”)
unit to confirm. at your mobile phone.
X Deleting digits: Briefly press button
X When prompted to do so, enter the
2 in the audio control unit to delete one passcode on the mobile phone and then on
number, or press and hold button 2 to the audio system.
delete all entered numbers.
X Canceling entry: Press button k in the
Displaying details on a mobile phone
center console (Y page 141).
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.
Entering passcode into the mobile phone X Select the mobile phone from the list.
If a Bluetooth® connection is established
successfully, you will be prompted to enter a
code into the mobile phone (see mobile
phone operating instructions).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 172
172 Audio system
X Select Options Q Details. A dot # in front of the entry, indicates the

The details screen for the device is shown current active mobile phone in the phone
in the audio display. list.
X Closing details screen: Slide XVY, rotate
cVd or press W, or press button k. Receiving business cards
You can import business cards (vCards) into
De-authorizing a Bluetooth® device the address book from external Bluetooth®
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones. devices (Y page 174).

X Select authorized device.
TEL-Basic display
X Select Options Q De-Authorize.
X Press button % on the audio control unit
A prompt appears asking whether you
really want to de-authorize this device. to call up the telephone mode.
X Select Yes or No. When the connected mobile phone is ready
If you select Yes, the device will be de- for operation, the display will look similar like
authorized. this:
i If you de-authorize a device which has

been authorized in the past and which is not
detected in the search, this device will no
longer be displayed in the device list.
Devices which have been authorized in the
past but which are not detected in the
search are either not switched on or not in
the vehicle.
The following information is displayed in the
status bar:
Activating another mobile phone
RActual time: 04:38
If you have several authorized mobile phones,
RBluetooth® device name of the connected
you can switch between the individual mobile
phones. mobile phone, in this case: blue_mobile.
RMobile phone network signal strength
i You cannot switch to another authorized
mobile phone during a call. r. This information will only be shown
with suitable mobile phones.
When you authorize a new mobile phone, it is
automatically activated. Only one mobile The bars indicate the current signal
phone can be active at a time. strength of the mobile phone network for
reception. Optimum reception is indicated
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones.
by all bars full. All bars empty indicates very
X Select an authorized mobile phone from poor or no reception.
the list. RReceiver symbol 6 or ~. The
receiver symbol indicates whether a call is
The selected mobile phone will be searched being connected or is in progress:
for and connected if it is located in the ~ - not active
Bluetooth® range and Bluetooth® is
activated on the corresponding device.
The selected mobile phone is activated.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 173
Audio system 173
RREADY indicates that a call is possible. Consult the separate mobile phone operating
RNO SERVICE indicates that the mobile instructions that came with your mobile
network is not available. phone for information on how to place a
“911” emergency call on the mobile phone.
The following conditions must be met for a
Setting transmit and receive volume
“911” emergency call via the audio system:
i These settings should normally not be RMobile phone must be switched on.
changed as the factory settings are
Controls in detail
RThe corresponding mobile
matched to most mobile phones. Find out
about the optimum settings for your mobile communications network must be
phone at an authorized Mercedes-Benz available.
Center. i Emergency calls may not be possible with
all telephone networks or if certain network
i Changes may result in significant
services and/or telephone functions are
impairments to the transmission quality. active. Check with your local service
These settings may not be changed during providers and mobile phone instructions.
an active phone call.
If you cannot make an emergency call, you
ProCarManuals.com
X % Q Tel Q Bluetooth Phones. will have to initiate rescue measures yourself.

X Select a mobile phone from the list.
X Select Options Q Reception Volume or Placing a “911” emergency call using
Transmission Volume. audio control unit with the mobile
X Setting the volume: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
phone unlocked
cVd the audio controller. X Press button % to switch to telephone
The volume bar moves up or down. mode.
X Exiting menu: Press W or slide XVY the X Enter 911 using the number keypad on the
audio controller or press button k. audio control unit.
X Press button 6.
or
Emergency calls “911” X Press W for dialing to begin.
i The “911” emergency call system is a Connecting... appears in the audio

public service. Using it without due cause display while the mobile phone establishes
is a criminal offense. the connection.
X Wait until the emergency call center
i This function places a call to the local answers, then describe the emergency.
“911” provider. It does not initiate a Tele
Aid call. i Depending on the phone type, if no SIM
card is inserted in a GSM mobile phone or
The following describes how to dial a “911” if there is no service on a CDMA mobile
emergency call using the audio system head phone, NO SERVICE may appear in the
unit when a Mercedes-Benz specified mobile audio display. In that case, you only can
phone is connected via the Bluetooth® make an emergency call on the mobile
interface to the audio system. Unless phone itself, without the use of the audio
otherwise specified, the descriptions refer to control unit.
the audio system head unit.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 174
174 Audio system
Placing a “911” emergency call with the business cards (vCards)”, see the operating
mobile phone locked instructions of the mobile phone).
The audio system imports the data for the
i If the mobile phone is locked, you only can business cards and displays the number of
make an emergency call on the mobile business cards received.
phone itself, without the use of the audio
control unit. i Select Back or switch to a different mode
to abort reception.
X Ending reception: Press W.

Phone book
or
You can save telephone numbers in the audio X Press button k in the center console
system’s phone book.
(Y page 141).
i These entries are retained even if you use
the audio system with another mobile Deleting external Data
phone. You should delete these entries
X % Q Tel Q Delete External
before handing over or selling your vehicle.
Data.
Receiving business cards (vCards) A prompt appears asking whether the data
should be deleted.
You can import business cards (vCards) from X Select Yes or No.
external Bluetooth® phones into your audio If you select Yes all personal data are then
system’s phone book. To do this: deleted from the phone book.
RBluetooth® must be activated on the audio
system and on the external Bluetooth® Opening the phone book
phone (see the operating instructions of
X % Q Name.
the mobile phone).
Entries in the phone book are displayed in
RThe external Bluetooth® phone must be alphabetical order. The search speller is
able to send vCards via Bluetooth® (see the active when more multiple entries are
operating instructions of the mobile available. The search speller appears on
phone). the lower edge of the display.
RThe external Bluetooth® phone in the You can use the search speller to reduce the
vehicle must be switched on and number of entries you need to make.
authorized.
i If you switch to a different mode while
vCards are being received (e.g., press
button $), reception of vCards will be
aborted.
X % Q Tel Q Receive Business
Card(s).
X Press W to confirm. Symbol G indicates that an entry contains
X Wait until the message Ready to more than one phone number. You can select
Receive - Received: 0 appears. these subentries (Y page 176).
X Importing: Start the data transfer on the
external Bluetooth® phone (“Export
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 175
Audio system 175
X Switching from the search speller to X Select the characters for the required entry
the list: Slide ZV repeatedly. one after another.
or As soon as the selection has been
X
narrowed down to a single entry, the audio
Select ¬.
system will switch to the list automatically.
X Switching from the list to the search
X Deleting an individual character: Select
speller: Press button k.
2 and briefly press W.
or
Controls in detail
Selecting an entry
X Press button 2 next to the audio
Selecting via search speller controller.
X If necessary, switch from the list to the
After entering each character or after each
search speller. deletion of a character, the closest
matching entry is given at the top of the list.
X Switching search speller character
X Deleting an entire entry: Select 2 and
set: Select C.
Depending on the previous setting, this press and hold W until the entire entry has
switches the search speller to letters with been deleted.
ProCarManuals.com
special characters or numbers with special or

characters. X Press and hold button 2 until the entire
X Entering characters: Slide XVY or rotate entry has been deleted.
cVd the audio controller to select the X Ending search: Switch from the search
characters for the required entry. speller to the list.
The first letters you enter determine the The top list entry is highlighted
first letters of the name you are looking for. automatically.
Selecting via list
The first entry containing the selected
initial letters is highlighted in the list. If X If necessary, switch from the search speller
there are a number of similar entries, the to the list.
next different character is displayed.
Example:
Phone book list

Entries with symbol :G have additional
In the example, the first letters of the names options available, e.g. more phone numbers.
Fisher, Bob and Fisher, Kim are the X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audio
same. The first possible distinct letter is the controller until the desired entry is
B or the K. highlighted.
Therefore, B and K are offered as possibilities. X Press W to confirm and a call will be
initiated.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 176
176 Audio system
Selecting subentries Displaying details on an entry

X Select an entry with the symbol G from The audio system can also fully display an
the list and press W. abbreviated entry.
Symbol G changes to I and the X Select entry.
subentries appear.
X Slide VY to select Options.
X Select Details.
A popup screen with the details of the

selected entry appears.
X Closing popup screen: Slide ZVÆ, XVY,
rotate cVd, press W, or press button
2 or k.
: Phone book entry with subentries
Deleting entry
X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audio
controller until the desired subentry is X Select entry.
highlighted. X Slide VY to select Options.
X Press W to confirm and a call will be X Press W to confirm.
initiated. X Select Delete.
Depending on the mobile phone and the You will be prompted to confirm that you
entries in the mobile phone book, the phone really want to delete the entry.
numbers are assigned to categories. The X Select Yes or No.
categories are indicated by category If you select Yes the actual entry is deleted
symbols. from the phone book.
Number category Display
Not classified ° Call lists
Home @ The audio system displays the calls received
Work \ (including missed calls) or made during phone
mode in their own lists.
i The particular menu item can only be
Phone category Display
selected if calls have already been received
Not classified ° or made from audio system.
Displaying missed calls in the audio system
Mobile ¢
display is not possible with all mobile
Car ^ phones.
The control system displays the list of
Pager ï
dialed numbers in the multifunction
display.
i The audio system’s call lists are not

synchronized with the call lists on your
mobile phone. If you make a call from your
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 177
Audio system 177
mobile phone and only use the audio X In the phone main menu select Call
system’s hands-free device, these calls will Lists.
not be listed. X Select Delete Call Lists.
You will be prompted to confirm that you
Calling up the list really want to delete the entry. The
X % Q Call Lists. question Do you want to delete the
call lists appears in the display.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
X Select Yes or No.
Controls in detail
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
If you select Yes both lists are deleted.
Making calls
X Press button % on the audio control unit
to call up the telephone mode.
When the mobile phone is ready for
ProCarManuals.com
operation, the display will look similar like

this:
i If there is a symbol with a telephone
receiver in front of the phone number or the
name, then you have missed this call (e.g.
in the highlighted line of the following
figure).
Initiating an outgoing call

Entering phone number via the audio
control unit
You can enter numbers and special
X Slide ZVÆ or rotate cVd the audio characters via the telephone keypad.
controller until the desired entry is
X Entering: Use x to s, m and
highlighted.
l to enter characters.
X Initiating call: Press button W or 6.
You can enter the * character by pressing
X To close the lists: Press button k.
button l once. You can enter the +
character by pressing button l once
Deleting call lists and then again within approx. 1.5 seconds.
X Initiating a call: Press button 6.
i The saved call lists are retained in the
audio system, even if you use the audio X Deleting individual digits: Briefly press
system with another mobile phone. For this button 2 in the audio control unit.
reason you should delete any call lists
before handing over or selling the vehicle.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 178
178 Audio system
X Deleting an entire entry: Press and hold or

button 2 until the entire entry has been X Press button ~.
deleted. X Initiating a call: Slide XVY or rotate
or cVd the audio controller to select ö.
X Press button ~. X Press W to confirm.
Entering phone number via the audio or

controller X Press button 6.
In addition to the actual menu bar, the

Initiating a call to a phone book entry
telephone main menu features a second bar
containing numbers, the number menu. X % Q Name.
When the bar is active (highlighted), you can X Select entry (Y page 175).
select elements. X Press button 6 or W.
Initiating a call to a call list entry

X % Q Call Lists.
X Select Calls Received or Calls
Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
X Select entry (Y page 176).
X Press button 6 or W.
X Entering digits: Slide XVY or rotate
cVd the audio controller to select the Redialing
required digit.
X Repeat the procedure, until you have select
all digits for the necessary phone number.
X Deleting individual digits: Slide XVY or
rotate cVd to select 2 and briefly press
W.
or
X Press button 2 next to the audio i In order to use the redial function, no
controller. numbers may have been entered.
X Deleting entire phone number: Slide X Press button 6.
XVY or rotate cVd to select 2, press or
and hold W until the phone number has X Select ö and press W.
been deleted.
The dialed calls list appears. The call dialed
or last will be at the top of the list.
X Press and hold button 2 until the entire X Selecting a call: Slide ZVÆ or rotate
entry has been deleted. cVd the audio controller until the desired
entry is highlighted.
X Initiating call: Press button 6 or W.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 179
Audio system 179
Aborting dial or ending a call X Rejecting: Press button ~ on audio

X
control unit.
% Q ¢ and press W.
or
or
X Slide XV or rotate cVd the audio
X Press button ~ on the audio control unit
controller to select Reject, and press W
or on the multifunction steering wheel.
to confirm.
The call is rejected.
Rejecting or accepting calls
Controls in detail
If you have accepted the call using the audio
You will be notified of an incoming call by the control unit, audio controller, or the
ringing tone and a message on the display. multifunction steering wheel, the call will be
conducted via the hands-free system. The
i Depending on the mobile phone you are
volume of the call can be adjusted
using, the audio system’s ringing tone may
(Y page 144).
differ from the one you have set on your
mobile phone. You may hear Further operating functions can be found in
the “Functions during a single-call” section
Rthe ringing tone set on the mobile phone
(Y page 179).
ProCarManuals.com
Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone You can also accept a call if the audio display
Rthe audio system’s preset ringing tone is showing a screen other than the telephone
and the ringing tone set on the mobile mode screen. After accepting the call, the
phone display switches to the phone display. Once
the call is over, the display for the previous
If the caller’s name and number are among mode will appear again.
the entries in the audio system’s phone book
and the caller has not withheld this
information, it will appear on the display. If Functions during a single call
the caller withholds this information, you will
see: Switching hands-free microphone on or
off
The menu bar changes when you make or
receive a call. Instead of the Call Lists
menu item, Mic Off or Mic On will appear.
X Switching off: Select Mic Off.
The following message will flash up on the
display: The microphone is off.
When the microphone is switched off the
X Accepting: Press button 6 on audio symbol Q appears in the main area.
control unit or on the multifunction steering X Switching on: Select Mic On.
wheel. The following message will flash up on the
or display: The microphone is on.
X Press W. The microphone is switched on and the
symbol Q disappears in the main area.
i You can also switch the microphone on or
off by pressing button 8.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 180
180 Driving systems
Sending DTMF tones Cruise control

i This function is not possible with all The cruise control maintains the speed you
mobile phones. set for your vehicle automatically.
Answering machines or other devices can be The use of the cruise control is recommended
controlled via DTMF tones, e.g. for remote for driving at a constant speed for extended
query functions. periods of time.
X Transmitting individual characters:
During a call select the required

characters.
or
X Press the corresponding button on the
audio control unit.
Every selected character is transmitted
immediately.
X Transmitting a phone number of a
phone book entry as a sequence of
characters: Select Name. The currently set speed or last set speed
X Select the desired phone book entry. (“Resume” function) appears in the
The entry is transmitted immediately as a multifunction display for approximately
sequence of characters. 5 seconds. The corresponding cruise control
X Switching back to call display: Select speed segments : from the selected speed
Back. to the vehicle maximum speed in the
multifunction display are illuminated.
G Warning!
Driving systems
The cruise control is a convenience system
Introduction designed to assist the driver during vehicle
operation. The driver is and must always
This section describes the following driving remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed
systems of your vehicle: and for safe brake operation.
RCruise control Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
RHill-start assist system and weather conditions make it advisable to
RAll-wheel
travel at a constant speed.
drive (4MATIC)
RThe use of the cruise control can be
RDynamic handling package with sport dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
driving mode traffic because conditions do not allow safe
RParktronic system, Canada only driving at a constant speed.
RRear view camera RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid
The driving safety systems ABS, Adaptive
changes in tire traction can result in wheel
Brake, BAS, EBP and ESP® are described in
spin and loss of control.
the “Safety and security” section
(Y page 60). RDeactivate the cruise control when driving
in fog.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 181
Driving systems 181
The “Resume” function should only be Setting current speed

operated if the driver is fully aware of the X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
previously set speed and wishes to resume speed.
this particular preset speed.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
G Warning! direction of arrow : or press in direction

The cruise control brakes automatically so of arrow ;.
that the set speed is not exceeded. X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Controls in detail
pedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
the grade eases, the set speed will be
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
maintains the set speed by braking with the
vehicle’s brake system.
ProCarManuals.com
In addition, on longer downhill grades the

automatic transmission will downshift
: Setting current or higher speed automatically.
; Setting current or lower speed
i Vehicles with manual transmission:
= Canceling the cruise control
If you depress the clutch pedal when
? Activating the cruise control or resuming shifting into another gear, the engine speed
to last set speed may increase.
RAlways drive with sufficient, but not
Activating cruise control
excessive, engine speed.
You can activate the cruise control at a RShift the gear in a timely manner.
vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
RAvoid shifting down more than one gear
You cannot activate the cruise control
if at all possible.
Rwhen you brake
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake Canceling cruise control
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
or
position N
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
direction of arrow =.
due to a malfunction The last set speed is stored for later use.
The vehicle speed displayed in the The last stored speed is deleted from memory
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed when the engine is turned off.
setting for the cruise control system. The cruise control switches off automatically
when you depress the brake pedal or you
engage the parking brake. In this case, the
cruise control speed segments in the
multifunction display will go out.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 182
182 Driving systems
The cruise control also switches off You can increase or decrease the set speed
automatically when in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
(30 km/h) When you use the cruise control lever to
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
Rthe ESP® is in operation vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP® power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
switch
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:

Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a 1 km/h) increments
malfunction
i The set speed value is increased or
RVehicles with manual transmission: you decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
engage neutral or depress the clutch pedal increments each time you lift or press the
for more than 6 seconds during shifting into cruise control lever up or down to the
another gear resistance point.
RVehicles with manual transmission: you
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
engage a gear too high for the current
lever up to the resistance point in direction
speed and thus the engine speed is too low
of arrow :.
RVehicles with automatic transmission: you X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
shift the automatic transmission into
control lever down to the resistance point
neutral position N while driving
The cruise control speed segments in the X Release the cruise control lever.
multifunction display goes out and an The new speed is set and the vehicle will
acoustic warning will sound. Observe accelerate or decelerate.
additional messages in the multifunction
display that may appear. Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not 10 km/h) increments
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief i The set speed value is increased or
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
control will resume the last set speed.
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
Changing the set speed resistance point.
G Warning! X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment lever up past the resistance point in
until the vehicle has made the necessary direction of arrow :.
adjustments. X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to control lever down past the resistance
a value that the prevailing road conditions and point in direction of arrow ;.
legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
X Release the cruise control lever.
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
or serious injury to you and others.
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the set speed.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 183
Driving systems 183
Setting stored speed (Resume time, and carefully depress the accelerator
function) pedal.
X
G Warning! Automatic transmission: Shift into drive
The set speed stored in memory should only position D or reverse position R.
be set again if prevailing road conditions and X Release the brake pedal.
legal speed limits permit. Possible X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
acceleration or deceleration differences The hill-start assist system is inactive
Controls in detail
arising from returning to the preset speed Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
grades
to you and others.
Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in position N
direction of arrow ?. Rwith the parking brake engaged
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored.
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
malfunction
ProCarManuals.com
pedal.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
All-wheel drive (4MATIC)
when the engine is turned off.
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC),
both axles are powered at all times when the
Hill-start assist system vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC
improves traction in conjunction with the
On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
maintains the pressure in the brake system ESP® (Y page 62) and the Electronic Traction
for approximately 1 second after you have System (ETS/4-ETS) (Y page 63).
released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can G Warning!
start off smoothly without the vehicle moving If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient
immediately after releasing the brake pedal. traction:
G Warning! RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as
The hill-start assist system is not designed to possible.
function as a parking brake. It does not RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator
prevent the vehicle from moving when parked pedal.
on an incline.
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the
Always engage the parking brake in addition
prevailing road conditions.
to shifting the automatic transmission into
park position P (manual transmission: shift Failure to observe these guidelines could
into 1st gear or reverse gear R). cause the vehicle to skid.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents
X Depress the brake pedal. resulting from excessive speed.
X Manual transmission: Shift into 1st gear
or reverse gear R. ! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
X Slowly release the clutch pedal, removing
could damage the transfer case, which is
your foot from the brake pedal at the same not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 184
184 Driving systems
ground. Observe instructions for towing the

vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
! Only conduct operational or performance

tests are necessary, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake
system and/or the transfer case which is

not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
X Start the engine.
i In winter operation, the maximum
effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (Y page 252) or Sport driving mode
snow chains as required. The firmer suspension tuning in sport driving
mode provides enhanced road contact.
Select this mode for example, on winding
Dynamic handling package with sport highways.
driving mode
The setting remains stored until you turn off
The most important part of the dynamic the engine.
handling package with sport driving mode is X Press button ;.
the variable damping system. It adjusts the Indicator lamp : comes on. The sport
damping to the respective driving condition driving mode is selected. Depending on
automatically. engine version, the accelerator pedal may
The damping adjustment depends on respond more immediate. In vehicles with
Ryour driving style automatic transmission, automatic
Rthe
program mode S is selected and will be
road condition
displayed in the multifunction display
Ryour individual selection, see the following (Y page 112).
description
Vehicles with automatic transmission: The Comfort driving mode
sport driving mode button selects the
automatic shift programs C/S. For Vehicle handling in comfort driving mode is
information on the automatic shift programs, softer. Select this mode when you prefer a
see “Automatic shift programs” more comfortable driving style on straight
(Y page 111). The automatic transmission freeways.
with dynamic handling package with sport X Press button ;.
driving mode contains additional steering Indicator lamp : goes out. The comfort
wheel gearshift controls, see “One-touch driving mode is selected. In vehicles with
gearshifting” (Y page 112). automatic transmission, automatic
program mode C is selected and will be
displayed in the multifunction display
(Y page 112).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 185
Driving systems 185
Parktronic system (Parking assist) scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning

the driving systems sensors” (Y page 263).
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles. G Warning!
The Parktronic system is an electronic The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
to assist the driver during parking maneuvers. for extreme care. The responsibility during
The Parktronic system indicates the relative parking and other critical maneuvers always
Controls in detail
distance between the vehicle and an obstacle remains with the driver.
visually and audibly.
The Parktronic system is activated G Warning!
automatically when Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
Ryou switch on the ignition maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
and injured.
Ryou release the parking brake
and ! Special attention must be paid to objects
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
ProCarManuals.com
Rvehicles with automatic transmission: the

(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts,
automatic transmission is in drive position
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such
D, reverse gear R, or neutral position N
objects may not be detected by the system
The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds and can damage the vehicle.
above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At During parking maneuvers, pay special
lower speeds, the Parktronic system attention to objects located above or below
activates again. the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs,
The Parktronic system also deactivates when painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
you shift the automatic transmission into Parktronic system will not detect such
park position P or engage the parking brake. objects at close range and damage to your
The Parktronic system monitors the vehicle or the object may result.
surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors
in the front bumper and four sensors in the ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
rear bumper. (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
Example illustration, sensors in the front bumper

To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 186
186
ProCarManuals.com Controls in detail Driving systems
Front area warning indicators

Front sensors
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center approx. 8 in (20 cm) Rear area warning indicators
Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm) Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left
If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The
in this range, all the distance warning Parktronic system is ready to measure when
segments illuminate and you hear a warning the yellow readiness indicators = are
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the illuminated.
minimum distance, the actual distance may The current transmission position determines
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic which warning indicator will be activated.
system. Manual transmission:
Warning indicators Current Warning indicator

transmission
Visual signals indicate the relative distance position
between the sensors and an obstacle.
Forward gear or Front area activated
neutral position
Reverse gear Front and rear area
activated
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 187
Driving systems 187
Automatic transmission: Switching the Parktronic system on/

off
Current Warning indicator
transmission The Parktronic system switches on
position automatically when the ignition is switched
on.
D Front area activated
R or N Front and rear area
Controls in detail
activated
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or

more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic
warning will sound as the first red distance
ProCarManuals.com
segment illuminates and a constant X Switching off: Press Parktronic

acoustic warning lasting a maximum of switch :.
2 seconds will sound for the second red Indicator lamp ; comes on.
distance segment. Vehicles with automatic X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch :
transmission: The signal is canceled when again.
the automatic transmission is shifted into
park position P or the parking brake is
engaged. Vehicles with manual
Parktronic system malfunction
transmission: The signal is canceled when There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
the parking brake is engaged. system, if only the red distance segments
RRear area: An intermittent acoustic illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
warning will sound as the first red distance The Parktronic system will switch off
segment illuminates and a constant automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
acoustic warning lasting a maximum of lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
2 seconds will sound for the second red X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
distance segment. Vehicles with automatic authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
transmission: The signal is canceled when as possible.
the automatic transmission is shifted into If only the red distance segments illuminate
drive position D, or park position P, or the and no acoustic warning sounds, the
parking brake is engaged. Vehicles with Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
manual transmission: The signal is ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
canceled when the manual transmission is interference from other radio or ultrasonic
shifted into neutral position, or in a forward signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
gear, or the parking brake is engaged. jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 188
188 Driving systems
X Switch off the ignition. G Warning!

X Clean the Parktronic system sensors The rear view camera either will not function
(Y page 263). or will not function to its full capability if
X Switch on the ignition. Rthe trunk lid is open
or Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy
X Check the Parktronic system operation at
Rit is night or you are parking/maneuvering
another location to rule out interference
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.

Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
light
Rear view camera Rthe immediate surroundings are
The rear view camera is an optical parking aid. illuminated with fluorescent light (the
COMAND system display can flicker)
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display as a mirror image, Rthere is a sudden change in temperature,
like in the rear view mirror. e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from
the cold (lens condensation)
G Warning!
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/ Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be In this case, have the position and setting
injured. of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz
G Warning! recommends that you contact a Mercedes-
The rear view camera is only an aid and may Benz Center for this purpose.
display obstacles Do not use the rear view camera in these
Rfrom a distorted perspective situations. Otherwise you could injure
Rinaccurately yourself or others and/or damage property
including your vehicle while parking/
Rmay not display obstacles at all maneuvering.
The rear view camera does not relieve you of
the responsibility to be cautious. Take care
and pay careful attention. The rear view
camera may not show objects which are
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Runder the rear bumper
Rabove the trunk handle
You are responsible for safety at all times and
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 189
Climate control system 189
“Cleaning the rear view camera lens” i The image from the rear view camera will
(Y page 263). no longer be displayed if you select another
function on the COMAND system while
Switching on or off reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
image again, disengage and reengage
X Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
reverse gear R.
X Make sure the rear view camera is switched
on in the COMAND system. For more X Switching off: Shift the automatic
transmission into park position P, neutral
Controls in detail
information refer to separate COMAND
operating instructions. position N, or drive position D.
X Switch on the COMAND system.
X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
gear R.
The area behind the vehicle appears in the
COMAND system display.
ProCarManuals.com
Climate control system

Control panel
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 192)
control, driver’s side
; Climate control on/ i Switch on/off the climate control (Y page 191)
off system.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 190
190 Climate control system
Function Recommendation/Notes
= Ù on/off (USA (Y page 195)
only)
º Adopting (Y page 196)
driver’s side settings
for all zones (Canada
only)
? AC cooling on/off i Switch on/off the air conditioning. (Y page 191)

A Front defroster i Keep this setting selected only until the (Y page 194)
windshield or the side windows are clear
again.
B Temperature i Set the temperature to 72‡ (22†). (Y page 192)
control, passenger
side
C Air recirculation i Only use this function for a short time, (Y page 195)
e.g. in a tunnel. Otherwise, the windows
can fog up due to lack of fresh air.
D Rear window (Y page 196)
defroster
E Increasing air (Y page 194)
volume
F Decreasing air (Y page 194)
volume
G Display
H Air distribution (Y page 194)
I Air distribution and i Switch on the automatic mode. The (Y page 192)
air volume indicator lamp in button Ã comes on.
(automatic mode)
Notes on climate control system It can only function optimally when you are
driving with the windows, the tilt/sliding
The climate control system is operational sunroof or tilt/sliding panel closed.
whenever the engine is running. You can
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
operate the climate control system in either
are filtered out before outside air enters the
the automatic or manual mode. The system
passenger compartment through the air
cools or heats the interior depending on the
distribution system.
selected interior temperature.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 191
G Warning! X Deactivating: Press button ^.

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution) The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
may require replacement of the filter before X Reactivating: Press button ^.
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior The previous settings are once again in
and the windows could fog up, impairing effect.
visibility and endangering you and others. or
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as X Press button Ã.
Controls in detail
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Center. Air volume and air distribution are adjusted
The air conditioning will not engage (no automatically.
cooling) if the A/C mode (Y page 191) is
deactivated.
Air conditioning
G Warning!
Follow the recommended settings for heating The air conditioning is operational while the
and cooling given on the following pages. engine is running and cools the interior air to
ProCarManuals.com
Otherwise the windows could fog up, the temperature set by the operator. In
impairing visibility and endangering you and addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
others. the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the G Warning!
windshield free of snow and debris. If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
Do not obstruct air flow by placing objects on vehicle will not be cooled when weather
the air flow-through exhaust slots below the conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
rear window. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the visibility and endanger you and others.
interior before driving off, see “Summer
opening feature” (Y page 99). The climate i Condensated water may drip out from
control will then adjust the interior underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
temperature to the set value much faster. not an indication of a malfunction.
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which
Deactivating the climate control are harmful to the ozone layer.
system
G Warning! Deactivating
When the climate control system is It is possible to deactivate the air
deactivated, the outside air supply and conditioning. The interior air will then no
circulation are also deactivated. Only choose longer be cooled or dehumidified.
this setting for a short time. Otherwise the X Press button ¿.
windows could fog up, impairing visibility and The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
endangering you and others.
The cooling function switches off after a
short delay.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 192
Activating X Deactivating: Press button I, K or

_.
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
conditioning. The automatic operation of air volume and
air distribution switches off. The symbols of
X Press button ¿.
air distribution or air volume appear in
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. display G (Y page 189).
i The evaporator will be vented when the X Adjust air distribution (Y page 194).
air conditioning has been in use. X Adjust air volume (Y page 194).
Approximately 1 hour after locking the
vehicle, the blower switches on
automatically. The blower will run for Setting temperature
30 minutes at its lowest level. The blower
noise is normal and not an indication of a You can adjust the air temperature on each
malfunction. When you unlock the vehicle side of the passenger compartment. You
in the meantime, venting will be should raise or lower the temperature setting
interrupted. If the vehicle battery is low, in small increments, preferably starting at
automatic evaporator venting will not occur 72‡ (22†).
in order to preserve the battery.
You can adjust the air temperature on each
side of the passenger compartment. You
Automatic mode should raise or lower the temperature setting
in small increments, preferably starting at
When operating the climate control system in 72‡ (22†).
automatic mode, the interior air temperature,
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
air volume and air distribution are adjusted
automatically. temperature controls : and B
(Y page 189) slightly clockwise or
In automatic mode, cooling with
counterclockwise.
dehumidification is switched on. This function
can be switched off if necessary.
G Warning! Adjusting air vents
If you deactivate the air conditioning, the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather G Warning!
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up When operating the climate control, the air
more quickly. Window fogging may impair that enters the passenger compartment
visibility and endanger you and others. through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
X Set the desired temperature skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
(Y page 192).
Always keep sufficient distance between
X Activating: Press button Ã.
unprotected parts of the body and the air
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
The air volume and air distribution are adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
adjusted automatically. vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
area of unprotected skin.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 193
For best possible performance of the climate Side air vents

control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
Controls in detail
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Example illustration driver’s side
Center air vents : Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
ProCarManuals.com
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel =

upward or downward.
Ventilated glove box

The glove box can be ventilated, for instance
to cool its contents, when the climate control
: Left center air vent, adjustable system is activated. The level of airflow to the
; Right center air vent, adjustable
glove box depends on the airflow and air
distribution settings. The temperature of the
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
air is approximately the same as that of the
adjustable right center air vent air flowing from the center air vents.
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent ! Close the glove box air vent when heating
the vehicle interior. Activate the air
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels = conditioning (cooling function) when the
and ? upward or downward. outside temperature is high. Otherwise,
temperature-sensitive items stored in the
glove box could be damaged.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 194
Symbol Function
¯ Directs air through the
defroster air vents to the
windshield and front door
windows
P Directs air through the center
and side air vents
O Directs air to the footwells

: Thumbwheel N Directs air through the center
; Air vent and side air vents and to the
footwells
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
clockwise or counterclockwise. _ Directs air into the entire
vehicle interior (Canada only)
Rear center console air vents b Directs air through the center,
side and defroster air vents to
the windshield and front door
windows (Canada only)
a Directs air through the
defroster air vents to the
windshield and front door
windows and to the footwells
X Press button _ repeatedly until you

have select the desired setting and the
: Thumbwheel for air volume control for corresponding symbol is shown in display
rear center air vents G.
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Left rear center air vent, adjustable
Adjusting air volume
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel :
X Decreasing/increasing: Press button
upward or downward.
I or K.
Adjusting air distribution

Front defroster
The symbols shown in display G
You can use this setting to defrost the
(Y page 189) on the climate control panel
windshield, for example if it is iced up.
represent the following functions:
You can also defog the windshield and the
front door windows.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 195
i Keep this setting selected only until the MAX COOL is only operational when the
windshield or the front door windows are engine is running.
clear again. You can use this setting to provide the fastest
possible cooling of the vehicle interior (when
X Activating: Press button ¬.
windows and tilt/sliding sunroof or tilt/
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
sliding panel are closed).
The climate control switches to the following
X Activating: Press button Ù.
functions automatically:
Controls in detail
Rcooling on to dehumidify The climate control switches automatically to
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating the following functions:
power, depending on outside temperature Rmaximum cooling
Rair flows onto the windshield and the front Rmaximum blowing power
door windows
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched on
Rthe air recirculation mode is switched off
X Deactivating: Press button Ù again.
i You can adjust the air volume when the The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
ProCarManuals.com
front defroster is switched on. The previous settings are once again in
X Deactivating: Press button ¬ again. effect.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
i To switch the maximum cooling function
The previous settings are once again in
off, you can also press button ^, Ã
effect. The cooling remains switched on.
or ¬.
The air recirculation remains switched off.
or
X Press button Ã. Air recirculation mode
The indicator lamp in button ¬ goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are adjusted Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
automatically. unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through
i To deactivate defrosting, you can also a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
press button ^ or turn temperature outside air and recirculates the air in the
controls. passenger compartment.
G Warning!
Windshield fogged on the outside
Fogged windows impair visibility,
X Switch the windshield wipers on endangering you and others. If the windows
(Y page 96). begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
If the automatic mode of the climate control air recirculation mode immediately should
is switched off: clear interior window fogging. If interior
window fogging persists, make sure the air
X Press button _ repeatedly until one of
conditioning is activated, or press button
the following symbols appears in display
¬.
G (Y page 189) P or O.
X Activating: Press button g.
Maximum cooling MAX COOL
MAX COOL is only available in U.S. vehicles.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 196
196 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
i The air recirculation mode is activated Rear window defroster

automatically at high outside
temperatures. G Warning!
The indicator lamp in button g is not lit Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
when the air recirculation mode is switched removed from the rear window before driving.
on automatically. Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
A quantity of outside air is added after endangering you and others.
approximately 30 minutes.
The rear window defroster uses a large

X Deactivating: Press button g again. amount of power. To keep the battery drain
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
i The manually selected air recirculation defroster is switched off automatically after
mode is deactivated automatically: some time of operation depending on the
Rafter5 minutes if the outside outside temperature.
temperature is below approximately X Switch on the ignition.
41‡ (5†) X Switching on: Press button ¤ on the
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning is respective climate control panel.
turned off The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Rafter30 minutes if the outside X Switching off: Press button ¤ again.
temperature is above approximately
The rear window defroster switches off when
41‡ (5†)
the battery voltage is too low. Too many
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
Using driver-side settings for
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
passenger side
needed if required.
This feature is only available in Canada
vehicles.
You can use the settings of the driver’s side, Power tilt/sliding sunroof
such as temperature, air volume and air
distribution, for the passenger side. Opening and closing
X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air G Observe Safety notes, see page 54.
volume and air distribution.
G Warning!
X Press button ¸.
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
The driver-side settings are used for the anyone being harmed by the opening/closing
passenger side. procedure.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again. The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. express operation and automatic reversal
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
sunroof is blocked during the closing
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 197
Power tilt/sliding sunroof 197
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently opening feature” (Y page 99) and
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. “Convenience closing feature”
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof (Y page 100).
is blocked” section for details.
i After switching off the ignition or
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
removing the SmartKey from the starter
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
switch was moved past the resistance point
Controls in detail
passenger door. If no door was opened you
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
any direction.
to 5 minutes.
G Warning!
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may
shatter. This may result in an opening in the
roof.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
ProCarManuals.com
their seat belts or not wearing them properly

may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
entire body parts or portions of them may
protrude from the passenger compartment. Sunroof switch
: Raising
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not ; Opening
transport any objects with sharp edges = Closing
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
sunroof due to a malfunction contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
! Please keep in mind that weather

conditions can sometimes change rapidly. Sunroof screen
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
when leaving the vehicle. If water enters X Switch on the ignition.
the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding

sunroof using the SmartKey or the
KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 198
198 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Opening Closing
X Opening manually: Press and hold the X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow ;. direction of arrow =.
X Release the sunroof switch when the X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached. desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ X Express operation: To close the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
sunroof switch past the resistance point in switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow ; and release. direction of arrow = and release.
X Stopping during express operation: X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express opening is not available when the Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/ blocked
sliding sunroof must be closed first.
G Warning!
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open, Make sure that nobody can become trapped
resonance noises may result in addition to and be seriously or even fatally injured when
the usual wind noises. They are caused by closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater
minimal pressure changes in the passenger force or without automatic reversal function.
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/ If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly. blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will
Raising stop and open slightly.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
has stopped and opened because it was
sunroof switch to the resistance point in
blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch
direction of arrow :.
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
X Release the sunroof switch when the
sunroof is fully closed.
desired position is reached. The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/ force.
sliding sunroof completely, press the
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
opens slightly:
direction of arrow : and release.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. was blocked and has opened, pull and hold
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow
i Express raising is not available when the = until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding closed.
sunroof must be closed first. The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without
automatic reversal function.
G Warning!
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 199
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 199
after it had been blocked two times will cause function. If the movement of the roller
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any sunblinds is blocked during the extending
reversal function for as long as you hold the procedure, the roller sunblinds will stop and
sunroof switch. retract slightly.
The extending of the roller sunblinds can be
immediately halted by releasing the roof panel
Synchronizing switch or, if the roof panel switch was moved
past the resistance point and released, by
Controls in detail
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized moving the roof panel switch in any direction.
after a malfunction or if it does not open
smoothly.
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed
or synchronized, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
ProCarManuals.com
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in

direction of arrow : (Y page 197) until the
tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
rear.
Roof panel switch
X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
: Retracting
direction of arrow : for approximately
1 second. ; Retracting
X Check the express operation feature = Extending
(Y page 198). X Switch on the ignition.
If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized. X Retracting/Extending: Move the roof
Otherwise repeat the above steps. panel switch to the resistance point in the
required direction of arrow :, ; or =
until the roller sunblinds have reached their
Panorama roof with power tilt/ desired position.
sliding panel X Express operation: Move the roof panel
switch past the resistance point in
Extending and retracting the roller direction of arrow :, ; or = and release.
sunblinds The roller sunblinds retract/extend
The roller sunblinds only operate with the tilt/ completely.
sliding panel closed. The front and rear roller X Stopping during express operation:
sunblind cannot be operated individually. Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
G Warning!
When extending the roller sunblinds, make
sure no one is in danger of being injured by
the extending procedure.
The roller sunblinds are equipped with the
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 200
200 Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing the panorama ! Please keep in mind that weather
roof with power tilt/sliding panel conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
Make sure to close the tilt/sliding panel
G Observe Safety notes, see page 54. when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
G Warning! the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
could be damaged which is not covered by
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding panel,
the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The tilt/sliding panel is equipped with the

function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked during the closing procedure,
the tilt/sliding panel will stop and open
slightly.
The tilt/sliding panel operates differently
when the roof panel switch is pressed and
held. See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding
panel is blocked” section in this chapter for
Roof panel switch
details.
: Raising
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/
sliding panel can be immediately halted by ; Opening
releasing the roof panel switch or, if the roof = Closing
panel switch was moved past the resistance The tilt/sliding panel only operates with the
point and released, by moving the roof panel roller sunblinds retracted.
switch in any direction.
i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
G Warning! panel using the SmartKey, see “Summer
The panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel is opening feature” (Y page 99) or see
made out of glass. In the event of an accident, “Convenience closing feature”
the glass may shatter. This may result in an (Y page 100).
opening in the roof. X Switch on the ignition.
In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
their seat belts or not wearing them properly
may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
Opening
opening also presents a potential for injury for X Opening manually: Press and hold the
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as roof panel switch to the resistance point in
entire body parts or portions of them may direction of arrow ;.
protrude from the passenger compartment. X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not X Express operation: To open the tilt/
transport any objects with sharp edges sliding panel completely, press the roof
which can stick out of the tilt/sliding panel. panel switch past the resistance point in
Do not open the tilt/sliding panel if there is direction of arrow ; and release.
snow or ice on the roof, as this could result X Stopping during express operation:
in malfunctions.
Move the roof panel switch in any direction.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 201
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel 201
i When the tilt/sliding panel is open, closing the tilt/sliding panel without
resonance noises may result in addition to automatic reversal function.
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger If the movement of the tilt/sliding panel is
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by
noises, change the position of the tilt/ ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding panel will stop
sliding panel or open a window slightly. and open slightly.
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel has
Controls in detail
Raising stopped and opened because it was
X Raising manually: Press and hold the roof blocked, pull and hold the roof panel switch
panel switch to the resistance point in in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
direction of arrow :. panel is fully closed.
X Release the roof panel switch when the If the tilt/sliding panel is blocked again and
desired position is reached. opens slightly:
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/ X Immediately after the tilt/sliding panel was
sliding panel completely, press the roof blocked and has opened, pull and hold the
ProCarManuals.com
panel switch past the resistance point in roof panel switch in direction of arrow =
direction of arrow : and release. until the tilt/sliding panel is fully closed.
X Stopping during express operation: The tilt sliding panel closes without
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. automatic reversal function.
i Express raising is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding panel is open. The tilt/sliding Pulling and holding the roof panel switch to
panel must be closed first. close the tilt/sliding panel immediately after
it had been blocked two times will cause the
Closing tilt/sliding panel to close without any reversal
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the roof function for as long as you hold the roof panel
panel switch to the resistance point in switch.
direction of arrow =.
X Release the roof panel switch when the
desired position is reached.
Synchronizing
X Express operation: To close the tilt/ The tilt/sliding panel and front roller
sliding panel completely, pull the roof panel sunblinds must be synchronized after a
switch past the resistance point in malfunction or if the tilt/sliding panel does
direction of arrow = and release. not open smoothly.
X Stopping during express operation: ! Do not attempt to open the tilt/sliding
Move the roof panel switch in any direction. panel before the tilt/sliding panel is
properly synchronized. The tilt/sliding
Closing when the tilt/sliding panel is panel could otherwise lock-up in the open
blocked position.
G Warning! If the tilt/sliding panel cannot be closed or
Make sure that nobody can become trapped synchronized, contact an authorized
and be seriously or even fatally injured when Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside
Assistance.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 202
202 Loading and storing
X Switch on the ignition. The trunk is the preferred place to carry

X Push and hold the roof panel switch in objects. Do not place anything on the rear-
direction of arrow ; (Y page 199) until the window shelf.
roller sunblinds are fully retracted. Never drive a vehicle with the trunk open.
X Push and hold the roof panel switch in Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
direction of arrow ; until the tilt/sliding enter vehicle interior resulting in
panel is opened approximately 4 inch unconsciousness and death.
(10 cm).
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in Load distribution

direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = for approximately
1 second.
X Pull and hold the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = (Y page 199) until the
roller sunblinds are fully extended.
X Keep holding the roof panel switch in
direction of arrow = for approximately
1 second. The total load weight including vehicle
X Check the express operation feature of the occupants and luggage/cargo should not
tilt/sliding panel (Y page 200). exceed the total load limit indicated on the
If the tilt/sliding panel opens completely, corresponding Tire and Loading Information
the roof is synchronized. Otherwise repeat placard located on the driver’s door B-pillar
the above steps. (Y page 238).
The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
vehicle depend greatly on the load
Loading and storing distribution. It is therefore recommended to
Loading instructions load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
G Warning! towards the front of the vehicle.
Always fasten items being carried as securely i The enlarged cargo area should only be
as possible using fastening materials used for items which do not fit in the trunk
appropriate for the weight and size of the alone.
load.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
following instructions when loading the
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
vehicle and transporting cargo:
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are RAlways place items being carried against
securely fastened in the vehicle. front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
To help avoid personal injury during a collision them as securely as possible.
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or always be kept as low as possible against
cargo higher than the seat backrests. front or rear seat backrests.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 203
Loading and storing 203
Roof rack Parcel nets

For information about further roof rack G Warning!
equipment, contact an authorized Mercedes- Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
Benz Center. weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
G Warning! etc.
Only use roof racks approved by Mercedes- Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
Benz for your vehicle model to avoid damage fragile objects may not be transported in the
Controls in detail
to the vehicle. parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
Follow the manufacturer’s installation braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
attached roof rack system or its load could injury to vehicle occupants.
become detached from the vehicle. Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of in the event of an accident.
220 lb (100 kg). Parcel nets are located in the front passenger
Take into consideration that when the roof footwell and on the left trunk side wall.
rack is loaded, the handling characteristics
ProCarManuals.com
are different from those when operating the

vehicle without the roof rack loaded. Cargo tie-down rings
Make sure Vehicles with split rear seat bench are
Ryou can raise the power tilt/sliding sunroof
equipped with four cargo tie-down rings.
or the panorama roof with tilt/sliding panel Always follow loading instructions
completely (Y page 202).
Ryou can open the trunk completely
X
Hooks
Flip trim covers : open.
X Only attach the roof rack to the anchorage Two retaining hooks can be used to attach
points under trim covers :. cargo items such as bags.
X Observe manufacturer’s instructions for ! Do not use the retaining hooks to tie down
installation. cargo.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 204
204
ProCarManuals.com Controls in detail Loading and storing
Use retaining hooks to secure light-weight X Pull on left and/or right release handle :.
items only. The maximum permissible weight
X Fully retract the head restraints
per retaining hook is 6,6 lbs (3 kg).
(Y page 83).
X If necessary, pull the driver’s and/or front
Split rear seat bench passenger seat forward (Y page 80).
To expand the cargo volume, you can fold

down the left and right rear seat backrests.
The two sections can be folded down
separately.
G Warning!
When expanding the cargo volume, always
fold the seat cushions fully forward.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden X Fold seat backrests ; forward.
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around X Adjust front seats to desired position
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to (Y page 80).
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle. Setting up seat backrest
Folding seat backrest forward

X Open the trunk.
X Fold seat backrest : rearward until it

engages.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 205
Loading and storing 205
! Make sure that the seat belt is not Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
pinched. to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest. Rbraking
X Adjust head restraints, if necessary Rvehicle maneuvers

(Y page 83). Ran accident
X Adjust front seats to desired position
Controls in detail
(Y page 80).
Glove box
G Warning! Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
Always lock the seat backrest in its upright socket or a media interface is located in the
position when the rear seat bench is glove box. For information on Audio AUX
occupied, or the extended cargo volume is not mode, see (Y page 166) or on media
in use. interface, see separate COMAND system
Check for secure locking by pushing and operating instructions.
pulling on the seat backrest. The glove box can be ventilated
ProCarManuals.com
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden (Y page 193).

maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
transporting cargo.
i To prevent unauthorized persons from

access to the trunk, always lock the seat
backrests in its upright position.
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :.
X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
Front storage compartments
until it engages.
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when vehicle is in the shop for service.
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
cargo in the trunk if possible. with the mechanical key.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 206
206 Loading and storing
Rear storage compartments

G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
cargo in the trunk if possible.
Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
seat backrests.
Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
1 Glove box unlocked to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
2 Glove box locked
Rbraking
Front armrest storage compartments Rvehicle maneuvers

Ran accident
Rear armrest storage compartment

! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
against the armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
! Before storing the armrest in the seat

backrest, close the storage compartment
cover.
i There is a small and a large storage X Fold the rear armrest down.
compartment located underneath the
armrest. The small storage compartment
can be removed for the purpose of
emptying.
X Opening storage compartments: Press
button : or ;.
The armrest opens to the left and the right
side automatically.
X Closing storage compartments: Swing
the left and/or right armrest backward
until it engages.
X Opening: Pull release catch : and swing
the storage compartment cover upward in
direction of arrow.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 207
Useful features 207
Storage bags Cup holder in front center console

G Warning! A cup holder : is located in the front center
Storage bags are intended for storing light- console.
weight items only.
Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges or
fragile objects may not be transported in the
storage bag. In an accident, during hard
Controls in detail
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Storage bags cannot protect transported
goods in the event of an accident.
Storage bags are located on the back of the

front seats.
Cup holder in rear armrest
ProCarManuals.com
X Opening: Open rear armrest storage

Useful features compartment (Y page 206).
Cup holders
G Warning!
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
only use containers that fit into the cup
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
X Press release button :.
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Cup holder ; swings out and opens
Limited Warranty. automatically.
X Close rear armrest storage compartment.
When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you X Closing: Open rear armrest storage
or others when contacted during braking, compartment (Y page 206).
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident. X Swing cup holder ; backward until it
Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup engages.
holder may come loose during braking, X Close rear armrest storage compartment.
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects ! Do not sit on or lean your body weight
thrown around in the vehicle interior may against the armrest when it is folded down,
cause an accident and/or serious personal as you could otherwise damage it.
injury.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 208
208 Useful features
! Close the cup holder before folding the

armrest upwards. Otherwise you could
damage the cup holder.
Sun visors
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.

Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others. X Adjust sun visor by pushing or pulling.
Vanity mirror
The vanity mirror lamp only functions when
the sun visor is engaged in mounting ;.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover A.
Vanity mirror lamp : comes on.
Rear window sunshade
: Vanity mirror lamp G Warning!

; Mounting When operating the rear window sunshade
make sure there is no danger of anyone being
= Holder, e.g. for gas cards
harmed by the extending or retracting
? Vanity mirror procedure.
A Vanity mirror cover The extending or retracting procedure can be
immediately halted by briefly pressing rear
Glare through the windshield window sunshade switch. To reverse direction
X Flip sun visor down when you experience of movement, press rear window sunshade
glare. switch again.

Glare through a door window
X Close vanity mirror cover A if opened.
X Disengage sun visor from mounting ;.
X Pivot sun visor to the side.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 209
Useful features 209
X Switch on the ignition. Rear center console ashtray

X Extending/Retracting: Press rear
window sunshade switch : briefly.
Ashtrays
Center console ashtray
Controls in detail
i A storage compartment is located under
the ashtray insert.
! The storage compartment is not heat-

proof. When smoking always make sure the X Opening: Pull at top of cover ;.
ashtray insert is present and properly X Removing ashtray insert: Push button
inserted. = to disengage ashtray insert : and
remove it.
ProCarManuals.com
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray

insert : down into the retainer until it
engages.
X Closing: Push at top of cover ;.
Cigarette lighter
G Warning!
X Opening: Press cover ; forward until it
Never touch the heating element or sides of
engages.
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
knob only.
insert : on the grooved side and pull it up
Make sure any children traveling with you do
and out in the direction indicated by not injure themselves or start a fire with the
arrows. hot cigarette lighter.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Push ashtray
insert : back into the frame until it If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is
engages. being used extensively, the vehicle battery
X Closing: Tap the front of cover ;. may become discharged.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 210
210 Useful features
Power outlet in rear passenger

compartment

X Open cover : (Y page 209).
X Push in cigarette lighter ;. X Pull at top of cover :.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out
automatically when hot.
X Take out cigarette lighter ;. Compass
X Reinsert cigarette lighter ; in its socket
after use.
Power outlets
The power outlets can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
(e.g. auxiliary lamps, mobile phone chargers)
up to a maximum of 15 A (180 W).
If the engine is off and the power outlets are
being used extensively, the vehicle battery
may become discharged. i In order to receive an accurate reading in
the interior rear view mirror :, the
compass must be calibrated and the
magnetic field zone set.
Power outlet in glove box
X Calling up the compass: Press button
X Open glove box (Y page 205).
= briefly.
The compass displays the direction into
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N,
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW.
X Compass adjustment: Determine your
location on the basis of the following zone
maps.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 211
Useful features 211
In order to calibrate the compass properly,

mind the following:
RCalibrate the compass in open terrain.
Nearby buildings, bridges, power lines and
large antenna masts, for example, could
impair compass calibration.
RSwitch off electrical consumers (e.g.
Controls in detail
climate control, windshield wipers, or rear
window defroster).
RClose all doors and the trunk.
X Start the engine.
X Press button = approximately 6 seconds
until symbol C appears in compass
display ;.
Zone map North America X Drive a full circle at a vehicle speed of
between 3 mph (5 km/h) and 6 mph
ProCarManuals.com
(10 km/h).
When calibration was successful, the
current direction appears in compass
display ;.
Tele Aid
! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
subscriber agreement must be completed.
To ensure your system is activated and
operational, please press Information
button ï to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
Zone map South America
If you have any questions regarding
X Press button = approximately 3 seconds. activation, please call the Customer
The currently selected zone appears in Assistance Center at
compass display ;. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
X Selecting zone: Press button = until the (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
desired zone is selected. only).
Do not press the button again until the Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
direction is indicated. acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
X Compass calibration: Make sure you are and password in the mail. You may use this
in an area where you can drive a full circle password to access the Tele Aid section in
with your vehicle without disturbing traffic “Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
in order to calibrate the compass. only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 212
212 Useful features
access to account information, remote door G Warning!

unlock and more. A malfunction in the system has been
The Tele Aid system is available if detected if any or all of the following
Rit has been activated and is operational. conditions occur:
Activation requires a subscription for RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does
monitoring services, connection and not come on during the system self-test.
cellular air time RThe indicator lamp in the Roadside
Rvehicle battery power is available Assistance button F does not come on

Rthe
during the system self-test.
relevant cellular phone network and
GPS signals are available and pass the RThe indicator lamp in the Information
information on to the Customer Assistance button ï does not come on during the
Center system self-test.
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button,
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
Roadside Assistance button F, or
possible if the vehicle is able to receive
signals from the GPS satellite network and Information button ï remains
pass the information on to the Customer illuminated constantly in red after the
Assistance Center. system self-test.
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or
The Tele Aid system Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
multifunction display after the system self-
(Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)
test
The Tele Aid system consists of three types
of response: If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
the system may not operate as expected. In
RAutomatic and manual emergency case of an emergency, help will have to be
RRoadside Assistance summoned by other means.
RInformation Have the system checked at the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele Customer Assistance Center at
Aid call do the following: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
X Press button W or X on the (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
multifunction steering wheel. as soon as possible.
or
X Use the rotary control on the audio system Emergency calls
(Y page 144). ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at subscriber agreement must be completed.
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more To ensure your system is activated and
information and a description of all available operational, please press Information
features. button ï to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
System self-test steps may result in a system that is not
The system performs a self-test after you activated.
have switched on the ignition. If you have any questions regarding
activation, please call the Customer
Assistance Center at
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 213
Useful features 213
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) The message Call Failed appears in the

(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada multifunction display for approximately
only). 10 seconds.
An emergency call is initiated automatically Should this occur, assistance must be
following an accident in which the Emergency summoned by other means.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
deployed. i The “911” emergency call system is a
public service. Using it without due cause
Controls in detail
i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
emergency call cannot be canceled. is a criminal offense.
An emergency call can also be initiated Initiating an emergency call manually
manually (Y page 213).
Once the emergency call is in progress, the
indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
flash. The message Connecting Call
appears in the multifunction display and the
COMAND system is muted. When the
ProCarManuals.com
connection is established, the message

Call Connected appears in the
All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
(determined by the GPS satellite location X Briefly press on cover : to open.
system), vehicle model, identification number X Press SOS button ; briefly.
and color are generated.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
A voice connection between the Customer flash until the emergency call is concluded.
Assistance Center and the occupants of the
X Wait for a voice connection to the
vehicle will be established automatically soon
Customer Assistance Center.
after the emergency call has been initiated.
X Close cover : after the emergency call is
The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
to determine the nature of the emergency concluded.
more precisely, provided they can speak to
G Warning!
an occupant of the vehicle.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
immediately. do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
G Warning!
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is
The Customer Assistance Center will
flashing continuously and there was no voice
automatically contact local emergency
connection to the Customer Assistance
officials with the vehicle’s approximate
Center established, then the Tele Aid system
location if they receive an automatic SOS
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the
signal and cannot make voice contact with the
relevant cellular phone network is not
vehicle occupants.
available).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 214
214 Useful features
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on A voice connection between the Roadside

the multifunction steering wheel. Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
or the vehicle will be established.
X Press the respective button for ending a X Describe the nature of the need for
telephone call on the audio system or the assistance.
COMAND system. The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified
Roadside Assistance button Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow
your vehicle to the nearest authorized

Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as
labor and/or towing, charges may apply.
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for
more information.
Sign and Drive services (USA only):
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no
charge.
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance Assistance button : is flashing
button : for longer than 2 seconds. continuously and there was no voice
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside connection to the Customer Assistance
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The Center established, then the Tele Aid
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance system could not initiate a Roadside
button : will flash while the call is in Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
progress. The message Connecting phone network is not available). The
Call will appear in the multifunction message Call Failed appears in the
display and the audio system or the multifunction display.
COMAND system is muted. X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
When the connection is established, the the multifunction steering wheel.
message Call Connected appears in the or
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will X Press the respective button for ending a
transmit data generating the vehicle
telephone call on the audio system or the
identification number, model, color and
COMAND system.
location (subject to availability of cellular and
GPS signals).
i The audio system or COMAND system
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
progress. While the call is connected you
can change to the navigation menu by
pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
system. Spoken commands are not
available.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 215
Useful features 215
Information button cellular phone network is not available).

The message Call Failed appears in the
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
the multifunction steering wheel.
or
X Press the respective button for ending a
Controls in detail
telephone call on the audio system or the
COMAND system.
Call priority
X Press and hold Information button : for If other service calls such as a Roadside
longer than 2 seconds. Assistance call or Information call are active,
A call to the Customer Assistance Center an emergency call is still possible. In this
will be initiated. The indicator lamp in case, the emergency call will take priority and
Information button : will flash while the override all other active calls.
ProCarManuals.com
call is in progress. The message The indicator lamp in the respective button
Connecting Call will appear in the flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic
multifunction display and the COMAND initiated emergency calls can only be
system is muted. terminated by a Customer Assistance Center
representative. All other calls can be
i The audio system or COMAND system
terminated by pressing button ~ on the
display indicates that a Tele Aid call is in
multifunction steering wheel or the
progress. While the call is connected you
respective button for ending a telephone call
can change to the navigation menu by
on the audio system or the COMAND system.
pressing the NAVI button on the COMAND
system. Spoken commands are not i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
available. the audio system or the COMAND system
A voice connection between the Customer is muted. The mobile phone is no longer
Assistance Center representative and the connected to the COMAND system. If you
occupants of the vehicle will be established. must use this phone, we recommend that
Information regarding the operation of your you use it only with the vehicle at a
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes- standstill in a safe location.
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products
and services is available to you. Search & Send
For more details concerning the Tele Aid “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA address entry service. For more information
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the on “Search & Send”, refer to separate
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more. COMAND system operating instructions.
i If the indicator lamp in Information
button : is flashing continuously and Remote door unlock
there was no voice connection to the In case you have locked your vehicle
Customer Assistance Center established, unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle),
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
an Information call (e.g. the relevant
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 216
216 Useful features
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center control will appear on the multifunction
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes display.
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or
i The remote door lock feature is available
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only).
if the relevant cellular phone network is
You will be asked to provide your password.
available and data connection is possible.
X Then return to your vehicle at the time
arranged with the Customer Assistance Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services
Center and pull the trunk lid handle for a
minimum of 20 seconds until the indicator In the event your vehicle was stolen:
lamp in the SOS button is flashing. X Report the incident to the police.
The message Connecting Call appears in The police will issue a numbered incident
the multifunction display. report.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle X Pass this number on to the Customer
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of Assistance Center along with your
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password password.
(USA only). The Customer Assistance Center will then
i The remote door unlock feature is attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
available if the relevant cellular phone Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
network is available. located, the Customer Assistance Center
The SOS button will flash and the message will contact the local law enforcement and
Connecting Call will appear in the you. The vehicle’s location will only be
multifunction display to indicate receipt of provided to law enforcement.
the door unlock command. i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
If the trunk lid handle was pulled for more than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
than 20 seconds before door unlock notify the Customer Assistance Center
authorization was received, you must wait automatically.
15 minutes before pulling the trunk lid
handle again.
Garage door opener
Remote door lock
The integrated remote control can operate up
If you have forgotten to lock your vehicle and to three separately controlled devices
are no longer near it, you can have it locked compatible with HomeLink® or some other
remotely through the Customer Assistance systems.
Center.
G Warning!
The vehicle can be remotely locked within
Before programming the integrated remote
four days after the ignition has been switched
control to a garage door opener or gate
off.
operator, make sure people and objects are
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center
out of the way of the device to prevent
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes potential harm or damage. When
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or programming a garage door opener, the door
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). moves up or down. When programming a gate
You will be asked to provide your password. operator, the gate opens or closes.
When you are inside your vehicle the next Do not use the integrated remote control with
time and switch on the ignition, the message any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
Tele Aid Doors locked by remote
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 217
Useful features 217
and reverse features as required by U.S. Do not hold the buttons for longer than
federal safety standards (this includes any 30 seconds.
garage door opener model manufactured This procedure erases any previous
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that settings for all three channels and
cannot detect an object - signaling the door initializes the memory. If you later wish to
to stop and reverse - does not meet current program a second and/or third hand-held
U.S. federal safety standards. transmitter to the remaining two signal
When programming a garage door opener, transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
Controls in detail
park vehicle outside the garage. and begin directly with step 3.
X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
Do not run the engine while programming the
integrated remote control. Inhalation of control A of the device you wish to train
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), from the signal transmitter button (;, =
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
and possible death. indicator lamp : in view.
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously
press hand-held remote control button B
ProCarManuals.com
and the desired signal transmitter button

(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote start flashing after 20 seconds.
control
X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the
vehicle equipment. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
button and the signal transmitter button.
Programming the integrated remote
X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
control
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. observe indicator lamp :.
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
a signal transmitter button and wish to programming is complete and your device
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. should activate when the respective signal
or transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
X If you are programming the integrated and released.
remote control for the first time, press and
i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
hold the two outer signal transmitter
buttons ; and ? and release them when approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
a constant light, continue with
indicator lamp : begins to flash after
programming steps 8 through 12 as your
approximately 20 seconds.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 218
218 Useful features
garage door opener may be equipped with X Step 12: Confirm the garage door
the “rolling code” feature. operation by pressing the programmed
X Step 7: To program the remaining two signal transmitter button (;, = or ?).
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps X Step 13: To program the remaining two
above starting with step 3. signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Rolling code programming
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling Gate operator/Canadian programming
code devices) with the rolling code feature, Canadian radio-frequency laws require
follow these instructions after completing the transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of after several seconds of transmission which
this text. For your convenience and to may not be long enough for the integrated
complete the procedure faster, you might signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
want to have someone assist you. programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the some U.S. gate operators are designed to
garage door opener motor head unit. “time-out” in the same manner.
If you live in Canada or if you are having
i Exact location and color of the button may difficulties programming a gate operator
vary by garage door opener brand. (regardless of where you live) by using the
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” programming procedures, replace step 4 with
button may also be referred to as “learn” or the following:
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
the transmitting button, refer to the garage transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
door opener Operator’s Manual.
release this button until it has been
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the successfully trained.
garage door opener motor head unit. X While still holding down the signal
The “training light” is activated. transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
You have 30 seconds to initiate the your hand-held remote control button B
following two steps. as follows: Press and hold button B for
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
programmed signal transmitter button (;, Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
= or ?). remote control until the frequency signal
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and has been learned.
release same signal transmitter button a Upon successful training, indicator
second time to complete the training lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
process. after several seconds.
X Proceed with programming step 5 and
i Some garage door openers (or other step 6 to complete.
rolling code equipped devices) may require
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and i Upon completion of programming the
release the same signal transmitter button integrated remote control, make sure you
a third time to complete the training retain the hand-held remote control that
process. came with the garage door opener, gate
operator or other device. You may need it
for use in other vehicles, for future
programming of an integrated remote
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 219
Useful features 219
control, or simply for continued use as a Programming tips

hand-held remote control to operate the
If you are having difficulty programming the
respective device in other situations.
integrated remote control, here are some
helpful tips:
Reprogramming a single signal
RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
transmitter button
control A (typically located on the reverse
To program a device using a signal side of the remote). The integrated remote
transmitter button previously trained, follow
Controls in detail
control is compatible with radio-frequency
these steps: devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
X Press and hold the desired signal control A. This will increase the likelihood
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not of the hand-held remote control sending a
release the button. stronger and more accurate signal to the
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after integrated remote control.
20 seconds. RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
X Without releasing the signal transmitter
remote control A at different lengths and
ProCarManuals.com
button, proceed with programming starting

angles from the signal transmitter button
with step 3.
(;, = or ?) you are programming.
Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
Operation of integrated remote control to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
X Switch on the ignition. angle at varying distances.
X Select and press the appropriate RIf another hand-held remote control is
integrated signal transmitter button (;, available for the same device, try the
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled programming steps again using that other
device. hand-held remote control. Make sure new
The integrated remote control transmitter batteries are in the hand-held remote
continues to send the signal as long as the control before beginning the procedure.
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. RStraighten the antenna wire from the
garage door opener assembly. This may
Erasing the integrated remote control help improve transmitting and/or receiving
memory signals.
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of i Certain types of garage door openers are
all three channels. incompatible with the integrated remote
control. If you should experience further
X Switch on the ignition. difficulties with programming the
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal integrated remote control, contact an
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for Center (USA only) at
longer than 30 seconds. 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
The codes of all three channels are erased. or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 220
220 Useful features
i USA only: X Move the driver’s seat as far to the rear as

This device complies with Part 15 of the possible.
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and

operation.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
i Canada only: pins ;.
This device complies with RSS-210 of X Installing: Press floormat eyelets : onto
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to retainer pins ;.
and
operation of the device.
Floormats
G Warning!
Whenever you are using a floormat, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
floormat is securely fastened.
The floormat should always be securely
fastened using the fastening equipment.
Before driving off, check that the floormat is
securely in place and adjust it if necessary. A
loose floormat could slip and hinder proper
functioning of the pedals.
Do not place several floormats on top of each
other as this may impair pedal movement.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 221
221
Vehicle equipment ............................ 222

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 222
At the gas station ............................. 222
Engine compartment ........................ 224
Tires and wheels ............................... 229
Winter driving ................................... 252
Driving instructions .......................... 254
Maintenance ...................................... 258
Vehicle care ....................................... 260
Operation
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 222
222 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment ! Additional instructions for AMG vehicles:

RDuring the first 1 000 miles (1 500 km),
i This Operator’s Manual describes all do not exceed a speed of 85 mph
features, standard or optional, potentially (140 km/h).
available for your vehicle at the time of RDuring this period, avoid engine speeds
purchase. Please be aware that your
above 4 500 rpm in each gear.
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. RShift gears in a timely manner.
All of the above instructions, as may apply to
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the
The first 1000 miles (1500 km)
Operation
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine

or the rear differential has been replaced.
The more cautiously you treat your vehicle
during the break-in period, the more satisfied i Always obey applicable speed limits.
you will be with its performance later on.
RDrive your vehicle during the first
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but At the gas station
ProCarManuals.com
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. Refueling

RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
throttle driving) and excessive engine G Warning!
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous.
in each gear). It burns violently and can cause serious
personal injury.
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
- Select C as the preferred shift program materials near gasoline!
(Y page 111) for the first 1 000 miles Turn off the engine before refueling.
(1 500 km).
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
- Do not attempt to slow the vehicle down inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
by shifting to a lower gear using the gear contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
selector lever. Direct skin contact with fuels and the
- Select gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
(Y page 111) only when driving at health.
moderate speeds (for hill driving).
G Warning!
- Avoid accelerating by kickdown.
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
RVehicles with manual transmission: pressure in the system which could cause a
Shift gears in a timely manner. gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
spray back out when removing the fuel pump
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds
to the permissible maximum. G Warning!
C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic
transmission:
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 223
At the gas station 223
Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label i Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
the fuel filler flap): (average of 96 RON/86 MON). Information
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly on gasoline quality can normally be found
flammable, poisonous and burn easily. on the fuel pump. Please contact gas
Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if station personnel in case labels on the
ignited or if you come into contact with it or pump cannot be found.
inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol C 300 and C 300 Sport with automatic
fumes and skin contact with ethanol. transmission:
Extinguish all open flames before refueling. Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a
label reading Premium gasoline or E85
Operation
Never smoke or create sparks close to
ethanol. only! on the fuel filler flap.
For more information on gasoline or E85,
! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine see “Premium unleaded gasoline”
with diesel fuel. Even small amounts of (Y page 354), see “Flexible Fuel Vehicles”
diesel fuel will damage the fuel system and (Y page 355), see “Fuel requirements”
engine. Damage resulting from the use of (Y page 354), or contact an authorized
ProCarManuals.com
non-approved fuels or fuel additives or Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit

resulting from mixing gasoline with diesel www.mbusa.com (USA only).
fuel is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
Limited Warranty. SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank
with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not i In case the central locking system does
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into flap” (Y page 310).
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
drained completely. Contact an authorized side of the vehicle towards the rear.
Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel
system drained completely.
! To prevent damage to the catalytic

converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle.
Flexible Fuel Vehicles (identified by a label
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only!
on the fuel filler flap) may be fueled with
E85. For additional information, see
“Flexible Fuel Vehicles”.
Any noticeable irregularities in engine
X Turn off the engine.
operation should be repaired promptly.
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may i Leaving the engine running and the fuel
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to filler cap open can cause the yellow engine
overheat and potentially start a fire. malfunction indicator lamp ; to
illuminate.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 224
224 Engine compartment
For more information, see also “Practical RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
hints” (Y page 305). system (Y page 228)
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter RBrake fluid (Y page 228)
switch.
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This
puts the starter switch in position 0, same Engine compartment
as with the SmartKey removed from the Hood
starter switch. The driver’s door then can
be closed again. G Warning!
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
Operation
point indicated by the arrow. is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be

X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise. forced open by passing air flow.
X Take off fuel filler cap ;. This could cause the hood to come loose and
injure you and/or others.
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel
filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could Opening
ProCarManuals.com
damage the vehicle paint finish.

G Warning!
X Place fuel filler cap ; in direction of arrow Do not open the hood when the engine is
into holder =. overheated. You could be seriously injured.
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel. Observe the coolant temperature gauge to
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit determine whether the engine may be
cuts out – do not top off or overfill. overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
until it audibly engages. has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
department.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will G Warning!
prevent closing the fuel filler flap.
You could be injured when the hood is open –
X Close fuel filler flap :. even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
Check regularly and before a long trip before touching any components on the
For information on quantities and vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels, precautions.
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 349).
G Warning!
Check the following:
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
REngine oil level (Y page 225) moving parts when the hood is open and the
RTire inflation pressure (Y page 232) engine is running.
The radiator fan may continue to run for
RCoolant level (Y page 227)
approximately 30 seconds or may even
RVehicle lighting (Y page 313) restart after the engine has been turned off.
Stay clear of fan blades.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 225
Engine compartment 225
G Warning! Closing
The engine is equipped with a transistorized G Warning!
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
When closing the hood, use extreme caution
it is dangerous to touch any components
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
you do not close the hood on anyone.
socket) of the ignition system
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
Rwith the engine running before driving off. Do not continue driving if
Rwhile starting the engine the hood can no longer engage after an
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the accident, for example. The hood could
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in
Operation
engine is turned manually
motion and injure you and/or others.
X Let the hood drop from a height of

approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
ProCarManuals.com
If you can raise the hood at a point above

the headlamps, then it is not properly
closed. Open it again and let it drop with
somewhat greater force.
X Pull hood lock release lever :. Engine oil

The hood is unlocked. The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are driving style. Increased oil consumption can
folded forward away from the windshield. occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
Otherwise the windshield wipers or the is driven frequently at higher engine speeds.
hood could be damaged.
Engine oil consumption checks should only
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
! Do not use any special lubricant additives,
as these may damage the drive assemblies.
Using special additives not approved by
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not
Warranty.
For further information contact an
Notes on checking engine oil level

X Push handle ; under the hood upwards.
X Pull up on the hood and then release it. When checking the oil level
The hood will be held open at shoulder Rthe vehicle must be parked on level ground
height by gas-filled struts automatically. Rwith the engine at operating temperature,
the vehicle must have been stationary for
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 226
at least 5 minutes with the engine turned For information on messages in the
off multifunction display concerning engine oil,
Rwith the engine not at operating see the “Practical hints” section
temperature, the vehicle must have been (Y page 291).
stationary for at least 30 minutes with the
engine turned off Adding engine oil
! Only use approved engine oils and oil
Checking engine oil level filters required for vehicles with
X Open the hood (Y page 224). Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
Operation
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or

visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or
emission control system damage not
Warranty:
ProCarManuals.com
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of

specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System.
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change
X Pull out oil dipstick :. intervals longer than those called for by
the Maintenance System.
X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
RUsing any oil additives.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the
dipstick guide tube.
X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
approximately 3 seconds to obtain
accurate reading.
The oil level is correct when it is between
lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
mark ; of oil dipstick :.
i All models (except C 63 AMG):
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l). All models (except C 63 AMG)
C 63 AMG:
The filling quantity between the upper and
lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 1.6 US qt. (1.5 l).
X If necessary, add engine oil.
For more information on engine oil, see
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.”
(Y page 349).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 227
Engine compartment 227
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature gauge indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
expansion tank if the coolant temperature
is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
Operation
C 63 AMG cool down before removing the cap. The
X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
and is under pressure.
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
to overfill with oil. RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap
Be careful not to spill any oil when adding. approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
Avoid environmental damage caused by oil to relieve excess pressure. If opened
ProCarManuals.com
entering the ground or water. immediately, scalding hot fluid and steam
will be blown out under pressure.
! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts.
off. It could cause damage to the engine
and emission control system not covered Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which
by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. may burn if it comes into contact with hot
engine parts.
X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.
For more information on engine oil, see the
“Technical data” section (Y page 349) and
(Y page 353).
Transmission fluid level

The transmission fluid level does not need to
be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission. X Using a rag, slowly open cap :
approximately 1/2 turn counterclockwise
to relieve excess pressure.
Coolant level X Continue turning cap : counterclockwise
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and and remove it.
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 228
The coolant level is correct if the level

Rforcold coolant: reaches marking bar
= in coolant expansion tank ;
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in
(1.5 cm) higher
X Add coolant as required.
X Screw cap : back on and tighten it.
For more information on coolant, see the

“Technical data” section (Y page 351) and
Operation
(Y page 356).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
of cap : upwards.
Washer system and headlamp X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
cleaning system X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
G Warning!
For more information, see “Washer system
ProCarManuals.com
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly

and headlamp cleaning system”
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
(Y page 352).
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
Brake fluid level
! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
where temperatures may fall below fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
freezing point. Failure to do so could result mark or below, have the brake system
in damage to the washer system/fluid checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
reservoir. immediately. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for not add brake fluid as this will not solve the
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can problem. For more information, see
damage the plastic lenses of the “Practical hints”.
headlamps.
When checking the brake fluid level, the
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in vehicle must be parked on level ground.
the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
Fluid for the washer system and the headlamp
cleaning system is supplied from the washer
fluid reservoir.
During all seasons, use MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
with water or premixed washer solvent/
antifreeze depending on the ambient
temperature (Y page 358).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 229
Tires and wheels 229
The brake fluid level is correct when it is should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. an area which is a safe distance from the road.
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
Tires and wheels appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Safety notes nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
tire dealer for repairs.
for information on tested and recommended G Warning!
rims and tires for summer and winter
Operation
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
operation. They can also offer advice the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
concerning tire service and purchase. could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
G Warning!
with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
Replace rims or tires with the same up and possibly a fire.
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
ProCarManuals.com
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
Important guidelines
mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension ROnly use sets of tires and rims of the same
components can be damaged. Also, the type and make.
operating clearance of the wheels and the RTires must be of the correct size for the rim.
tires may no longer be correct.
RBreak in new tires for approximately
G Warning! 60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds.
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire RRegularly check the tires and rims for
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire
the tires have sustained damage, replace inflation pressure loss and damage to the
them. tire beads.
When replacing rims, only use genuine RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire
Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the inflation pressure and correct as required.
particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
RDo not allow your tires to wear down too
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
accident. far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
previous damage cannot always be RWhen replacing individual tires, you should
recognized on retreads. The operating safety mount new tires on the front wheels first
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such (on vehicles with same-sized wheels all
tires are used. around).
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 230
230 Tires and wheels
Recommended tire inflation pressure pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be

underinflated.
G Warning! Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires Information placard on the driver’s door
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely B-pillar.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
more likely to fail from being overheated. the best handling, tread life and riding
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can comfort.
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, In addition to the Tire and Loading
Operation
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Information placard on the driver’s door
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
because they are more likely to become pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
punctured or damaged by road debris, for any additional information pertaining to
potholes etc. special driving situations. For more
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the information, see “Important notes on tire
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire inflation pressure” (Y page 231).
ProCarManuals.com
and Loading Information placard on the

i Data shown on Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Information placard example are for
can overheat them, possibly causing a
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
in handling or steering problems, or brake
data shown in the following illustration.
failure.
Refer to Tire and Loading Information
Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and placard on vehicle for actual data specific
Loading Information placard located on the to your vehicle.
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238).
The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
considered cold if the vehicle has been
parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient
temperature, the driving speed and the tire
load, the tire temperature changes. When the
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
tire inflation pressure will change by
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in The Tire and Loading Information placard lists
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on the recommended cold tire inflation
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle
if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
current operating conditions. If you check the apply to the tires installed as original
tire inflation pressure when the tires are equipment.
warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 231
Important notes on tire inflation Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
pressure pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
G Warning! tires.
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
check the tires for punctures from foreign
i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the label examples are for illustration purposes
valves or from around the rim. only. Tire inflation pressure data are
specific to each vehicle and may vary from
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure data shown in the following illustrations.
are also increased while driving, depending Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
Operation
on the driving speed and the tire load. vehicle for actual data specific to your
If you will be driving your vehicle at high vehicle.
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher,
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
ProCarManuals.com
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can

build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all
tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the approved, factory equipped tires
value for speeds above 100 mph
(160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the pressure that follows applies to that
fuel filler flap. particular tire size only.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
wheels with collapsible tire refer to Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for
Rthe
particular tire sizes
yellow label on the spare wheel rim
Rthe
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only
“Technical data” section of this
show the rim diameter instead of the entire
Operator’s Manual (Y page 349)
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18".
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as
the driver’s door B-pillar specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 246).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 232
Rbe more prone to damage from road

hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Checking tire inflation pressure

Safety notes
G Warning!
Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures

specific to rim diameter Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
Potential problems associated with wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
underinflated and overinflated tires affect handling and fuel economy, and are
more likely to fail from being overheated.
Underinflated tires Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
ProCarManuals.com
G Warning! adversely affect handling and ride comfort,

Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely because they are more likely to become
affect handling and fuel economy, and are punctured or damaged by road debris,
more likely to fail from being overheated. potholes etc.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Underinflated tires can specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear and Loading Information placard on the
Radversely
affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
Radversely affect handling characteristics in handling or steering problems, or brake
failure.
Overinflated tires
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
G Warning! a month.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can when the tires are cold (Y page 230).
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Checking tire inflation pressure
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) manually
because they are more likely to become
punctured or damaged by road debris, Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire
potholes etc. inflation pressure:
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire.
Overinflated tires can X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
Radversely affect handling characteristics X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
Rcause uneven tire wear gauge and check against the
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 233
Tire and Loading Information placard on the indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238). If Information placard or, if available, on the tire
necessary, add air to achieve the inflation pressure label.
recommended tire inflation pressure. Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
inflation pressure by pushing the metal tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen. efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
with the tire gauge. Each tire, including the spare, should be
X Install the valve cap. checked at least once a month when cold.
Operation
X Repeat this procedure for each tire. Inflate the tires to the recommended tire
inflation pressure as specified on
Tire pressure loss warning system Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
(Canada only) the driver’s door B-pillar
While the vehicle is being driven, the tire or
pressure loss warning system monitors the Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on
ProCarManuals.com
set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each the inside of the fuel filler flap
wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
system to detect a significant loss of pressure i The recommended tire inflation pressures
in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
for your vehicle can be found on
due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
see a corresponding warning message in the Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard
multifunction display. located on the driver’s door B-pillar

The tire pressure loss warning system may (Y page 238)
function in a restricted manner or with a delay Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the
Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the inside of the fuel filler flap
vehicle The tire inflation pressures are not listed in
Rin the presence of ice and snow the Operator’s Manual.
Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface G Warning!
(e.g. sand or gravel) The tire pressure loss warning system does
Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire
manner (involving rapid acceleration or inflation pressures. Always adjust tire
high speeds in curves) inflation pressure according to the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
Rwhen you are driving with a loaded roof door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure
rack or heavily laden vehicle label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
G Warning! The tire pressure loss warning system does
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation
When the multifunction display shows the
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in
message Check Tire Pressure Soon, one
more than one tire cannot be detected by the
or more of your tires are significantly
tire pressure loss warning system.
underinflated. You should stop and check
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate The tire pressure loss warning system is not
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as able to issue a warning due to a sudden
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 234
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In X Press button a.

this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully The following message will appear in the
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt multifunction display:
steering maneuvers. Tire Pressure
Now OK?
Restarting the tire pressure loss warning Cancel
system Yes
The tire pressure loss warning system must X If you wish to confirm: Press button
be restarted in the following situations: 9 or : to select Yes.
Rafter you have changed the tire inflation X Press button a.
Operation
pressure The following message will appear in the

Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires multifunction display:
Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
Run Flat
Indicator
X Using the Tire and Loading Information Restarted
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if After a certain “learning phase”, the tire
available, the tire inflation pressure label on pressure loss warning system checks the
ProCarManuals.com
the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure set pressure values for all four tires.
the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is X If you wish to cancel: Press button 9
correct.
or : to select Cancel.
G Warning! X Press button a to confirm.
The tire pressure loss warning system can The previous settings remain unchanged.
only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
set the correct tire inflation pressures for Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring
each tire. System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only)
If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced
the system will monitor the pressure
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced
according to the incorrect value.
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
X Switch on the ignition. in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in
case of pressure loss in one or more of the
X Press button = or ; on the
tires.
multifunction steering wheel to select the
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low
Service menu (Y page 129).
tire pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale in
X Press button 9 or : on the
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the
multifunction steering wheel to select telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire
Tire Pressure. pressure condition or a malfunction in the
X Press button a on the multifunction TPMS system itself:
steering wheel to confirm. RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one
The following message appears in the or more of your tires is significantly
multifunction display: underinflated. There is no malfunction in
Run Flat Indicator the TPMS.
Active
RIf the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
Press 'OK' to Restart
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system
itself is not operating properly.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 235
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are maintenance, and it is the driver’s
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. responsibility to maintain correct tire
pressure, even if underinflation has not
G Warning!
reached the level to trigger illumination of the
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for
TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Tire and Loading Information placard or the TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
supplemental tire inflation pressure the system is not operating properly. The
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
the low tire pressure telltale. When the
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due
Operation
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire
flash for approximately 1 minute and then
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this
remain continuously illuminated. This
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully
sequence will continue upon subsequent
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
steering maneuvers.
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
illuminated, the system may not be able to
G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked at least once a month TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
when cold and inflated to the inflation reasons, including the installation of
pressure recommended by the vehicle incompatible replacement or alternate tires
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
Information placard on the driver’s door B- TPMS from functioning properly. Always
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
tires of a different size than the size indicated vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
on the Tire and Loading Information placard alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should continue to function properly.
determine the proper tire inflation pressure
for those tires. i If a condition causing the TPMS to
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has malfunction develops, it may take up to
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring 10 minutes for the system to signal a
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire malfunction using the TPMS telltale
pressure telltale when one or more of your flashing and illumination sequence.
tires are significantly underinflated. The telltale extinguishes after a few
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure minutes driving if the malfunction has been
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check corrected.
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate Tire pressure inquiries are made using the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a multifunction display. The current tire
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire inflation pressure for each tire appears in the
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. multifunction display after a few minutes of
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency driving.
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
i Possible differences between the
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the
vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 236
pressure displayed by the control system i Operating radio transmission equipment

apply to sea level. In high-altitude (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
locations, the reading on a tire pressure or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
gauge will be higher than the reading issued to malfunction.
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not
reduce the tire inflation pressure under i This device complies with Part 15 of the
such circumstances. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
following two conditions:
1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
Operation
Service menu (Y page 129). 2. this device must accept any

X Press button 9 or : to select Tire
interference that may cause undesired.
Pressure.
X Press button a. Any unauthorized modification to this
The current inflation pressure for each tire device could void the user’s authority to
appears in the multifunction display. operate the equipment.
ProCarManuals.com
Tire inflation pressure warnings

If the system detects a significant loss of tire
inflation pressure in one or more than one
tire, a message appears in the multifunction
display. In addition, an acoustic warning
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the
instrument cluster comes on.
When the vehicle has been parked for longer
than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressures will be displayed after
driving a few minutes appears in the
The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors
automatically after the learn-in phase. As long Example illustration
as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be The respective tire is indicated by a red
allocated to the individual wheels, the rectangle.
message Tire Pressure Monitor Active
appears. Despite this message, the tire Restarting Advanced TPMS
inflation pressure values are monitored G Warning!
already. It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire
i With a spare wheel mounted, the system inflation pressure to the recommended cold
may still indicate the tire inflation pressure tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires
of the removed road wheel for some affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle.
minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that You might lose control over the vehicle.
the indicated value where the spare wheel When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
is mounted does not reflect the actual new reference values for each tire.
spare tire inflation pressure.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 237
The TPMS must be restarted when you have Reference Values

adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new Press 'OK' to Confirm
level (e.g. because of different load or driving X Press button a.
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to The following message appears in the
the current tire inflation pressures. multifunction display:
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire Tire Press. Monitor
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure Restarted
recommended for the vehicle operating After driving a few minutes the system
condition. Tire inflation pressure should only verifies that the current tire inflation
be adjusted on cold tires. Observe the pressures are within the system’s specified
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Operation
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
Tire and Loading Information placard on the pressures are accepted as reference values
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have and then monitored.
supplemental tire inflation pressure X If you wish to cancel: Press button %.
information for driving at high speeds or for
vehicle loads less than the maximum loaded or
vehicle condition. If such information is X Press button 9 to exit the menu screen.
ProCarManuals.com
provided, it can be found on the inside of the

fuel filler flap. i When the wheel positions have been
changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
may be displayed for the wrong position
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
(Y page 238) or the supplemental tire the inflation pressure will be shown for the
inflation pressure information on the inside correct position.
of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
X Switch on the ignition. Maximum tire inflation pressure
multifunction steering wheel to select the G Warning!
Service menu. Never exceed the maximum tire inflation
X Press button 9 or : on the
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation
pressures.
multifunction steering wheel to select
Tire Pressure. Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
X Press button a.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are
The current inflation pressure for each tire more likely to fail from being overheated.
appears in the multifunction display or the
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
following message appears in the
adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Tire pressures
and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
will be displayed
because they are more likely to become
after driving
punctured or damaged by road debris,
a few minutes
potholes etc.
X Press button :.
The following message appears in the
Use Current
Pressures As New
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 238
The GAWR is the total allowable weight

that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
Operation
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation : Driver’s door B-pillar
pressure : for the tire.
ProCarManuals.com
Always follow the recommended tire inflation Following is a discussion on how to work with
pressure (Y page 230) for proper tire the information contained on the Tire and
inflation. Loading Information placard with regards to
loading your vehicle.
Loading the vehicle Tire and Loading Information

Two labels on your vehicle show how much G Warning!
weight it may properly carry. Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
can be found on the driver’s door and Loading Information placard on the
B-pillar. This placard tells you important driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
information about the number of people can overheat them, possibly causing a
that can be in the vehicle and the total blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
weight that can be carried in the vehicle. in handling or steering problems, or brake
It also contains information on the proper failure.
size and recommended tire inflation
pressures for the original equipment tires Tire and Loading Information placard
on your vehicle.
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
(2) The certification label, also found on the
Information placard example are for
driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
from data shown in the following
(GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
Information placard on vehicle for actual
cargo. The certification label also tells
data specific to your vehicle.
you about the front and rear axle weight
capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 239
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear

seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 238).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
Operation
The Tire and Loading Information placard pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
showing load limit information : is located Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 238). X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
X Locate the statement “The combined combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight of occupants and cargo should should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
Information placard.
ProCarManuals.com
on the Tire and Loading Information

placard. X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
The combined weight of all occupants, the driver and passengers that will be riding
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if in your vehicle.
applicable) should never exceed the weight X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of
referenced in that statement. the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
Seating capacity X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
i Data shown on Tire and Loading capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
Information placard example are for equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
illustration purposes only. Seating capacity 150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
data are specific to each vehicle and may amount of available cargo and luggage load
vary from data shown in the following capacity is 650 lbs
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading (1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Information placard on vehicle for actual
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
data specific to your vehicle.
luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 242).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
The seating capacity gives you important with varying seating configurations and
information on the number of occupants that
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 240
number and size of occupants. The following

examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 239).
Operation
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 241
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1
rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
ProCarManuals.com
180 lbs 190 lbs

Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 242). (Y page 242) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 242
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle in handling or steering problems, or brake
Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or failure.
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 332).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total

allowable weight that can be carried by a
single axle (front or rear).
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
the maximum permissible weight limits on tires are specific to each vehicle and
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), may vary from data shown in above
ProCarManuals.com
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, illustration.

passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
The maximum tire load rating : is the
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
maximum weight the tires are designed to
commercial scale.
support.
Trailer tongue load For more information on tire load rating, see
(Y page 247).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important For information on calculating total and cargo
weight to measure because it affects the load load capacities, see (Y page 239).
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo Direction of rotation
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
load typically is 10% of the trailer weight and Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
everything loaded in it. such as better hydroplaning performance. To
benefit, however, you must make sure the
Your Mercedes-Benz has been designed
tires rotate in the direction specified.
primarily to carry passengers and their cargo.
Mercedes-Benz does not recommend trailer An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
towing with your vehicle. intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
Maximum tire load unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
G Warning! replaced. Always observe and follow
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the applicable temporary use restrictions and
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire speed limitations indicated on the spare
and Loading Information placard on the wheel.
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 243
Tire care and maintenance Tread depth
G Warning! G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
control of your vehicle. at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire recommend that you do not allow your tires
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if to wear down to that level. As tread depth
the tires have sustained damage, replace approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
them. properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
Operation
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once Depending upon the weather and/or road
a month. For more information on checking surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended widely.
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 230). Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Tire inspection
ProCarManuals.com
reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in

Every time you check the tire inflation (3 mm).
pressure, you should also inspect your tires Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
for the following: law. These indicators are located in six places
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 243) on the tread circumference and become
visible at a tread depth of approximately
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s 1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
rubber
considered worn and should be replaced.
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the The recommended minimum tire tread depth
tread or side of the tire for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
Replace the tire if you find any of the above recommended minimum tire tread depth for
conditions. winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm).
Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
tires will age and become worn over time even
if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
Life of tire
G Warning!
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
The service life of a tire is dependent upon Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
varying factors including but not limited to: band across the tread.
RDriving style
RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 244
Storing tires Treadwear Traction Temperature

! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place 200 AA A
with as little exposure to light as possible.
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
these grades.
Cleaning tires
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Operation
damage to the tire.

based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
Always replace a damaged tire. under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Uniform Tire Quality Grading (1 1/2) times as well on the government
Standards
course as a tire graded 100.
ProCarManuals.com
The relative performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. based on straight-ahead braking traction
Government requirement designed to give tests, and does not include acceleration,
drivers consistent and reliable information cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
regarding tire performance. Tire characteristics.
manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors: The traction grades, from highest to lowest,
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent
resistance =. Although not a Government of the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in measured under controlled conditions on
North America have these grades branded on specified government test surfaces of asphalt
the sidewall. and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor
traction performance.
on tires are specific to each vehicle and G Warning!
may vary from data shown in above If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will
illustration. be substantially reduced. Under such weather
conditions, drive, steer and brake with
Quality grades can be found, where
extreme caution.
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 245
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
temperature is close to the freezing point. Rotating tires
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 252) with a minimum tread depth of
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
Operation
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. Wheels could become
appropriate caution. loose if not tightened with a torque of
ProCarManuals.com
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 96 lb-ft (130 Nm).

cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Limited Warranty.
Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
Temperature with tires of the same dimension all around.
If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
G Warning! same dimension all around, tires can be
The temperature grade for this tire is rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
established for a tire that is properly inflated pattern that will maintain the intended
and not overloaded. Excessive speed, rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
underinflation, or excessive loading, either (Y page 242).
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
excessive heat build-up and possible tire equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
failure. dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not
possible.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
configuration, tires can be rotated according
the generation of heat and its ability to
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
cause the material of the tire to degenerate
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
and reduce tire life, and excessive
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
The grade C corresponds to a level of
(spinning) direction must be maintained.
performance which all passenger car tires
must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
represent higher levels of performance on the on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 246
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the on tires are specific to each vehicle and
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for may vary from data shown in above
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure. illustration.
For information on wheel change, see “Flat For more information, see “Rims and tires”
tire” (Y page 317). (Y page 344).
Tire size designation, load and speed

Tire labeling rating
Besides tire name (sales designation) and
Operation
manufacturer name, a number of markings

can be found on a tire.
Following are some explanations for the
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
ProCarManuals.com
: Tire width
; Aspect ratio in %
= Radial tire code
? Rim diameter
A Load index
B Speed symbol

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
illustration.
(Y page 244)
; DOT, Tire Identification Number General: Depending on the design standards
(Y page 249) used, the tire size molded into the sidewall
may have no letter or a letter preceding the
= Maximum tire load (Y page 242)
tire size designation.
? Maximum tire inflation pressure
No letter preceding the size designation (as
(Y page 237)
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based
A Manufacturer on European design standards.
B Tire ply material (Y page 250) Letter “P” preceding the size designation:
C Tire size designation, load and speed Passenger car tire based on U.S. design
rating (Y page 246) standards.
D Load identification (Y page 249) Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
E Tire name Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
standards.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 247
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: and Loading Information placard on the
Temporary spare tires which are high driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
pressure compact spares designed for can overheat them, possibly causing a
temporary emergency use only. blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width
failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width
in millimeters. Load index A is a numerical code associated
with the maximum load a tire can support.
Aspect ratio
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds
Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
Operation
relationship between tire section height and tire is designed to support. See also
section width and is expressed in percentage. “Maximum tire load” (Y page 242) where the
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing maximum load associated with the load index
section height by section width. is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
Tire code For additional information on the load index,
Tire code = indicates the tire construction see “Load identification” (Y page 249).
ProCarManuals.com
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter Speed symbol
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction. G Warning!
Even when permitted by law, never operate a
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
with a speed capability above 149 mph
speed rating of the tires.
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
additional information, see “Tire speed are rated can lead to sudden tire failure,
rating” (Y page 247). causing loss of vehicle control and possibly
resulting in an accident and/or serious
Rim diameter personal injury and possible death, for you
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead and for others.
seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local
rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent
Load index driving speeds appropriate to prevailing
conditions.
G Warning!
Speed symbol B indicates the approved
The tire load rating must always be at least
half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise, maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the
tire failure may be the result which may cause tire.
an accident and/or serious injury to you or Summer tires
others. Index Speed rating
Always replace rims and tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
on the original part. R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
G Warning! S up to 112 mph (180 km/h)
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 248
Index Speed rating Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
maximum permissible speed of the tire.
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h) Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S18 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S18 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
H M+S18 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
Operation
V M+S18 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)

ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
RAt
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special
the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
winter performance. Make sure the tires
with a speed capability above 149 mph
you use show M+S and the mountain/
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
snowflakeimarking on the tire
designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
ProCarManuals.com
To determine the maximum speed sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
capability of the tire, the service traction performance requirements of the
description for the tire must be referred to. Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
The service description is comprised of
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
load index A and speed symbol B.
for use in snow conditions.
If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
designation and no service description is
vehicle from exceeding a speed of:
given, the tire manufacturer must be
consulted for the maximum speed RAllmodels except C 63 AMG:
capability. 130 mph (210 km/h)
If a service description is given, the speed RC 63 AMG:
capability is limited by the speed symbol in 155 mph (250 km/h)
the service description. Example: RC 63 AMG with increased top speed:
245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
174 mph (280 km/h)
is the service description. The letter “Y”
designates the speed rating and the speed The factory equipped tires on your vehicle
capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph may have a tire speed rating above the
(300 km/h). maximum speed permitted by the electronic
RAny
speed limiter.
tire with a speed capability above
186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR” Make sure your tires have the required tire
in the size designation AND the service speed rating as specified for your vehicle in
description must be placed in parenthesis. the “Technical data” section (Y page 344),
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)” for example when purchasing new tires.
speed symbol in parenthesis designates If you are uncertain about the correct reading
the maximum speed capability of the tire of the information given on a tire’s sidewall,
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h). any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to assist you.
18 or M+Sifor winter tires

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 249
Load identification
Operation
The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data notify purchasers in recall situations or other
on tires are specific to each vehicle and safety matters concerning tires. It gives
may vary from data shown in above purchasers the means to easily identify such
illustration. tires.
ProCarManuals.com
In addition to the load index, special load The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification : may be molded into the tire identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
sidewall following the letter designating the type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
speed symbol B (Y page 246). A.
RNo specification given: absence of any text i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
(like in above example) indicates a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
standard load (SL) tire. may vary from data shown in above
RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load illustration.
(or reinforced) tire.
RLight
DOT (Department of Transportation)
Load: designates a light load tire.
RC, D, E: designates load range associated Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
with the maximum load a tire can carry at meets requirements of the U.S. Department
a specified pressure. of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark

DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN) Manufacturer’s identification mark ;
U.S. tire regulations require each new tire denotes the tire manufacturer.
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN New tires have a mark with two symbols.
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced. Retreaded tires have a mark with four
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 229).
Tire size
Code = indicates the tire size.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 250
Tire type code radio, and heater, to the extent that these
items are available as factory-installed
Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
equipment (whether installed or not).
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
Air pressure
the tire.
The amount of air inside the tire pressing
Date of manufacture outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square
The date of manufacture A identifies the inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week, Aspect ratio

starting with “01” to represent the first full
week of the calendar year. The second two Dimensional relationship between tire
figures represent the year. section height and section width expressed
For example, “3208” represents the 32nd in percentage.
week of 2008.
Bar
ProCarManuals.com
Metric unit for air pressure. There are

Tire ply material 14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar.
Bead
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.
Cold tire inflation pressure

Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no
more than 1 mile (1.6 km).
on tires are specific to each vehicle and Curb weight
may vary from data shown in above The weight of a motor vehicle with standard
illustration. equipment including the maximum capacity
This marking tells you about the type of cord of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped,
and number of plies in the sidewall : and air conditioning and additional optional
under the tread ;. equipment, but without passengers and
cargo.
Tire and loading terminology DOT (Department of Transportation)
Accessory weight A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire

meets requirements of the U.S. Department
The combined weight (in excess of those of Transportation.
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 251
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) Maximum permissible tire inflation

pressure
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle This number is the greatest amount of air
must never exceed the GAWR for the front pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
and rear axle indicated on the certification
label located on the driver’s door B-pillar. Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants the vehicle is
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle (150 lb).
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Operation
accessories, passengers and cargo and, if Occupant distribution
applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
never exceed the GVWR indicated on the The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at
certification label located on the driver’s door their designated seating positions.
B-pillar.
Production options weight
ProCarManuals.com
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating) The combined weight of those installed
This is the maximum permissible vehicle regular production options weighing over
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of 5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those
the vehicle including all options, passengers, standard items which they replace, not
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer previously considered in curb weight or
tongue load). It is indicated on the accessory weight, including heavy duty
certification label located on the driver’s door brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
B-pillar. battery, and special trim.
Kilopascal (kPa) PSI (Pounds per square inch)
Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to Recommended tire inflation pressure
1 bar. The recommended tire inflation pressure for
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire
Load index and Loading Information placard located on
Numerical code associated with the the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
maximum load a tire can support. handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to
special driving situations can be found on the
Maximum load rating
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds the fuel filler flap.
that can be carried by the tire.
Rim
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, assembly upon which the tire beads are
total load limit, and production options seated.
weight.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 252
252 Winter driving
Sidewall Treadwear indicators

The portion of a tire between the tread and Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
the bead. that show across the tread of a tire when only
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains.
16
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in A tire information system that provides
recall situations or other safety matters consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
concerning tires and gives purchasers the temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
Operation
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.

comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification government testing procedures. The ratings
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
of manufacture”.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire
Tire ply composition and material used
Load on an individual tire that is determined
This indicates the number of plies or the by distributing to each axle its share of the
ProCarManuals.com
number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing
the tire tread and sidewall. Tire it by two.
manufacturers also must indicate the ply
materials in the tire and sidewall, which
include steel, nylon, polyester, and others. Winter driving
Tire speed rating General information

Part of tire designation (speed symbol); Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized
indicates the speed range for which a tire is Mercedes-Benz Center.
approved.
Total load limit Winter tires
Rated cargo and luggage load plus G Warning!

68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
designated seating capacity. 6
longer suitable for winter operation.
Traction
G Warning!
The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Tread well impair turning stability and that overall
The portion of a tire that comes into contact driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
with the road. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 253
Winter driving 253
Always use winter tires at temperatures Observe the following guidelines when using
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road snow chains:
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires RUse of snow chains is not permissible with
provide special winter performance. Make all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 344).
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
These tires meet specific snow traction wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s
performance requirements of the Rubber mounting instructions.
Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the ! If snow chains are mounted to the front
Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and wheels, they may scrape against the body
have been designed specifically for use in
Operation
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the could be damaged as a result.
only way to achieve the maximum
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by
effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes-
winter operation. Benz Center will be glad to advise you on
this subject.
For safe handling, make sure all mounted
ProCarManuals.com
winter tires are of the same make and have RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
the same tread design. depending on location. Always check local
For information on winter tires for your and state laws before installing snow
vehicle model, see the “Technical data” chains.
section (Y page 344). RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
Always observe the speed rating of the winter

i When driving with snow chains, you may
tires installed on your vehicle.
wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 62)
After installing winter tires: before setting the vehicle in motion. This
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust will improve the vehicle’s traction.
it if necessary (Y page 232).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
system (Y page 233) or the Advanced Tire Winter driving instructions
Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 234). G Warning!
If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
Snow chains and from around the vehicle with the engine
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, resulting in unconsciousness and death.
make sure the use of snow chains is To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
permissible as specified in the “Technical a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
data” section of this Operator’s Manual. not facing the wind.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow-
G Warning!
covered roads at speeds not to exceed
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon The outside temperature indicator is not
as possible when driving on roads without designed to serve as an ice-warning device
snow. and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 254
254 Driving instructions
Indicated temperatures just above the Driving instructions

freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy, Drive sensibly – save fuel
especially in wooded areas or on bridges. To save fuel you should:
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation
G Warning!
pressures.
order to obtain braking action. This could RRemove unnecessary loads.
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle RRemove roof rack when not in use.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
this type of loss of control.
Operation
use.
The most important rule for slippery or icy RAvoid frequent acceleration and
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt deceleration.
acceleration, braking and steering
RHave all maintenance work performed at
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control
system under such conditions. the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet and as required by the
ProCarManuals.com
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift

Maintenance system. Contact an
the automatic transmission to neutral
position N or declutch in case of manual
transmission. Try to keep the vehicle under Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
control by corrective steering action. in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
short trips and in mountainous areas.
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 253).
Road salts and chemicals can adversely Drinking and driving
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal
force may become necessary to produce the G Warning!
normal brake effect. Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when
Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency
judgment.
back to normal.
The possibility of a serious or even fatal
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on
accident are greatly increased when you drink
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency
or take drugs and drive.
should be tested as soon as possible after
driving is resumed. Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or
G Warning! taking drugs.
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers. Pedals
G Warning!
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 255
Driving instructions 255
obstacles. If there are any floormats or It can also result in the brakes overheating,
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the thereby significantly reducing their
pedals still have sufficient clearance. effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers, the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an
the objects could get caught between the accident.
pedals. You could then no longer brake or
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
for some time, rather than immediately park,
injury.
so that the air stream will cool down the
brakes faster.
Operation
Power assistance Wet roads
G Warning! G Warning!
There is no power assistance for the steering
After driving in heavy rain for some time
and the brake when the engine is not running.
without applying the brakes or through water
Steering and braking requires significantly deep enough to wet brake components, the
more effort and you could lose control of the first braking action may be somewhat
ProCarManuals.com
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
in motion. Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

Brakes
driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
Downhill grades advisable to brake the vehicle with
considerable force prior to parking. The heat
! When driving down long and steep generated serves to dry the brakes.
grades, relieve the load on the brakes by
shifting into a lower gear to use the Salt-covered roads
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent
overheating of the brakes and reduces G Warning!
wear. A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
When using the engine’s braking power, a linings may cause a delay in the braking
drive wheel may not spin for an extended effect, resulting in a significantly increased
period of time, e.g. on slippery road braking distance, which could lead to an
surfaces. This may cause serious damage accident.
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the To avoid this danger, you should:
Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
Continuous or hard braking
layer of salt that may have built up on the
G Warning! brake discs and the brake linings is
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 256
256 Driving instructions
removed without putting other road users covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
at risk Warranty.
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle ! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
ahead and drive with particular care Because the ESP® operates automatically,
Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a the engine and ignition must be shut off
trip and immediately after commencing a (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
new trip, so that salt residues are removed 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
from the brake disc position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
being tested on a brake test dynamometer.
Active braking action through the ESP®
Operation
Brake service
may otherwise seriously damage the brake
! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may system which is not covered by the
be too low if the red brake warning lamp in Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
the instrument cluster comes on while the
engine is running and an acoustic warning ! Vehicles without 4MATIC:
sounds. Observe additional messages in Because the ESP® operates automatically,
ProCarManuals.com
the multifunction display that may appear. the engine and ignition must be shut off
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may (SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or
be the reason for low brake fluid in the 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
reservoir. position 0 or 1) when the parking brake is
Have the brake system inspected being tested on a brake test dynamometer
immediately. Contact an authorized or the vehicle is being towed with the front
Mercedes-Benz Center. axle raised.
All checks and service work on the brake Active braking action through the ESP®
system should be carried out by qualified may otherwise seriously damage the brake
technicians only. Contact an authorized system which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Center. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid If your brake system is only subjected to
recommended by Mercedes-Benz. moderate loads, you should occasionally test
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying
G Warning! above-normal braking pressure at higher
If other than recommended brake pads are speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the
installed, or other than recommended brake brake pads.
fluid is used, the braking properties of the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe G Warning!
braking is substantially impaired. This could Make sure not to endanger any other road
result in an accident. users when carrying out these braking
maneuvers.
! Vehicles with 4MATIC:
Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
Only conduct operational or performance System (BAS) (Y page 61).
tests are necessary, contact an authorized
High-performance brake system
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake The high-performance brake system is only
system or the transfer case which is not available on C 63 AMG.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 257
Driving instructions 257
G Warning! extended period with the ESP® switched

New vehicle brake pads and discs, and off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
replacement brake pads and discs may take the drivetrain which is not covered by the
several hundred miles of driving until they Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
provide optimum braking efficiency. Until that
! Simultaneously depressing the
time, you may need to use increased brake
pedal pressure while braking. Please be aware
accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
of this and adjust your driving and braking
reduces engine performance and causes
accordingly during this break-in period.
premature brake and drivetrain wear which
Excessive high-demand braking will cause Limited Warranty.
Operation
correspondingly high brake wear. Please be
attentive to the brake warning lamp in the
instrument cluster and brake condition Hydroplaning
messages in the multifunction display.
Especially for high performance driving, it is Depending on the depth of the water layer on
important to maintain and have the brake the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low
system checked regularly. speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or
ProCarManuals.com
when conditions indicate possible

The high-performance brake system is hydroplaning:
designed to operate under the extremely high X Reduce vehicle speed.
operating demands required to
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
accommodate the performance capabilities
of the vehicle. X Apply brakes cautiously.
The brakes may produce a squeaking-type

noise depending on the
Rvehicle
Standing water
speed
Rbrake force applied ! Do not drive through flooded areas.
Before driving through water, determine its
Rambient conditions, e.g. temperature and depth.
humidity
If you must drive through standing water,
As with any brake system, the wear of drive slowly to prevent water from entering
individual brake system components such as the passenger compartment or the engine
brake pads or disks strongly depends on your compartment. Water in these areas could
driving style and the conditions under which cause damage to electrical components or
you operate the vehicle. Thus, a driving style wiring of the engine or transmission, or
calling for high-demand braking will cause could result in water being ingested by the
your vehicle’s brakes to wear more quickly. engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such
damage is not covered by the Mercedes-
Driving off Benz Limited Warranty.
Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
full load on the engine until the operating
temperature has been reached. Driving abroad
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S.
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an or Canada, you should request dealer
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 258
258 Maintenance
network information for your destination from Engine adjustments should not be altered in
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. any way. Moreover, the specified service
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing
Control and operation of radio requirements. For details refer to the
transmitter Maintenance Booklet.
Safety notes G Warning!
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
G Warning! health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
Please do not forget that your primary monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
Operation
responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s unconsciousness and possible death.

attention to the road must always be his/her Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
primary focus when driving. For your safety as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
and the safety of others, we recommend that If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
you pull over to a safe location and stop entering the vehicle while driving, have the
before placing or taking a telephone call. cause determined and corrected
If you choose to use the telephone19 while immediately. If you must drive under these
ProCarManuals.com
driving, please use the hands-free device and conditions, drive only with at least one
only use the telephone when road, weather window fully open at all times.
and traffic conditions permit. Some
jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
mobile telephone while driving a vehicle. Maintenance
Only operate the audio system or
COMAND19 (Cockpit Management and Data Notes
System) if road, weather and traffic The Maintenance System in your vehicle
conditions permit. Otherwise, you may not be tracks the distance driven and the time
able to observe traffic conditions and could elapsed since the last maintenance service.
endanger yourself and others. It calculates other maintenance service work
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph required, and calls for the next maintenance
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is service accordingly.
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately We strongly recommend that you have your
14 m) every second. vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times
Emission control called for by the maintenance service
indicator.
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
the toxic components of the exhaust gases i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in
within permissible limits required by law. accordance with the Maintenance Booklet
These systems will function properly only and maintenance service indicator at the
when maintained strictly according to factory designated times/mileage will result in
specifications. Any adjustments on the vehicle damage not covered by the
engine should, therefore, be carried out only Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
authorized technicians.
19 Observe all legal requirements.

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 259
Maintenance 259
Maintenance service indicator Clearing the maintenance service

message indicator message
Information on maintenance work and The maintenance service indicator message
maintenance intervals are specified in the is cleared automatically
Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit switch on the ignition
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
information.
reaching the service threshold while driving
The maintenance service indicator message
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
will notify you when the next maintenance
Operation
service is required. suggested maintenance service term has
Starting approximately 1 month before the passed
next maintenance service is required, one of X Clearing the maintenance service
the following messages will appear in the indicator message manually: Press
multifunction display. The messages will button % or button a on the
appear while you are driving or when you multifunction steering wheel.
ProCarManuals.com
switch on the ignition (example service A): The standard display appears in the
Next Service A in XXXX miles (km) multifunction display.
Next Service A in XX days
Service A Due Maintenance service term exceeded
If you have exceeded the suggested
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display:
Service A Exceeded by XXXXX miles
(km)
Service A Exceeded by XXX days
An additional number or a further letter in
In addition, a signal sounds when the
combination with the maintenance type can
message appears.
be indicated. This indicates that further
auxiliary maintenance work is required. Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center reset the maintenance service indicator
for more information. following a completed maintenance service.
Calling up the maintenance service

indicator display
i The menu overview can be found on
(Y page 121).
You can call up the maintenance service
indicator display at any time to check when
the next maintenance service is required.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 260
260 Vehicle care
X Switch on the ignition. engine damage and/or other vehicle

The standard display of the control system damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
appears (Y page 121). Limited Warranty.
Service menu. Vehicle care
X Press button : or 9 to select Cleaning and care of the vehicle
ASSYST PLUS.
X Press button a on the multifunction
Notes
steering wheel to confirm. Regular and proper care will help to maintain
Operation
The maintenance service indicator display the value of your vehicle.

with the maintenance service deadline
appears in the multifunction display. G Warning!
Many cleaning products can be hazardous.
i If the battery was disconnected, the days Some are poisonous, others are flammable.
of disconnection will not be included in the Always follow the instructions on the
count shown by the maintenance service particular container. Always open your
ProCarManuals.com
indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
service deadline, you will need to subtract inside.
these days from the days shown in the Never use fluids or solvents that are not
maintenance service indicator message or designed for cleaning your vehicle.
maintenance service indicator display. Always lock away cleaning products and keep
them out of reach of children.
Resetting the maintenance service
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use
indicator
scouring agents. Never apply strong force
In the event that the maintenance service on and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge.
your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the surface to be cleaned.
maintenance service indicator reset.
While in operation, even while parked, your
The automotive maintenance facility carrying vehicle is subjected to varying external
out the maintenance service will find the influences which, if gone unchecked, can
information for resetting the maintenance attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
service indicator in the maintenance-relevant underbody and cause lasting damage.
literature for your vehicle.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
Such literature is available at any authorized and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
RAir pollution
Mercedes-Benz.
RRoad salt
! If the maintenance service indicator was
reset inadvertently, have an authorized RTar
Mercedes-Benz Center correct it. RGravel and stone chipping
Only reset the maintenance service
indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 261
Vehicle care 261
To avoid paint damage, you should Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or

immediately remove: damage due to negligent or incorrect care
RGrease and oil cannot always be removed or repaired with
the vehicle-care products recommended
RFuel
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an
RCoolant authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
RBrake fluid The following topics deal with the cleaning
and care of your vehicle and give important
RBird droppings “how-to” information as well as references to
RInsects Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
products.
Operation
RTree resins etc.
Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates Power washer
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
adverse influences. ! Follow the instructions provided by the
More frequent washings are necessary to power washer manufacturer on
deal with unfavorable conditions: maintaining a distance between the vehicle
and the nozzle of the power washer.
ProCarManuals.com
Rnear the ocean

Never use a round nozzle to power-wash
Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust tires. The intense jet of water can result in
emissions) damage to the tire.
Rduring winter operation Always replace a damaged tire.
You should check your vehicle from time to Always keep the jet of water moving across
time for stone chipping or other damage. Any the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical
damage should be repaired as soon as parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other
possible to prevent corrosion. rubber parts.
In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
check is a washing of the underbody followed If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas water, and a SmartKey is within
need to be re-undercoated. approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
Tar stains
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes- become more difficult to remove. A tar
Benz because of the possibility of remover is recommended.
incompatibility between materials used in the
production process and others applied later. Paintwork, painted body components
We have selected vehicle-care products and
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
compiled recommendations which are
specially matched to our vehicles and which or similar materials to painted body
always reflect the latest technology. You can components may damage the paintwork.
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz be applied when water drops on the paint
Center. surface do not “bead up”. This should
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 262
262 Vehicle care
normally be done every 3 to 5 months, X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
depending on the climate and washing such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
detergent used. Shampoo.
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a
should be applied if the paint surface shows diffused jet of water.
signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss). X Do not spray directly towards the
Do not apply any of these products or wax if ventilation intake.
your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge
is still hot. and chamois frequently.
X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for X Rinse with clean water and dry with a
Operation
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint chamois thoroughly.

damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
doors, etc.). finish.
Engine cleaning Automatic car wash

You can have your vehicle washed in an
Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
ProCarManuals.com
make sure to protect electrical components

car washes are preferable.
and connectors from contact with water and
cleaning agents. X To protect the filter system, activate the air
Corrosion protection, such as MB recirculation mode using button g on

Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the the climate control panel.
engine compartment after every engine ! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic
cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage touchless car wash which uses caustic
bushings and joints should be lubricated. The spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be or ornamental moldings.
protected from any wax.
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
Vehicle washing running it through the automatic car wash.
! Make sure the combination switch is set
In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
road salt as soon as possible.
sensor could activate and cause the wipers
When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
to move unintentionally. This may lead to
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
vehicle damage.
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of exterior rear view mirrors prior to running
water, and a SmartKey is within the vehicle through an automatic car wash
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it to prevent damage to the mirrors.
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
Hand-wash
X When taking the vehicle through an
X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle automatic conveyor-type car wash:
in direct sunlight. Make sure the automatic transmission
X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to remains in neutral position N.
clean the vehicle. When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 263
Vehicle care 263
After running the vehicle through an Cleaning the driving system sensors
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
which can be caused by residual wax on the
windshield.
Ornamental moldings
X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
moldings, use a damp cloth.
Operation
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
moldings. Although ornamental moldings The Parktronic system sensors : are located in
may have chrome appearance, they could the front and rear bumper.
be made of anodized aluminum that will be To clean the bumper area near driving system
damaged when cleaned with chrome sensors : observe the following:
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
ProCarManuals.com
those ornamental moldings.

Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
For very dirty ornamental moldings of with plenty of water.
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth.
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
ornamental molding is chrome-plated, ! If you use a power washer to clean the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
sensor covers, observe the following:
Center.
RFollow the instructions provided by the
Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps, power washer manufacturer.
side markers, turn signal lenses RMaintain a distance between the sensor
X
covers and the nozzle of the power
Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
washer.
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
with plenty of water.
Cleaning the rear view camera lens
! Only use window cleaning solutions that
are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
Window cleaning solutions which are not
suitable may damage the plastic lamp
lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
contain solvents.
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-

scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
lens :.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 264
264 Vehicle care
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If into place.
necessary, remove the wax using the X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with inserts with a clean cloth and mild
plenty of water. detergent solution.
! Do not clean the camera and the area X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
around the camera cleaning solution on all outside and inside
glass surfaces.
Rwith a high-pressure cleaner
An automotive glass cleaner is
Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure recommended.
Operation
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents

! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto
You could otherwise damage the camera. the windshield before turning the SmartKey
in the starter switch or pressing the
Cleaning the windows and the wiper KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
blades Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper
! The windshield wipers must be in a arm back. If released, the force of the
ProCarManuals.com
vertical position before folding them away impact from the tensioning spring could
from the windshield. They could otherwise crack the windshield.
damage the hood.
! To clean the window interior, do not use
Never open the hood when the wiper arms a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners
are folded forward. containing solvents. Do not touch the
X Make sure the hood is fully closed. inside of the windows with hard objects
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may
damage the windows.
X Turn combination switch to wiper setting
° (Y page 96). Cleaning the panorama roof with power
X With wiper arms in vertical position, switch tilt/sliding panel
off the ignition.
The rear part of the tilt/sliding panel has a
G Warning! protective layer on the inside.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window
remove SmartKey from starter switch before cleaning solution.
cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper An automotive glass cleaner is
blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make recommended.
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could ! Do not use a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents
suddenly turn on and cause injury. or cleaners containing solvents. Do not
touch the protective layer with hard objects
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. such as an ice scraper or ring. Never apply
They could tear. strong force and only use a soft, non-
scratching cloth when cleaning the rear
part of the tilt/sliding panel.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
protective layer.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 265
Vehicle care 265
Light alloy wheels ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.

If possible, clean wheels once a week. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
surface.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care,
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of Hard plastic trim items
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the pressure.
clear coat.
Audio or COMAND display
Operation
! The vehicle should not be parked for an
extended period of time immediately after ! You must switch off the audio or
it has been cleaned. This applies especially COMAND display and allow it to cool prior
after the wheel rims have been cleaned to cleaning.
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners
! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
can lead to increased corrosion of the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved These can damage or even destroy the
audio or COMAND display screen.
ProCarManuals.com
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel

paint if the vehicle is not driven after X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
cleaning. with light pressure.
Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
should always be warmed-up before it is Steering wheel and gear selector lever
parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
several minutes to allow the brakes to dry. X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly
When applying Mercedes-Benz approved or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved
Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved Leather Care.
Wheel Care products, take care not to
spray them on the brake disks. Carpets
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and
Plastic and rubber parts
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets.
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing Headliner and shelf below rear window
solution.
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
solution. cleaner in case of excessive dirt.
The surface may temporarily change color.
If this is the case, wait for it to dry. Seat belts
X
G Warning! Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays ! The seat belts must not be treated with
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the
steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents seat belts at temperatures above 176‡
will make the surface porous and vehicle (80†) or in direct sunlight.
occupants could suffer serious injuries from
plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
bag deployment.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 266
266 Vehicle care
G Warning! RDo not soak the leather upholstery.

Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may As leather is a natural product, it could
severely weaken them. In a crash they may otherwise harden or become porous.
not be able to provide adequate protection. RExercise particular care when cleaning
perforated leather as its underside
Upholstery should not become wet.
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing
clothing that have the tendency to give off Wood trims
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
upholstery to become permanently
Operation
wood trims in your vehicle.

discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will ! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
be prevented. wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.
G Warning!
Only use seat or head restraint covers which Chrome-plated exhaust tip
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
ProCarManuals.com
Benz for your vehicle model. Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
Using other seat or head restraint covers may
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
interfere with or prevent
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Rdeployment of the front side impact air
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
bags
been washed, especially during the winter.
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
Rdeployment of the pelvis air bags
wheel cleaners as they could cause
Ractivation of the NECK-PRO active front corrosion.
head restraints
for availability.
Leather upholstery
Please note that leather upholstery is a
natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
may also react to certain ambient influences
such as high humidity or high temperature by
showing wrinkles for example.
X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
Benz approved Leather Care.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
RWipe with light pressure only.
RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
agents such as scouring milk or powder.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 267
267

Where will I find ...? .......................... 268
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 270
What to do if … .................................. 297
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 309
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 311
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 312
Replacing bulbs ................................. 313
Replacing wiper blades .................... 316
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 317
Battery ............................................... 321
Jump starting .................................... 323
ProCarManuals.com
Towing the vehicle ............................ 325

Fuses .................................................. 328
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 268
268 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment wrench. Some tools required for a wheel

change are specific to your vehicle.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
features, standard or optional, potentially Center to obtain the tools approved for
available for your vehicle at the time of your vehicle.
purchase. Please be aware that your The vehicle tool kit includes:
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual.
RCollapsible wheel chock20
RFuse chart
RJack20
Where will I find ...?
RPair of gloves20
First aid kit RTowing eye bolt
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for RWheel wrench20

completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items. X Open the trunk (Y page 75).
Depending on the equipment configuration, X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle.
ProCarManuals.com
the first-aid kit will be located either in the X Engage the floor handle on the upper trunk
open storage department in the trunk or lip.
behind the cover panel on the left-hand side
of the trunk. ! To prevent damage, always disengage the
floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
lower the trunk floor before closing the
trunk.
X Turn lock : counterclockwise.

X Fold down cover ;.
The first aid kit can be removed.
: Tab
; Removing vehicle tool kit box
Vehicle tool kit = Vehicle tool kit box cover
? Opening vehicle tool kit box cover
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the trunk floor. A Tab
B Vehicle tool kit
i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for C Vehicle tool kit box
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel D Luggage bowl
20 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 269
Where will I find ...? 269
X Removing vehicle tool kit box: Pull you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
tab : in direction of arrow ; and lift others could be injured, as the jack is
vehicle tool kit box C. designed only for the purpose of changing a
X Remove vehicle tool kit box C from wheel.
luggage bowl D. When using the jack, observe the safety notes
X Opening vehicle tool kit box cover: Pull in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and
tab A in direction of arrow ? and open the notes on the jack.
vehicle tool kit box cover =.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit
X Installing vehicle tool kit box: Slide
(Y page 268).
vehicle tool kit box C into the recess of
luggage bowl D.
X Push vehicle tool kit box C downward until
Practical hints
it engages into luggage bowl D.
Collapsible wheel chock

ProCarManuals.com
The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure

the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
Storage position
X Turn the crank handle in the direction of
arrow as far as it will go.
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.

X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =. Operational position
For information on where to place wheel X Turn the crank handle clockwise.
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting Before placing the jack back into the vehicle
the vehicle” (Y page 318). tool kit:
X Fully collapse the jack.
Jack
X Fold in the crank handle (storage position).
G Warning!
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 270
270 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
Spare wheel Certain warning and malfunction messages

are accompanied by an audible signal.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 317. Address these messages accordingly and
The spare wheel is located in the space follow the additional instructions given in this
underneath the trunk floor. Operator’s Manual.
X Removing: Open the trunk (Y page 75). High-priority messages appear in the
X Lift the trunk floor using the floor handle. multifunction display in red color.
X Engage the trunk floor handle on the upper Certain messages of high priority cannot be
trunk lip. cleared from the multifunction display using
a or % on the multifunction steering
! To prevent damage, always disengage the wheel (Y page 118).
floor handle from the upper trunk lip and
Other messages of high priority and
lower the trunk floor before closing the
messages of less immediate priority can be
Practical hints
trunk.
cleared from the multifunction display using
a or %. They are then stored in the
vehicle status message memory
(Y page 129). Remember that clearing a
ProCarManuals.com
message will only make the message

disappear. Clearing a message will not
correct the condition that caused the
message to appear.
G Warning!
All categories of messages contain important
information which should be taken note of
and, where a malfunction is indicated,
X Remove luggage bowl ; by turning it addressed as soon as possible at an
counterclockwise. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Remove spare wheel :. Failure to repair the condition noted may
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
Storing the spare wheel after use Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property
damage or personal injury.
X Place spare wheel : into the spare wheel
well. G Warning!
X Secure spare wheel : by turning luggage No messages will be displayed if either the
bowl ; clockwise. instrument cluster or the multifunction
display is inoperative.
As a result, you will not be able to see
Vehicle status messages in the information about your driving conditions,
multifunction display such as
Rspeed
Notes
Routside temperature
Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the Rwarning/indicator lamps
instrument cluster.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 271
Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 271
Rmalfunction/warning messages On the pages that follow, you will find a

Rfailure
compilation of the most important warning
of any systems
and malfunction messages that may appear.
Driving characteristics may be impaired. For your convenience the messages are
If you must continue to drive, do so with added divided into text messages (Y page 272) and
caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes- symbol messages (Y page 279).
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Practical hints
ProCarManuals.com
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 272
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operator’s forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
Practical hints

X Switch off the ignition.
X Open the front passenger door.
ProCarManuals.com
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat

and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Make sure no objects which apply supplemental weight to
the seat are present. The system may recognize such
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrument
cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 273

classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective steps,
do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.
Practical hints
ProCarManuals.com
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 274

Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operator’s weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints
vehicle.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 45 indicator lamp in the center console
ProCarManuals.com
(Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the instrument

cluster (Y page 28) for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 45 indicator lamp in the center console should
illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that the OCS
(Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger front air
bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 45 indicator
lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 275

Check See Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):
Child Operator's The BabySmart™ child seat is not positioned correctly.
Seat Manual Risk of injury!
Position
X Install the BabySmart™ child seat in correct position.
Vehicles with BabySmart™ (Canada only):

The sensor for child seat recognition is malfunctioning.
Risk of injury!
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning!
If the 45 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front passenger
seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use the front
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
ProCarManuals.com
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e In addition an acoustic warning sounds.
X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Cruise - - - mph One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 181).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 276
Vehicle

P Shift to You have turned off the engine with the KEYLESS-GO start/
'P' stop button with the automatic transmission in neutral
position N and opened the driver’s door.
or
You have attempted to switch off the engine with the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button with the automatic
transmission in reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission to park position P.
Practical hints
Shift to to Start You have attempted to start the engine while the automatic
'P' or 'N' Engine transmission was in reverse gear R or drive position D.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
ProCarManuals.com
Tires

Check Then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
Tire Restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Pressure Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 233).
Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
Check Tire The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Soon X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 317).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 232).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 233).
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 277

Tire after The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressures driving a TPMS.
will be few X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
displayed minutes
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Press. e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Practical hints
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
ProCarManuals.com
TirePress. Sensor(s)M At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).

issing The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare wheel).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Press. Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 278

Correct The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Tire or
Pressure The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 232).
X Restart the Advanced TPMS (Y page 236).
Caution At least one tire is deflating.

Practical hints
Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.

Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
ProCarManuals.com
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).
Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Tires below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 279
Symbol messages
Brake
# Check The brake pads have reached their wear limit.

Brake Pad X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible at an
Wear authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Practical hints
ProCarManuals.com
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 280
$ ABS and In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and the
ESC yellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.
(USA only) Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J e See malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start
(Canada Operator’s assist system are unavailable.
only) Manual
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Practical hints
Center as soon as possible.

Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ProCarManuals.com

(USA only) Currently The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J Unavailabl malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start
(Canada e See assist system are unavailable.
only) Operator’s
Manual The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESP® is available again.
If the message does not disappear:
responsiveness.
accident.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 281
(USA only) Currently The brake system still functions normally but due to
J Unavailabl insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and
(Canada e See the hill-start assist system are unavailable.
only) Operator’s
Manual
responsiveness.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
Practical hints
the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assist system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
ProCarManuals.com

accident.
$ EBD, ABS, In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d and the
and ESC yellow ABS indicator lamp ! come on.
(USA only) Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
J e See malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP® are
(Canada Operator's unavailable.
only) Manual
responsiveness.
accident.
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.
(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 282
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake.
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
Practical hints
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
ProCarManuals.com
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 283
Safety systems
÷ ESC In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.

Inoperativ The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
e See malfunction, the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assist
Operator's system are unavailable.
Manual
responsiveness.
Practical hints
accident.
ProCarManuals.com

Currently The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply the BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start
e See assist system are not available.
Operator's
Manual
responsiveness.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP® is operational again and the message in the
multifunction display should disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
accident.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 284

Currently The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Unavailabl
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
e See
BAS, the ESP®, and the hill-start assist system available.
Operator's
Manual X Drive a short distance with added caution at a vehicle speed
of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
When the message disappears, the ESP® is available again.
Practical hints

responsiveness.
ProCarManuals.com

accident.
÷ ESC If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while driving

Currently and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
Unavailabl (ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the
e See drive wheel brakes.
Operator's As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
Manual System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
6 SRS There is a malfunction in the Supplemental Restraint System

Malfunctio (SRS). The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)
n Service could deploy unexpectedly or fail to activate in an accident.
Required X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
6 Front Components of the driver’s supplemental restraint system

Left SRS may not work properly.
Malfunctio X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
n Service Mercedes-Benz Center.
Required
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 285
6 Front Components of the front passenger’s supplemental restraint

Right SRS system may not work properly.
Required
6 Rear Left Components of the left rear passenger’s supplemental

SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
Practical hints
6 Rear Components of the center rear passenger’s supplemental
Center restraint system may not work properly.
SRS X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center.
ProCarManuals.com
n Service
Required
6 Rear Components of the right rear passenger’s supplemental

Right SRS restraint system may not work properly.
Required
6 Left Side The left window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Curtain X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Airbag Mercedes-Benz Center.
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
6 Right The right window curtain air bag may not work properly.
Side X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Curtain Mercedes-Benz Center.
Airbag
Malfunctio
n Service
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 286
Vehicle
N The trunk is open.

X Close the trunk (Y page 76).
M You are driving with the hood open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 225).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are driving with at least one door open. The display
Practical hints
; symbol shows you which doors are open.

X Close all doors.
_ Rear Left The left or right rear seat backrest is not engaged.
ProCarManuals.com
Backrest X Adjust the rear seat backrest until it is fully engaged in

Not position.
Latched
or
Rear
Right
Backrest
Not
Latched
+ Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+ Don’t This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
+ Take Your You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

Key From X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Ignition
+ Obtain A The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

New Key X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 287
+ Close You tried to lock the vehicle but not all doors were closed.
Doors To X Close doors and lock the vehicle again.
Lock
Vehicle
+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
Vehicle
+ Replace The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are

Key discharged.
Practical hints
Battery X Replace the batteries (Y page 312).
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
ProCarManuals.com
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

appears in X Engage the parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 78).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 78).
white)
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Remove The KEYLESS-GO system is malfunctioning.

'Start' X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
Button (Y page 78).
and X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
Insert Key
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 288
¥ Check The water level has dropped to approximately 1.1 US qts

Washer (1.0 l).
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 228).
D Power Power assistance for the steering system is not available. A

Steering considerably higher degree of effort is necessary to steer the
Malfunctio vehicle.
n X Check whether you are capable to apply the higher degree
See of effort necessary to safely steer the vehicle.
Operator's
Manual If you are able to steer the vehicle safely:
Practical hints
X Continue driving with added caution.

Center.
If, in any way, you feel that you are not able to steer the vehicle
ProCarManuals.com
safely:
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Apply the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
Engine
+ Check The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 227).
Level See X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator's
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 289
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
Engine Off
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature gauge in the instrument
cluster.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
Practical hints
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
ProCarManuals.com
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.
! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 290
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Low Stop X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
Vehicle! X Turn off the engine immediately.
Turn
X Check the poly-V-belt.
Engine Off
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
Practical hints
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited

Warranty.
cluster.
ProCarManuals.com
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center

immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

cluster.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 291
4 Check The engine oil has dropped to a critical level.

Engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 225) and add engine oil
Oil At as required (Y page 226).
Next X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
Refueling
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check Engine Oil At Next For information on approved engine oils
Refueling appears while the engine is contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
running and at operating temperature, the or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
engine oil level has dropped to approximately ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
Practical hints
the minimum level.
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ProCarManuals.com
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no

obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.
8 Fuel The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Level Low X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Loose fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 222).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 292
Lamps
b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Check The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
Reverse
Lamp
or
Practical hints
Check
Right
Reverse
Lamp
ProCarManuals.com
b Check The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
Brake Lamp
or
Check
Right
Brake Lamp
b Check The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Center message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
Brake Lamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Check The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Fog X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Lamp possible.
or
Check
Right Fog
Lamp
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 293
b Check The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
Sidemarker
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
Practical hints
b Check The rear left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
Sidemarker
Lamp
ProCarManuals.com
or
Check
Rear
Right
Sidemarker
Lamp
b Check The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning.

Front X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
Parking
Lamp
or
Check
Front
Right
Parking
Lamp
b Check The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left High X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Beam possible.
or
Check
Right
High Beam
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 294
b Check The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
License possible.
Plate Lamp
or
Check
Right
License
Plate Lamp
b Auto Lamp The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Function automatically.
Practical hints
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as

e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
ProCarManuals.com
X Switch off the daytime running lamp mode in the control

system (Y page 133).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 90).
b Check The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Low X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
Beam (Y page 313).
or X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Check
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Right Low
Beam
b Check The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Fog Lamp
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle
and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or c
(Y page 90).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 295
b Check The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Tail X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
Lamp
or
Check
Right
Tail Lamp
b Check The left or right tail lamp/brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Left Tail X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
and Brake
Lamps
Practical hints
or
Check
Right
Tail and
ProCarManuals.com
Brake
Lamps
b Check The left or right corner-illuminating front fog lamp is

Left malfunctioning.
Cornering X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Light possible.
or
Check
Right
Cornering
Light
b Check The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn
Signal
or
Check
Rear
Right
Turn
Signal
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 296
b Check The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Front X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 313).
Left Turn
Signal
or
Check
Front
Right
Turn
Signal
b Check The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Practical hints
Left malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Mirror stopped working.
Turn X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Signal possible.
ProCarManuals.com
or
Check
Right
Mirror
Turn
Signal
Tires
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Press. X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Warning steering and braking maneuvers.
Caution X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 317).
Tire
Malfunctio
n
h Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Tire below the reference value.
Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 297
What to do if … 297
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Practical hints
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps in
the instrument cluster come on. The low-
Lamps in instrument cluster
ProCarManuals.com
beam headlamp indicator lamp, high-beam

headlamp indicator lamp, turn signal
Notes
If any of the following lamps in the instrument the fog lamps will only come on if activated.
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- If a lamp in the instrument cluster fails to
check when switching on the ignition, have come on when the ignition is switched on,
the respective bulb checked and replaced if have it checked and replaced if necessary.
necessary.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 298
298 What to do if …
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the ESP®, and the EBP are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints

responsiveness.
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
ProCarManuals.com

accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
responsiveness.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 299

! The yellow ABS The ABS is temporarily not available. The ESP®, the BAS, and the
indicator lamp EBP are also unavailable.
comes on while The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
the engine is
The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
running.
systems specified above.
The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out:
Practical hints
responsiveness.
ProCarManuals.com

accident.
! The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
d malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, and the ESP® are
The yellow ABS unavailable.
indicator lamp and the X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
yellow ESP® warning hard braking, reducing steering capability.
lamp come on while the X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
engine is running and multifunction display (Y page 270).
an acoustic warning X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
sounds.
accident.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 300

! The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
d malfunction.
The red brake warning The ABS, the BAS, and the ESP® are also switched off.
lamp comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
driving. In addition, the systems specified above available.
yellow ABS indicator
lamp, and the yellow
ESP® warning lamp
come on and an
acoustic warning responsiveness.
sounds. X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
Practical hints

ProCarManuals.com
accident.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running. X Engage the parking brake.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 301
Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
ProCarManuals.com
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 302
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

6 The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
ProCarManuals.com
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d All models, The ESP® has been switched off.
except Risk of accident!
C 63 AMG:
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
The yellow ESP® system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
warning lamp is spinning.
comes on while
X Switch the ESP® back on.
the engine is
running. Exceptions: (Y page 63).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d C 63 AMG only: ESP® SPORT is activated.
The yellow ESP® Risk of accident!
warning lamp When ESP® SPORT is activated it will only stabilize the vehicle to
comes on while a limited extent if the system recognizes that the vehicle starts to
the engine is skid or that a wheel is spinning.
running.
X Switch the ESP® SPORT off (Y page 64).
The message ESP On appears in the multifunction display.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 303

d C 63 AMG only: The ESP® has been switched off.
å The yellow ESP® Risk of accident!
warning lamp When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
and the yellow system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
ESP OFF is spinning.
warning lamp
X Switch the ESP® back on.
come on while
the engine is Exceptions: (Y page 64).
running. X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
Practical hints
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d All models, The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
ProCarManuals.com
except Risk of accident!

C 63 AMG:
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
The yellow ESP® multifunction display.
warning lamp X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
comes on while
the engine is
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
running.
conditions.
d C 63 AMG only: The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
å The yellow ESP® Risk of accident!
warning lamp X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
and the yellow multifunction display.
ESP OFF X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
warning lamp
come on while
the engine is
running. conditions.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 304

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the ETS/4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
driving. X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 63).

accident.
Practical hints
At least one wheel is spinning and the Electronic Traction System

(ETS/4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
wheel brakes.
ProCarManuals.com
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the

As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (ETS/4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
Vehicle

8 The yellow fuel The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
tank reserve X Refuel at the next gas station.
warning lamp
comes on when
the engine is
running.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 305
Engine

; There may be a malfunction in
The yellow engine Rthe fuel management system
malfunction indicator Rthe ignition system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rthe emission control system
Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
Practical hints
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
ProCarManuals.com
local requirements.
; A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
The yellow engine cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
malfunction indicator X Check the fuel cap (Y page 222).
lamp comes on when X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
the engine is running. X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
? The red coolant There is insufficient coolant in the reservoir.
temperature If this warning lamp comes on frequently, there is a leak in the
warning lamp cooling system.
comes on when If the coolant level is correct, the electric radiator fan may be
the engine is broken.
running.
X Immediately add coolant to prevent engine from overheating
(Y page 227).
X Have the cooling system checked.
X If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you can
continue driving to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
X Avoid high engine loads (e.g. driving uphill) and stop-and-go
driving.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 306

? The red coolant The coolant temperature has exceeded 248‡ (120†).
temperature X Stop in a safe location as soon as possible and allow the engine
warning lamp and coolant to cool down.
comes on when
the engine is
running and an
acoustic
warning sounds.
G Warning! Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from

Driving when your engine is overheated can other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
Practical hints
cause some fluids which may have leaked into vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine compartment to catch fire. You the engine has cooled down.
could be seriously burned.
! The engine should not be operated with
ProCarManuals.com
Steam from an overheated engine can cause

serious burns which can occur just by opening the coolant temperature above 248‡
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine (120†). Doing so may cause serious
if you see or hear steam coming from it. damage which is not covered by the
Tires

h Combination The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
low tire pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
telltale/TPMS braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
malfunction X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
telltale for the
(Y page 270).
Advanced TPMS
illuminates If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
continuously. corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
h Combination There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
low tire pressure X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
telltale/TPMS (Y page 270).
malfunction X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
telltale for the
Benz Center.
Advanced TPMS
flashes 60 After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
seconds and pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
then stays of driving.
illuminated.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 307
G Warning! maintenance, and it is the driver’s

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), responsibility to maintain correct tire
should be checked at least once a month pressure, even if underinflation has not
when cold and inflated to the inflation reached the level to trigger illumination of the
pressure recommended by the vehicle TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
Information placard on the driver’s door B- TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the system is not operating properly. The
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
tires of a different size than the size indicated the low tire pressure telltale. When the
on the Tire and Loading Information placard system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should flash for approximately 1 minute and then
determine the proper tire inflation pressure remain continuously illuminated. This
Practical hints
for those tires. sequence will continue upon subsequent
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring exists. When the malfunction indicator is
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire illuminated, the system may not be able to
ProCarManuals.com
pressure telltale when one or more of your detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
tires are significantly underinflated. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure reasons, including the installation of
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check incompatible replacement or alternate tires
your tires as soon as possible, and inflate or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
them to the proper pressure. Driving on a TPMS from functioning properly. Always
significantly underinflated tire causes the tire check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
to overheat and can lead to tire failure. replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
handling and stopping ability. Please note that continue to function properly.
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
Lamp in center console

Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
45 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47).
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 308

Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 57).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.
Practical hints
USA only: The system is malfunctioning.

45 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
ProCarManuals.com
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 270).

illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.
G Warning! individual on the front passenger seat, do not

If the 45 indicator lamp illuminates have any passenger use the front passenger
and remains illuminated with the weight of a seat until the system has been repaired.
typical adult or someone larger than a small

USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
45 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
not remain illuminated out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
with the weight of a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
typical 12-month-old the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
child in a standard child X
Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
restraint or less on the
follow corrective steps (Y page 270).
front passenger seat.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 309
Unlocking/locking manually 309
G Warning! Unlocking the driver’s door

If the 45 indicator lamp does not
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s
Practical hints
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the door lock.
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
driver’s door and the trunk using the to position 1.
mechanical key.
ProCarManuals.com
X Pull the door handle to open the driver’s

The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
door.
you
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove
Runlock the driver’s door or the trunk with it from the driver’s door lock.
the mechanical key
and Unlocking the trunk
Ropen the driver’s door or the trunk
A minimum height clearance of 5.9 ft (1.8 m)
To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into is required to open the trunk lid.
the starter switch.
Removing the mechanical key
X Insert mechanical key ; into the trunk lid

lock.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
X Move locking tab : in the direction of to position 1.
arrow.
X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing. ! When you open the trunk, the trunk lid
swings open upwards. Always make sure
there is sufficient overhead clearance.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 310
310 Unlocking/locking manually
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove X Check whether the doors and the trunk are
it from the trunk lid lock. locked.
X If necessary, lock the trunk with the
mechanical key (Y page 77).
Locking the vehicle
i This procedure does not arm the anti-
If you cannot lock the vehicle with the theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as filler flap.
follows:
X Open the driver’s door.
X Close the front passenger door, the rear Fuel filler flap
doors, and the trunk. G Warning!
X Press the central locking switch
Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
Practical hints
(Y page 75). may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you

The locking knobs of the front passenger could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
door and the rear doors move down. filler flap.
X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or
ProCarManuals.com
drained: Press down the locking knobs on In case the central locking system does not
the front passenger door and the rear release the fuel filler flap, you can open it
doors. manually.
X Exit the vehicle. The fuel filler flap release is located on the
X Close the driver’s door.
passenger side in the trunk behind the cover.
X Open the trunk (Y page 75).
X Open the fuse box cover in the trunk
(Y page 329).
X Remove mechanical key ; from the

SmartKey (Y page 309).
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s
X Pull fuel filler flap release : in direction of
door lock.
X Turn mechanical key ; clockwise to arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
position 1.
The vehicle is locked. X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 222).
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove X Close the cover.
it from the driver’s door lock. X Close the trunk.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 311
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints 311
Manually unlocking the gear selector Resetting activated NECK-PRO active

lever front head restraints
If the vehicle’s electrical system is
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
malfunctioning, the gear selector lever could
have been triggered in a rear-end collision,
remain locked in park position P. In this case
they must be reset.
the gear selector lever can be unlocked
manually, e.g. to tow the vehicle. You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front
head restraints have been triggered when
they have been moved forward and cannot be
adjusted.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
Practical hints
front head restraints checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a
rear-end collision.
G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
When pushing back the head restraint

cushion, make sure your fingers do not
become caught between the head restraint
! Do not use sharp objects to loosen the cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
gear selector lever cover in the center lead to injury.
console, as this could damage the gear
selector lever cover or the center console. i Pressing the head restraint cushion back
X Insert a flat, blunt object into the right edge requires high force. If you encounter
of gear selector lever cover : at the difficulties when pushing the head restraint
positions indicated by the arrows. back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Loosen gear selector lever cover : using
Center.
this object.
X Pull gear selector lever cover : out and
remove.
X Simultaneously push down release ; and
move the gear selector lever out of park
position P.
The gear selector lever is unlocked.
i The gear selector lever is locked again as
soon as you move it back to park position
P.
X Push the head restraint cushion at the

bottom, back as far as possible ;.
X Push the head restraint cushion down into
the guide =.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 312
312 Replacing SmartKey batteries
X Fold the head restraint cushion by the top, i The required replacement batteries are
back firmly until it engages :. available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO Center.
active front head restraint for the second Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
front seat. CR 2025 or equivalent.
For information on NECK-PRO active front X Remove the mechanical key from the
head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front SmartKey (Y page 309).
head restraints” (Y page 52).
For information on head restraint adjustment,
see “Seats” (Y page 79).
Replacing SmartKey batteries

Practical hints
If the batteries in the SmartKey are

discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
ProCarManuals.com
have the batteries replaced at an authorized

X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey
G Warning! opening until battery compartment
Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive cover : opens. Do not keep the cover
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out shut.
of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/
index.cfm.
X Remove the battery compartment cover.
Batteries contain materials that can harm the X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
environment if disposed of improperly. hand until battery = falls out.
Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
X Insert the new battery with the positive
of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
provinces (Canada only) require sellers of terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth.
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling. X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
When inserting the batteries, make sure they cover into the housing and press the cover
are clean and free of lint. closed.
When replacing batteries, always replace X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
both batteries. well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 313
Replacing bulbs 313
Replacing bulbs Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
Safety notes
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper lamp and its components. We recommend
exterior lighting and signaling to a large that you have such work done by a qualified
degree. technician.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
readjusted at regular intervals and when a highly demanding process, we recommend
bulb has been replaced. Contact an to have them replaced at an authorized
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Mercedes-Benz Center.
headlamp adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
G Warning!
Practical hints
fogged up on the inside as a result of high
Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. the lights on should clear up the fogging.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
ProCarManuals.com
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A

bulb can explode if you
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 314
314 Replacing bulbs
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
; Turn signal lamp: 3457A
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type

ProCarManuals.com
: Turn signal lamp: Turn signal lamp:

3457A
Rear lamps Type

: Passenger side: Tail lamp P 21 W
Driver’s side: Tail lamp and rear fog lamp
P 21 W
; Side marker lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
? Tail lamp, brake lamp: P 21 W
A Tail lamp, brake lamp: P 21 W
B Backup lamp: P 21 W
Notes on bulb replacement bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes-

Benz Center.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 315
Replacing bulbs 315
G Observe Safety notes, see page 313. X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and and remove it.
with the specified watt rating. X Pull electric plug ; off the bulb ?.
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb X Remove wire clip = from bulb holder by
to prevent short circuits. pushing down and release from arrestor

RAlways
hook.
use a clean lint-free cloth when
X Pull bulb ? at its socket out of bulb holder.
handling bulbs.
X Insert the new bulb so that its socket
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
locates in the recess of bulb holder and is
grease.
level to it.
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come X Fold wire clip = back and press it down on
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
bulb holder to engage it in the arrestor
Center.
Practical hints
hook.
i Mercedes-Benz recommends using X Connect electric plug ; on bulb ?.
Longlife (LL) bulbs. X Align housing cover and turn it clockwise.
ProCarManuals.com
Front turn signal lamp bulb

Replacing bulbs for front lamps
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$.
X Open the hood (Y page 224).
G Warning!
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a X Turn bulb socket = with handle ;
qualified technician.
counterclockwise and remove it.
X Pull bulb out of bulb socket =.
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps
only) X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
= until the bulb engages.
X Place bulb socket = back into the housing.
Handle ; must be in a horizontal line and

mark : must be on the upper part (driver’s
side headlamp) or lower part (passenger-
side headlamp).
X Turn bulb socket = clockwise until it
engages.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 316
316 Replacing wiper blades
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps A Backup lamp

Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear B Tail lamp, brake lamp
lamp, do the following: C Tail lamp, brake lamp, parking and
X
standing lamp
Switch off the ignition.
D Turn signal lamp
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$. Side marker lamp
X Open the trunk. X Turn the bulb socket on backside of tail
lamp unit counterclockwise and remove
Tail lamp unit side marker lamp = with bulb socket.
X Turn the new bulb with socket on backside
X Driver’s side: Lift up the bottom and pull out
the trim panel covering the driver side rear of tail lamp unit clockwise until it engages.
Practical hints
light.
Other lamps
X Passenger side: Open the fuse box in the
X Depending on which bulb needs to be
trunk (Y page 329).
replaced, press gently onto the respective
bulb and turn it counterclockwise out of its
ProCarManuals.com
bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into its bulb
socket and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
Reinstall bulb carrier

X Reinstall the bulb carrier and let tabs :
(Y page 316) engage.
X Connect the electrical connector ;
X Disconnect electrical connector ;. (Y page 316) until it engages.

X Reinstall trim panel.
X Pull tabs : in direction of arrows.
X Remove the bulb carrier.
Replacing wiper blades

Safety notes
G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
(vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)
before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
Bulb carrier injury.
= Side marker lamp
? Rear fog lamp (driver’s side only), side
marker lamp
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 317
Flat tire 317
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windshield will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
! Never open the hood when a wiper arm is

folded forward.
X Turn the wiper blade in direction of
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
arrow :.
arm back. If released, the force of the
Practical hints
impact from the tensioning spring could X Slide the wiper blade sideways out of the
crack the windshield. retainer in the direction of arrow ;.

Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
windshield glass without a wiper blade
ProCarManuals.com
inserted. Installing wiper blades

Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have X Slide the wiper blade onto the wiper arm
this work carried out at an authorized until it locks in place.
Mercedes-Benz Center. X Rotate the wiper blade into a position
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter parallel to the wiper arm.
switch. X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure you hold on to the wiper when
X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board folding the wiper arm back.
electronics have status 0 (Y page 78).
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
Removing wiper blades
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.
They could tear. Flat tire
X Fold the wiper arm forward until it snaps Safety notes
into place.
G Warning!
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As a
result, the vehicle handling characteristics
change when driving with a spare wheel
mounted. Adapt your driving style
accordingly.
The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 318
318 Flat tire
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph Mounting the spare wheel

(80 km/h).
Introduction
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the X Prepare the vehicle as described
spare wheel replaced with a regular road (Y page 318).
wheel. X Take the following out of the vehicle:
Never operate the vehicle with more than one Rspare wheel
spare wheel mounted.
Rjack
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
Rvehicle tool kit box
wheel is mounted.
For information on where to find the
respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
(Y page 268) and (Y page 270).
Practical hints
Preparing the vehicle

X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard, factory-equipped with the tools required for
flat surface. a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
ProCarManuals.com
X Turn on the hazard warning flasher. wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
Center to obtain the tools approved for
your vehicle. This section describes the
X Shift the automatic transmission into park wheel change using the tools approved and
position P (manual transmission to 1st or recommended for your vehicle.
reverse gear R).
X Turn off the engine. Lifting the vehicle
switch.
G Warning!
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack
or
which has been specifically approved by
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle.
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
position 0, same as with the SmartKey
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built
removed from the starter switch). The
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
driver’s door can then be closed again.
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up
Open doors only when conditions are safe
bracket. The jack must always be vertical
to do so.
when in use, especially on inclines or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the
declines.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle
starter switch.
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a
performing maintenance work under the
safe distance from the roadway. Open vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
doors only when conditions are safe to do jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
so. change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 319
Flat tire 319
away from the area under the lifted vehicle. G Warning!

Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
capacity jackstands before working under the slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
vehicle. vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
Always engage the parking brake firmly and others.
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
brake while the vehicle is raised.
Make sure that the ground on which the
vehicle is standing and where you place the
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
Practical hints
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may
ProCarManuals.com
not be able to achieve its load-bearing X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do
capacity if it is not at its full height. not yet remove the wheel bolts
Never start the engine when the vehicle is (approximately one full turn with wheel
raised. wrench :).
Also observe the notes on the jack. The jack take-up brackets are located directly
behind the front wheel housings and in front
X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by of the rear wheel housings.
blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other G Warning!
sizeable objects.
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
(Y page 268). For information on setting up take-up bracket.
the collapsible wheel chock, see
If you do not position the jack correctly in the
(Y page 269).
jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
When changing a wheel on a level surface: the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable others.
object in front of and another wheel chock
or other sizeable object behind the wheel ! Do not position the jack on the body of
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
being changed. the vehicle.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a hill:
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable
objects on the downhill side in front of both
wheels on the side opposite to the side on
which the wheel is to be changed.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 320
320 Flat tire
Attaching the spare wheel

G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
Damaged wheel hub threads should be
repaired immediately. Do not continue to
drive under these circumstances! Contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
X Place jack = on firm ground. Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
X Position jack = under take-up wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
Practical hints
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as This could cause an accident. Make sure to
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is use the correct wheel bolts.
parked on an incline.
G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.

Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the
vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel

hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
X Turn crank ? clockwise until jack = is installing first wheel bolt.
fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the
jack base evenly meets the ground.
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground.
Removing the wheel

X Unscrew and remove the wheel bolts.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the wheel hub
X Remove the wheel. and push it on.
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them
slightly.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 321
Battery 321
Lowering the vehicle Battery

X Lower the vehicle by turning the crank Safety notes
counterclockwise until the vehicle is
resting fully on its own weight. A battery should always be sufficiently
X Remove the jack.
charged in order to achieve its rated service
life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
distance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
When replacing a battery, always use a
battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
Practical hints
for an extended period of time, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
ProCarManuals.com
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly, G Warning!

following the diagonal sequence illustrated Observe all safety instructions and
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe precautions when handling automotive
a tightening torque of 96 lb-ft (130 Nm). batteries.
Risk of explosion.
G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after
changing a wheel. The wheels could come
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of Fire, open flames and
96 lb-ft (130 Nm). smoking are prohibited
when handling batteries.
X Fully collapse the jack, with handle folded Avoid creating sparks.
in (storage position), see (Y page 269). Battery acid is caustic. Do
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools not allow it to come into
in the designated storage space. contact with skin, eyes or
For information on storing the spare wheel clothing.
after it has been replaced by a regular road Wear suitable protective
wheel, see (Y page 270). clothing, especially gloves,
apron and faceguard.
i Vehicles with TPMS:
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure Wear eye protection.
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with Rinse any acid spills
functioning sensor has been placed back immediately with clear
into service on the vehicle. water. Contact a physician
if necessary.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 322
322 Battery
Keep children away. Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
battery could explode if touched due to
electrostatic charge or due to spark
formation.
Follow the instructions in
this Operator’s Manual.
! As any other battery, the battery may
discharge if you do not operate the vehicle
for an extended period of time. Have the
A battery contains materials that can harm battery disconnected at a qualified
the environment if disposed of improperly. A workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz
large 12 V storage battery contains lead. Center in such a case. You may also
Recycling of the battery is the preferred connect an accessory battery charge unit
method of disposal. Many states (USA only) expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for
Practical hints
or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of your vehicle model to maintain the battery
batteries to accept the old battery for charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
recycling. Benz Center for further information.
G Warning! The battery, the battery ventilation hose
ProCarManuals.com
Failure to follow these instructions can result and the lateral plug must always be
in severe injury or death. securely installed when the vehicle is in
Never lean over batteries while connecting. operation.
You might get injured. ! Never loosen or detach battery terminal
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not clamps while the engine is running or the
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, SmartKey is in the starter switch or
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1.
flush affected area with water and seek Otherwise the alternator and other
medical help if necessary. electronic components could be severely
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, damaged.
which is flammable and explosive. Keep Have the battery checked regularly at an
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
improper connection of jumper cables,
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for
smoking etc.
maintenance intervals or contact an
G Warning! authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
further information.
Do not place metal objects on the battery as
this could result in a short circuit. i After battery power was interrupted, do
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk the following:
of acid burns in the event of an accident. RReset the automatic exterior mirror fold
Take care that you do not become statically in function (Y page 88).
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
RSet the clock (Y page 132). Vehicles with
rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
also should not pull or push the battery over COMAND: see separate COMAND
carpets or other synthetic materials. operating instructions.
Never touch the battery first. First touch the
outside body of the vehicle in order to release
any possible electrostatic charges.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 323
Jump starting 323
Charging the battery flush affected area with water, and seek
medical help if necessary.
G Warning!
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
Never charge a battery while still installed in which is flammable and explosive. Keep
the vehicle unless the accessory battery flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is improper connection of jumper cables,
being used. Gases may escape during smoking, etc.
charging and could cause an explosion that
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can
may result in personal injury, paint damage or
result in it exploding, causing personal injury.
corrosion.
Read all instructions before proceeding.
An accessory battery charge unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is ! Vehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC:
Practical hints
available. It permits the charging of the
battery in its installed position. Contact an Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for otherwise seriously damage the automatic
information and availability. transmission which is not covered by the
ProCarManuals.com
Charge battery in accordance with the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.

separate instructions for the accessory
! Jump starting should only be performed
battery charger.
using the jump-start terminals located in
Have the battery charged at an authorized the engine compartment.
Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the Avoid repeated and lengthy starting
battery yourself, follow the operating attempts.
instructions for your charging device. Do not attempt to start the engine using a
Only use a battery charge unit with a battery quick-charge unit.
maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V. If the engine does not run after several
X Charge battery in accordance with the unsuccessful starting attempts, have it
instructions of the battery charger checked at the nearest authorized
manufacturer. Mercedes-Benz Center.
Excessive unburned fuel generated by
repeated failed starting attempts may
Jump starting damage the catalytic converter and may
present a fire risk.
G Warning! Make sure the jumper cables do not have
Failure to follow these directions will cause loose or missing insulation.
damage to the electronic components, and Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
can lead to a battery explosion and severe any other metal part while the other end is
injury or death. still attached to a battery.
Never lean over batteries while connecting or If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
jump starting. You might get injured. started with jumper cables and the fully
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not charged battery of another vehicle or an
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, equivalent starter pack. Observe the
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately following:
RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 324
324 Jump starting
of the other vehicle, provide jump start RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
power by an external battery or starter not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
pack. that move when an engine is started or
RJump starting should only be performed running.
when the engine and catalytic converter RShould the battery be drained completely,
are cold. let the donating power source charge the
RDo not jump start the engine or charge the vehicle for several minutes before
battery if the battery is frozen. Let the reattempting the starting process.
battery thaw out first. The jump-start contacts are located in the
ROnly jump start from batteries with the engine compartment on the passenger side.
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
with a more powerful battery could damage X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Practical hints
the vehicle’s electrical system. Such X Engage the parking brake.

damage will not be covered by the X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P (manual transmission to
ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient Neutral).
ProCarManuals.com
cross-section and insulated terminal X Open the hood (Y page 224).

clamps.
Position B represents the charged battery of X Connect positive terminal ; of charged

another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. battery B with positive terminal = with a
X Slide cover : from positive terminal = in jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive
direction of arrow. terminal ; of charged battery B first.
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
! Never invert the terminal connections! battery B and run at idle speed.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 325
Towing the vehicle 325
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged vehicle. You could otherwise seriously

battery B with negative terminal A with damage the automatic transmission
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to which is not covered by the Mercedes-
negative terminal ? of charged battery Benz Limited Warranty.
B first. RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the Towing with sling-type equipment over
discharged battery and run at idle speed. bumpy roads will damage radiator and
You can now turn on the electrical supports.
consumers. Do not switch on the RTowing of the vehicle should only be
headlamps under any circumstances. done using the properly installed towing
X Remove the jumper cables from negative eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow
terminals ? and A first. rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis,
X Remove the jumper cables from positive frame or suspension parts.
Practical hints
terminals ; and =.
G Warning!
You can now switch on the headlamps.
With the engine not running, there is no power
X Slide cover : from positive terminal =
assistance for the brake and steering
ProCarManuals.com
back. systems. In this case, it is important to keep

X Have the battery checked at the nearest in mind that a considerably higher degree of
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
Towing the vehicle ! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or

Safety notes diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
be transported with all wheels off the ground ! Do not use the towing eye bolt for
using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
equipment. This method is preferable to other If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
types of towing.
i If the battery is disconnected or
! To prevent damage during transport, do discharged
not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
suspension parts.
switch
If circumstances do not permit the
RVehicles with automatic transmission:
recommended towing methods, the vehicle
may be towed with all wheels on the ground the automatic transmission will remain in
or front axle raised (except vehicles with park position P
4MATIC) only so far as necessary to have the For more information see “Battery”
vehicle moved to a safe location where the (Y page 321) or “Jump starting”
recommended towing methods can be (Y page 323).
employed. Vehicles with automatic transmission: For
! Before towing the vehicle observe the information on manually unlocking the gear
following instructions: selector lever, see (Y page 311).
RVehicles with automatic transmission
and/or 4MATIC: Do not tow-start the
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 326
326 Towing the vehicle
Installing towing eye bolt

Depending on whether you are towing a
vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
which are located behind covers on each
bumper.
The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
vehicle tool kit, located underneath the trunk
floor (Y page 268).
X Take the vehicle tool kit out of the trunk.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
Removing cover in front bumper arrow.
Practical hints
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole

for the towing eye bolt.
Fixing towing eye bolt

ProCarManuals.com
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the

arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
for the towing eye bolt.
Example illustration front bumper
Removing cover in rear bumper X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so
equipped, the wheel wrench from the
G Warning! vehicle tool kit (Y page 268).
In order to avoid possible serious burns or X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into
injury, use extreme caution when removing threaded hole to its stop.
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
is extremely hot.
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
clockwise.
or
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
towing eye bolt.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 327
Towing the vehicle 327
Removing towing eye bolt X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift

the manual transmission into the neutral
X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
position (no gear selected).
counterclockwise.
or
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel the automatic transmission into neutral
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit. position N.
X Release the brake pedal.
X If engaged, release the parking brake.
Towing with all wheels on the ground X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
G Warning! (Y page 93).

If circumstances require towing the vehicle ! The vehicle may be towed only for
Practical hints
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
a tow bar if: speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
Rthe engine will not run
i While being towed with the hazard
ProCarManuals.com
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system warning flasher in use, use the combination
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
or in the vehicle’s electrical system Only the selected turn signal will operate.
This is necessary to adequately control the Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
towed vehicle. warning flasher will operate again.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
Towing with front axle raised
starter switch position 2.
If the SmartKey is left in the starter switch ! The vehicle may be towed only for
position 0 for an extended period of time, it distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a
can no longer be turned in the switch. In this speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h).
case, the steering is locked. To unlock,
remove SmartKey from starter switch and ! Vehicles with 4MATIC: Do not tow with
reinsert. one axle raised. Doing so could damage the
transfer case, which is not covered by the
G Warning! Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
With the engine not running, there is no power All wheels must be on or off the ground.
assistance for the brake and steering Observe instructions for towing the vehicle
systems. In this case, it is important to keep with all wheels on the ground.
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
X Make sure the ignition is switched on.
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
brake pedal and keep it pressed.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 328
328 Fuses
X Vehicles with manual transmission: Shift components and/or systems. Have the cause
the manual transmission into the neutral determined and remedied by an authorized
position (no gear selected). Mercedes-Benz Center.
or
A blown fuse must be replaced by an
X Vehicles with automatic transmission: Shift
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
the automatic transmission into neutral
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
position N.
the amperage recommended in the fuse
X Release the brake pedal.
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
X If engaged, release the parking brake. to advise you on this subject.
X Switch off the automatic central locking
i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
(Y page 135). Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
X Switch off the ignition and leave the Benz Center.
Practical hints
SmartKey in the starter switch.

If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
cause determined and rectified by an
(Y page 93). authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
! Vehicles without 4MATIC: The fuse chart is located in the trunk with the
ProCarManuals.com
Because the ESP® operates automatically, vehicle tool kit (Y page 268). The fuse chart
the engine and ignition must be shut off explains the fuse allocation and fuse
(SmartKey in starter switch position 0 or amperages.
1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in
position 0 or 1) when the vehicle is being
towed with the front axle raised. Before replacing fuses
Active braking action through the ESP® X Engage the parking brake.
may otherwise seriously damage the brake X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
system which is not covered by the park position P (manual transmission to
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Neutral).
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
X Turn off the engine.
Fuses
Introduction switch.
The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
switch off malfunctioning power circuits. driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
If a fuse is blown, the components and position 0, same as with the SmartKey
systems secured by that fuse will stop removed from the starter switch). The
operating. driver’s door then can be closed again.
G Warning!
Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz Fuse box in passenger compartment
with the specified amperage for the system in
question and do not attempt to repair or ! Do not use sharp objects such as a
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire, box cover or the dashboard.
and/or cause damage to electrical
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 329
Fuses 329
Fuse box in engine compartment

X Open the hood.
X Open the driver’s door.

X Opening: Using your hands, pull fuse box
Practical hints
cover : in direction of arrow = and
remove in direction of arrow ;. X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into the fuse box cover.
opening at the front. X Opening: Release wire ; from fuse box
ProCarManuals.com
X Press fuse box cover : back on until it cover.

engages. X Release clamps :.
X Remove fuse box cover.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise, X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box positioned properly.
and possibly impair fuse operation. X Press fuse box cover down and secure with
clamps :.
X Fasten wire ; on fuse box cover.
Fuse box in trunk
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,
moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Close the hood after checking or replacing
fuses.
X Open the trunk.

X Opening: Turn lock : clockwise.
X Pull cover ; downward in direction of
arrow.
X Closing: Press cover ; backward.
X Turn lock : counterclockwise.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 330
330
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 331
331

Parts service ..................................... 332
Warranty coverage ........................... 332
Identification labels .......................... 332
Vehicle specification C 250
(204.052) ........................................... 334
Vehicle specification C 250 Sport
(204.052) ........................................... 334
4MATIC (204.085) ............................. 335
4MATIC Sport (204.085) .................. 336
(204.054) ........................................... 337
Technical data
ProCarManuals.com
(204.054) ........................................... 338

4MATIC (204.081) ............................. 339
4MATIC Sport (204.081) .................. 340
(204.056) ........................................... 341
(204.056) ........................................... 342
4MATIC (204.087) ............................. 343
Vehicle specification C 63 AMG
(204.077) ........................................... 343
Rims and tires ................................... 344
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 349
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 332
332 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty

REmission System Warranty
i This Operator’s Manual describes all REmission Performance Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
purchase. Please be aware that your Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
features described in this manual. Control Systems Warranty
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
Parts service
Replacement parts and accessories are
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Parts required for maintenance and repair available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
work. In addition, strategically located parts Center.
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and

ProCarManuals.com
reliable parts service.

Loss of Service and Warranty
More than 300 000 different parts for Information booklet
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Should you lose your Service and Warranty
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has Information booklet, have an authorized
been specifically developed, manufactured or Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz replacement. It will be mailed to you.
vehicles.
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts
Identification labels
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
accordance with the terms of the following
warranties:
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 333
Identification labels 333
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can specific to each vehicle and may vary from
be found data shown in the illustration. Refer to
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
B-pillar
Rembossed underneath the carpet in the
front passenger footwell (Y page 333)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 333)
Technical data
X Move the front passenger seat backward
as far as possible (Y page 80).
ProCarManuals.com
X Fold carpet ? backward.

VIN A is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
; VIN
= Paintwork code
B Emission control information label,

includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
C VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
D Engine number (engraved on engine)
; VIN
= Paintwork code i When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine number.
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 334
334 Vehicle specification C 250 Sport (204.052)
Vehicle specification C 250 (204.052) Electrical system C 250
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all electrode gap
special bodies and special equipment.
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
i The C 250 is available in Canada only.
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine C 250
Engine, type 272 Main dimensions C 250
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, Overall vehicle 182.3 in (4 630 mm)

gasoline injection length
No. of cylinders 6 Overall vehicle 79.5 in (2 020 mm)

width22
Technical data
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)

Overall vehicle 56.9 in (1 444 mm)
ProCarManuals.com
Stroke 2.69 in (68.40 mm) height

Total piston 152.3 cu in Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm)
displacement (2 496 cm3)
Track, front 60.7 in (1 541 mm)
Compression 11.4:1
ratio Track, rear 60.8 in (1 544 mm)
Output acc. to 201 hp/6 100 rpm Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m)
SAE J 134921 (150 kW/6 100 rpm)
Maximum torque 181 lb-ft/ Weights C 250
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 900 - 5 500 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
(245 Nm/
2 900 - 5 500 rpm) Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 (204.052)
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Electrical system C 250 Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Alternator 14 V/150 A
i The C 250 Sport is available in Canada
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW only.
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
21 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
22 Exterior rear view mirrors folded out.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 335
Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC (204.085) 335
Engine C 250 Sport Main dimensions C 250 Sport

Engine, type 272 Overall vehicle 182.8 in (4 630 mm)
length
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection Overall vehicle 79.5 in (2 020 mm)
width24
No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
height
Stroke 2.69 in (68.40 mm)
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm)
Total piston 152.3 cu in
Track, rear 59.6 in (1 514 mm)
Compression 11.4:1
ratio Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m)
Technical data
Output acc. to 201 hp/6 100 rpm
ProCarManuals.com
SAE J 134923 (150 kW/6 100 rpm) Weights C 250 Sport

Maximum torque 181 lb-ft/ Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 900 - 5 500 rpm
(245 Nm/ Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
2 900 - 5 500 rpm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC
speed (204.085)
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Electrical system C 250 Sport
i The C 250 4MATIC is available in Canada
Alternator 14 V/150 A only.
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Engine C 250 4MATIC
Battery 12 V/74 Ah Engine, type 272
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33 Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) gasoline injection
electrode gap No. of cylinders 6
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 336
336 Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC Sport (204.085)
Engine C 250 4MATIC Main dimensions C 250 4MATIC

Compression 11.4:1
ratio
Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m)
SAE J 134925 (150 kW/6 100 rpm)
Weights C 250 4MATIC
Maximum torque 181 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 900 - 5 500 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
(245 Nm/
2 900 - 5 500 rpm) Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)

Technical data
speed Vehicle specification C 250 4MATIC

Sport (204.085)
ProCarManuals.com
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5

Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm The quoted data apply only to the standard
Electrical system C 250 4MATIC
Alternator 14 V/150 A i The C 250 4MATIC Sport is available in
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Canada only.
Battery 12 V/74 Ah Engine C 250 4MATIC Sport

Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33 Engine, type 272
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
electrode gap gasoline injection
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
Main dimensions C 250 4MATIC
Overall vehicle 182.8 in (4 630 mm) displacement (2 496 cm3)
length
Compression 11.4:1
ratio
width26
SAE J 134927 (150 kW/6 100 rpm)
height
26 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 337
Vehicle specification C 300 (204.054) 337
Engine C 250 4MATIC Sport Weights C 250 4MATIC Sport

Maximum torque 181 lb-ft/ Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 900 - 5 500 rpm
(245 Nm/ Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
2 900 - 5 500 rpm)
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Vehicle specification C 300 (204.054)
speed
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 The quoted data apply only to the standard
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Electrical system C 250 4MATIC Sport Engine C 300
Alternator 14 V/150 A Engine, type 272
Technical data
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
ProCarManuals.com
gasoline injection
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
No. of cylinders 6
Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap Stroke 3.23 in (82.10 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Total piston 182.8 cu in
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) displacement (2 996 cm3)
Compression 11.3:1
Main dimensions C 250 4MATIC Sport ratio
Overall vehicle 182.8 in (4 630 mm) Output acc. to 228 hp/6 000 rpm
length SAE J 134929 (170 kW/6 000 rpm)
Overall vehicle 79.5 in (2 020 mm) Maximum torque 221 lb-ft/
width28 acc. to SAE J 1349 2 500 - 5 000 rpm
(300 Nm/
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 449 mm) 2 500 - 5 000 rpm)
height
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) speed
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm) Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Track, rear 59.6 in (1 514 mm) Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm

Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 338
Electrical system C 300 Vehicle specification C 300 Sport

(204.054)
Alternator 14 V/150 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW The quoted data apply only to the standard
Battery 12 V/74 Ah Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
i The C 300 Sport is available in the USA
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) only.
electrode gap
Engine C 300 Sport
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) Engine, type 272
Main dimensions C 300 gasoline injection
Technical data
Overall vehicle 182.8 in (4 630 mm) No. of cylinders 6

ProCarManuals.com
length
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
width30
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 449 mm)31
height
56.9 in (1 444 mm)32
Compression 11.3:1
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) ratio
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)31 Output acc. to 228 hp/6 000 rpm
SAE J 134933 (170 kW/6 000 rpm)
60.7 in (1 541 mm)32
Track, rear 59.6 in (1 514 mm)31 acc. to SAE J 1349 2 500 - 5 000 rpm
(300 Nm/
60.8 in (1 544 mm)32
2 500 - 5 000 rpm)
speed
Weights C 300 Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
30 Exterior
31 Canada only.
32 USA only.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 339
Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC (204.081) 339
Electrical system C 300 Sport Engine C 300 4MATIC

Alternator 14 V/150 A Engine, type 272
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
No. of cylinders 6
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
electrode gap Stroke 3.23 in (82.10 mm)
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Total piston 182.8 cu in
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) displacement (2 996 cm3)
Compression 11.3:1
Main dimensions C 300 Sport ratio
Technical data
ProCarManuals.com
length SAE J 134935 (170 kW/6 000 rpm)

width34 acc. to SAE J 1349 2 500 - 5 000 rpm
(300 Nm/
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 449 mm) 2 500 - 5 000 rpm)
height
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) speed
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm) Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm) Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm
Electrical system C 300 4MATIC
Weights C 300 Sport Alternator 14 V/150 A
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Battery 12 V/74 Ah
Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
(204.081) electrode gap
The quoted data apply only to the standard Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)

Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 340
340 Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC Sport (204.081)
Main dimensions C 300 4MATIC Engine C 300 4MATIC Sport

Overall vehicle 182.3 in (4 630 mm) No. of cylinders 6
length
Bore 3.46 in (88.00 mm)
width36
Overall vehicle 57.0 in (1 449 mm)37 displacement (2 996 cm3)
height
56.9 in (1 445 mm)38 Compression 11.3:1
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) ratio
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)37 Output acc. to 228 hp/6 000 rpm
SAE J 134939 (170 kW/6 000 rpm)
60.7 in (1 541 mm)38
Technical data
Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm)37 acc. to SAE J 1349 2 500 - 5 000 rpm
(300 Nm/
ProCarManuals.com
60.8 in (1 544 mm)38

2 500 - 5 000 rpm)
speed
Weights C 300 4MATIC Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm
Electrical system C 300 4MATIC Sport
Vehicle specification C 300 4MATIC Alternator 14 V/150 A
Sport (204.081)
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
The quoted data apply only to the standard Battery 12 V/74 Ah
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
special bodies and special equipment. Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
i The C 300 4MATIC Sport is available in electrode gap
the USA only. Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
Engine C 300 4MATIC Sport
Engine, type 272
gasoline injection
36 Exterior
37 Canada only.
38 USA only.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 341
Vehicle specification C 350 (204.056) 341
Main dimensions C 300 4MATIC Sport Engine C 350

Overall vehicle 182.3 in (4 630 mm) Compression 10.7:1
length ratio
width40 SAE J 134941 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
height acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/
Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm) 2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm) Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm) speed
Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m) Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Technical data
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm
ProCarManuals.com
Weights C 300 4MATIC Sport

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Electrical system C 350
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Alternator 14 V/150 A

Vehicle specification C 350 (204.056) Battery 12 V/74 Ah

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all electrode gap
i The C 350 is available in Canada only. tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
Engine C 350
Main dimensions C 350
Engine, type 272
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, length
gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6
width42
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) height
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 342
Main dimensions C 350 Engine C 350 Sport

Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm) Maximum torque 258 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm) (350 Nm/
Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m) 2 400 - 5 000 rpm)
Weights C 350 speed
Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm
Electrical system C 350 Sport

(204.056) Alternator 14 V/150 A
Technical data

ProCarManuals.com

vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Battery 12 V/74 Ah
special bodies and special equipment. Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
i The C 350 Sport is available in the USA Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
only. electrode gap
Engine C 350 Sport
Engine, type 272
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, Main dimensions C 350 Sport
gasoline injection
No. of cylinders 6 length
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) Overall vehicle 79.2 in (2 012 mm)
width44
height
Compression 10.7:1
ratio Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm)
SAE J 134943 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 343
Vehicle specification C 63 AMG (204.077) 343
Weights C 350 Sport Electrical system C 350 4MATIC

Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Alternator 14 V/150 A
Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg) Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Battery 12 V/74 Ah
Vehicle specification C 350 4MATIC Spark plugs, type Bosch Y 7 MPP33
(204.087)
The quoted data apply only to the standard electrode gap
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
i The C 350 4MATIC is available in Canada Main dimensions C 350 4MATIC
only.
Technical data
Engine C 350 4MATIC
ProCarManuals.com
length
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine, width46
No. of cylinders 6 height
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm) Wheelbase 108.7 in (2 760 mm)
Stroke 3.39 in (86.00 mm) Track, front 60.4 in (1 533 mm)
Total piston 213.5 cu in Track, rear 60.5 in (1 536 mm)

displacement (3 498 cm3) Turning circle 35.4 ft (10.8 m)
Compression 10.7:1
ratio Weights C 350 4MATIC
Output acc. to 268 hp/6 000 rpm Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
SAE J 134945 (200 kW/6 000 rpm)
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 400 - 5 000 rpm
(350 Nm/ Vehicle specification C 63 AMG
2 400 - 5 000 rpm) (204.077)
speed The quoted data apply only to the standard
Firing order 1-4-3-6-2-5 Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Poly-V-belt 2 401 mm special bodies and special equipment.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 344
344 Rims and tires
Engine C 63 AMG Main dimensions C 63 AMG

length
width48
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 4.02 in (102.20 mm)
height
Compression 11.3:1
ratio
Technical data
Weights C 63 AMG
ProCarManuals.com
SAE J 134947 (336 kW/6 800 rpm) Roof load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
Maximum torque 443 lb-ft/5 000 rpm Trunk load max. 220 lb (100 kg)
acc. to SAE J 1349 (600 Nm/5 000 rpm)
speed Rims and tires
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 Notes
Poly-V-belt 2 360 mm ! Only use tires which have been tested and
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
Electrical system C 63 AMG to provide best possible performance in
conjunction with the driving safety systems
Alternator 14 V/180 A on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
Starter motor 12 V/1.7 kW ESP®. Tires specially developed for your
vehicle and tested and approved by
Battery 12 V/95 Ah Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding
Spark plugs, type NGK ILZKAR 7A10 the following on the tire’s sidewall:
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
Spark plugs, 0.039 in (1.0 mm) equipment tires
electrode gap
Using tires other than those approved by
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm) is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 345
Rims and tires 345
! Using tires other than those approved by with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental available as standard or optional factory
effects, such as equipment, but can be purchased from an
Rpoor handling characteristics authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Rincreased noise Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
approved for your vehicle model may
Rincreased fuel consumption require the purchase of rims of the
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by recommended size for use with these
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
dimensional variations and different tire and the standard or optional factory-
deformation characteristics that could equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
cause them to come into contact with the your vehicle. For more information contact
vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
tires or the vehicle may be the result.
i Further information on tires and rims is
Technical data
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
ProCarManuals.com
Center. The Tire and Loading Information

placard with the recommended tire
inflation pressures for cold tires is located
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
tire inflation pressure information for
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
less than the maximum loaded vehicle
condition can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
checked regularly and should only be
adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
For information on recommended tire
inflation pressure and supplemental tire
inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 230).
i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
be equipped
Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
each axle (left and right)
Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires, or
all-season tires etc.
i The following pages also list the approved

rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 346
346 Rims and tires
Same size tires
Model C 25049
C 250 4MATIC49
16" wheels Rims (light alloy) 7 J x 16 H2
Wheel offset 1.69 in (43 mm)
All-season tires50 205/55 R16 91H M+S
Winter tires50,51 205/55 R16 91H M+Si
Model C 30052 C 35049

C 300 4MATIC52 C 350 4MATIC49
17" wheels Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2 7.5 J x 17 H2
Technical data
Wheel offset 1.85 in (47 mm) 1.85 in (47 mm)

ProCarManuals.com
All-season tires50 225/45 R17 91H M+S —
Winter tires50,51 225/45 R17 91H 225/45 R17 91H

M+Si M+Si
Model C 63 AMG
18" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2
Winter tires50,51 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load) M+Si
49 Canada only.
50 Radial-plytires.
51 Not available as factory equipment.
52 USA only.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 347
Rims and tires 347
Mixed size tires
Model C 250 Sport53

C 250 4MATIC Sport53
C 30053
C 300 Sport54
C 300 4MATIC53
17" wheels Front axle Rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2
Rear axle Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2
All-season tires55,56 245/40 R17 91H M+S
Technical data
ProCarManuals.com
Model C 30053
C 300 4MATIC53
C 350 Sport54
C 350 4MATIC53
17" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 7.5 J x 17 H2
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 17 H2
All-season tires55,56 245/40 R17 91H M+S
53 Canada only.
54 USA only.
55 Radial-ply tires.
56 Must not be used with snow chains.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 348
348 Rims and tires
Model C 300 Sport57

C 35058
C 350 Sport57
C 350 4MATIC58
18" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2
All-season tires59 225/40 R18 92H XL (Extra Load)
M+S
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 18 H2
All-season tires59,60 255/35 R18 94H XL (Extra Load)
Technical data
M+S
ProCarManuals.com
Model C 63 AMG
18" wheels Front axle AMG rims (light alloy) 8 J x 18 H2
Summer tires59 235/40 ZR18 95Y XL (Extra Load)
Rear axle AMG rims (light alloy) 9 J x 18 H2
Summer tires59,60 255/35 ZR18 94Y XL (Extra Load)
57 USA only.
58 Canada only.
59 Radial-ply tires.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 349
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 349
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
Model C 250 (all models)61 C 30061 C 63 AMG

C 30062 C 300 4MATIC61
C 300 4MATIC62 C 300 Sport62
C 350 (all models)
Technical data
Rim (steel) 3.5 B x 16 H2 3.5 B x 17 H2 3.5 B x 18
ProCarManuals.com
Wheel offset 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm) 0.79 in (20 mm)
Minispare tire63 T 125/90 R16 98M T 125/80 R17 99M T 125/70 R18 99M
Recommended 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar) 61 psi (4.2 bar)
tire inflation
pressure
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
61 Canada only.
62 USA only.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 350
350 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with C 25064 8.5 US qt (8.0 l) Approved engine
oil filter C 250 Sport64 oils
C 300
C 300 Sport65
C 350
C 250 4MATIC64 7.4 US qt (7.0 l)
C 300 4MATIC
C 350 4MATIC64
Technical data
C 63 AMG66 9.0 US qt (8.5 l)

ProCarManuals.com
Manual C 25064 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) MB Manual

transmission C 250 Sport64 Transmission Oil
C 300 1.6 US qt (1.5 l)

C 300 Sport65
Automatic C 25064 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) MB Automatic
transmission C 250 Sport64 Transmission Fluid
C 250 4MATIC64 10.3 US qt (9.7 l)

C 300 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)

C 300 Sport65
C 35064
C 350 Sport65
C 300 4MATIC 10.5 US qt (9.9 l)
C 350 4MATIC64
C 63 AMG67 9.6 US qt (9.1 l)
64 Canada only.
65 USA only.
66 Engine with oil cooler.
67 Automatic transmission with oil cooler.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 351

lubricants, etc.
Front axle C 250 4MATIC64 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) Hypoid gear oil
C 250 4MATIC Sport64 (SAE 85W-90)
C 300 4MATIC 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

C 350 4MATIC64
Rear axle C 25064 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) Hypoid gear oil
C 250 Sport64 (SAE 85W-90)
C 250 4MATIC64 1.2 US qt (1.1 l)

C 300
Technical data
C 300 Sport65
ProCarManuals.com
C 300 4MATIC
C 35064
C 350 Sport65
C 350 4MATIC64
C 63 AMG 1.3 US qt (1.2 l) Fuchs Titan
EG 5010 D
Power All models approx. 0.9 US qt (0.8 l) MB Power Steering
steering Fluid (Chevron
Texaco PSF 9109)
Brake system All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling All models, approx. 5.1 US qt (4.8 l) MB 325.0
system except C 63 AMG Anticorrosion/
Antifreeze
C 63 AMG approx. 12.4 US qt (11.7 l)
64 Canada only.
65 USA only.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 352

lubricants, etc.
Fuel tank All models 17.4 US gal (66.0 l) Premium unleaded
gasoline (Minimum
Fuel tank All models, approx. 2.1 US gal (8.0 l) Posted Octane 91
reserve except C 63 AMG [Avg. of
C 63 AMG approx. 3.7 US gal (14.0 l) 96 RON/86 MON])
C 300, all models
(with automatic
transmission):
Flexible Fuel
Vehicles (identified
by a label reading
Premium
gasoline or E85
Technical data
only! on the fuel

ProCarManuals.com
filler flap).
Alternative fuel:
Ethanol fuel (E85)
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer C 25064 4.2 US qt (4.0 l) MB Windshield
system C 250 Sport64 Washer
Concentrate68
C 250 4MATIC64
(Y page 358)
C 250 4MATIC Sport64 Washer fluid mixing
C 300 3.7 US qt (3.5 l) ratio (Y page 358)
C 300 Sport65
C 350
C 350 Sport65
Washer C 300 4MATIC 6.3 US qt (6.0 l)
system and C 300 4MATIC Sport65
headlamp
C 350 4MATIC64
cleaning
system C 63 AMG
64 Canada only.
68 Mixedwith water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.
65 USA only.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 353
Approved engine oils Model Engine, MB sheet

Engine oils are specifically tested for their type number
suitability in our engines and durability for our C 300 4MATIC 272 229.5
service intervals. Therefore, only use Sport70
approved engine oils and oil filters required
for vehicles with the Maintenance System. C 35069 272 229.5
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil
C 350 Sport70 272 229.5
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). C 350 4MATIC69 272 229.5
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a C 63 AMG 156 229.571
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System, or
changing of oil and oil filter at change i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
intervals longer than those called for by the outside of oil containers.
Maintenance System will result in engine or
Technical data
emission control system damage not Viscosity grades for engine oils
ProCarManuals.com

Warranty. Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
Please follow Maintenance System according to the lowest air temperature
recommendations for scheduled oil expected before the next oil change.
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
Use the table below to determine the
MB sheet number.
Model Engine, MB sheet
type number
C 25069 272 229.5
C 250 Sport69 272 229.5 Engine oil additives

C 250 4MATIC69 272 229.5 ! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
C 250 4MATIC 272 229.5 malfunctions resulting from blending oil
Sport69 additives are not covered by the Mercedes-
C 300 272 229.5 Benz Limited Warranty.
C 300 Sport70 272 229.5

C 300 4MATIC 272 229.5
69 Canada only.
70 USA only.
71 Restriction: Only SAE 0W-40/SAE 5W-40 engine oils may be used.
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 354
Air conditioning refrigerant ! To maintain the engine’s durability and

performance, premium unleaded gasoline
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG must be used.
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning
system. If premium unleaded gasoline is not
available and low octane gasoline is used,
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based follow these precautions:
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
system will occur.
with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
as possible.
Brake fluid
RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
G Warning! acceleration.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of RDo not exceed an engine speed of
the brake fluid is continuously reduced 3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
through the absorption of moisture from the light load such as two persons and no
Technical data
atmosphere. luggage.
ProCarManuals.com
Under extremely strenuous operating

conditions, this moisture content can lead to
RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
reducing the system’s efficiency. is fully loaded or operating in
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced
mountainous terrain.
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance
Booklet for replacement interval.
Fuel requirements
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes-
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
Benz Center will provide you with additional
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
information.
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
Premium unleaded gasoline known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
G Warning! unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
It burns violently and can cause serious TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one
personal injury. of these oxygenates to gasoline does not
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%.
materials near gasoline! The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not
Turn off the engine before refueling. exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents.
Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not
inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10%
contact. Extinguish all smoking materials. ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
used.
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your These blends must also meet all other fuel
health. requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 355
Flexible Fuel Vehicles If in spite of these recommendations the

engine does not perform properly, adding
All models of the C 300 with automatic more gasoline (at least 3 gallons [12 liters])
transmission are Flexible Fuel Vehicles. to the fuel may improve the engine behavior.
Flexible Fuel Vehicles are identified by a label
reading Premium gasoline or E85 only! on Fuel consumption
the fuel filler flap.
These vehicles are designed to operate on E85 fuel contains less energy per gallon than
premium unleaded gasoline or ethanol fuel gasoline. To ensure that engine performance
(E85), or on any mixture of these two. Ethanol with ethanol fuel is similar to that when using
fuel (E85) is a mixture of approximately 85% gasoline, the engine must burn more ethanol
ethanol and 15% unleaded gasoline. fuel. As a result, it is to be expected that the
fuel consumption will increase when using
G Warning! E85 compared to gasoline operation.
Ethanol fuel (E85) and its fumes are highly
flammable, poisonous and burn easily. Maintenance
Technical data
Ethanol fuel can cause serious injuries if
Please inform your authorized Mercedes-
ignited or if you come into contact with it or
ProCarManuals.com
Benz Center if you use or have used E85 fuel

inhale fumes of it. Avoid inhalation of ethanol
when your vehicle is delivered for
fumes and skin contact with ethanol.
maintenance or repairs.
Extinguish all open flames before refueling.
Never smoke or create sparks close to
ethanol.
Cold weather performance
It is possible that starting times will
Switching fuels significantly increase at temperatures below
32‡ (0†). At low temperatures the use of a
For best performance and driveability it is
block heater is recommended (contact an
recommended to use either one or the other
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for further
fuel. A refueling pattern that alternates
information). Rough idling may also be
between the two different fuels should be
experienced at such temperatures before the
avoided if possible.
engine is fully warmed up.
When switching fuels, make sure:
! E85 fuel is unsuitable for use when
RFuel level is below half full.
ambient temperatures fall below 14‡
RFuel level is above reserve (fuel tank (-10†).
reserve warning lamp is not lit).
RAmount of added fuel is more than Hot weather performance
5 gallons (20 liters). At ambient temperatures above 95‡ (35†)
RIgnition is off during refill. start times may increase and be
RImmediately after refueling engine is accompanied by a rough idle following the
started and operated for at least 5 minutes. start.
These precautions and recommendations are

supposed to prevent any difficulties when Gasoline additives
starting and operating the engine which
otherwise may be experienced before the A major concern among engine
engine has fully adapted to the different fuel. manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 356
the use of quality gasoline containing The cooling system was filled at the factory
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon with a coolant providing freeze protection to
deposits. approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
After an extended period of using fuels protection.
without such additives carbon deposits can ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
build up, especially on the intake valves and Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
in the combustion area, leading to engine Antifreeze separately from each other,
performance problems such as: could cause engine damage not covered by
RWarm-up hesitation the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
RUnstable idle If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡
RKnocking/pinging (-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the
pressurized cooling system is reached at
RMisfire
approximately 266‡ (130†).
RPower loss The coolant solution must be used year round
In areas where carbon deposits may be to provide the necessary corrosion protection
Technical data
encountered due to lack of availability of and increase boil-over protection. Refer to

ProCarManuals.com
gasoline which contains these additives, the the Maintenance Booklet for replacement
use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is interval.
recommended. Coolant system design and coolant used
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center determine the replacement interval. The
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a replacement interval published in the
listing of approved products. Follow Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
directions on the product label. MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
of equal specification are used to renew the
This only results in unnecessary cost and may
coolant concentration or bring it back up to
be harmful to the engine operation.
the proper level.
! Damage or malfunction resulting from For information on other Mercedes-Benz
poor fuel quality or from blending additional approved products of equal specification,
fuel additives other than those tested and contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes- To provide important corrosion protection,
Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned the solution must be at least 50%
or Extended Limited Warranties. anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]).
Coolants
If you use a solution that is more than 55%
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection
anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides: to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
RCorrosion protection temperature will increase due to the lower
heat transfer capability of the solution.
RFreeze protection Therefore, do not use more than this amount
RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
point) If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 357
system checked for signs of leakage). Please such engines be specifically formulated to
make sure the mixture is in accordance with protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
label instructions. such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
The water in the cooling system must meet result in a significantly shortened service life.
minimum requirements, which are usually Therefore, the following product is strongly
satisfied by normal drinking water. recommended for use in your vehicle:
If you are not sure about the water quality, MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Before the start of the winter season (or once
Center. a year in hot southern regions), you should
have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
Anticorrosion/antifreeze concentration checked.
Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum The coolant is also regularly checked each
parts. The use of aluminum components in time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
motor vehicle engines necessitates that Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
Technical data
ProCarManuals.com
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system All models, 2.5 US qt (2.4 l) 2.8 US qt (2.6 l)
except C 63 AMG
C 63 AMG 6.2 US qt (5.85 l) 6.8 US qt (6.4 l)
Z
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 358
Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed

ProCarManuals.com
washer solvent/antifreeze for

temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 359
ProCarManuals.com 359
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 360
360
ProCarManuals.com
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 361
Service and Literature

Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
ProCarManuals.com
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely

careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time July 17, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.
204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 362
ProCarManuals.com
É2045845381zËÍ
2045845381
Order no. 6515 0712 13 Part no. 204 584 5381 Edition B 2010

Mercedes Benz C Class 2010 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

Mercedes Benz C Class 2010 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Mercedes Benz C Class 2010 Owner Manual

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

204_AKB; 5; 23, en-US 2009-07-16T17:54:06+02:00 - Seite 1

d2ureepe, Version: 2.11.8.1

Symbols YY This continuation symbol marks a

RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Our company and staff congratulate you on

RPlease follow the recommendations

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 221

Practical hints ................................... 267

Technical data ................................... 331

1, 2, 3 ... Side impact ...................................... 41

Emergency calls (Telephone) ......... 173 see Vehicle specification

System settings ............................. 147 Battery, Vehicle ................................. 321

One-touch gearshifting .................. 112 Replacing bulbs ............................. 314

Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75 COMAND system

LATCH-type) ..................................... 58 Trip ................................................ 121

Resume function ............................ 183 Messages in the multifunction

Through standing water ................. 257

Electrical system Messages in the multifunction

Tele Aid .......................................... 212 Express operation

Power steering fluid ....................... 351 G

display ........................................... 272

Delayed shut-off ............................ 134 Instrument panel

Height adjustment ISOFIX (Child seat anchors –

Messages in the multifunction Front passenger front air bag off

M Advanced TPMS ............................. 277

Front passenger front air bag ........ 272

N Operating safety .................................. 22

Occupant distribution ....................... 251 Parking brake .................................... 105

Power assistance .............................. 255 Rear fog lamp

Practical hints ................................... 268 see Key, SmartKey

Satellite radio .................................... 152 Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73

Memory function .............................. 89 Spare wheel ....................................... 344

Sun visors .......................................... 208 Technical data (electrical system)

SOS button .................................... 213

Tire inflation pressure Tread depth ........................... 243, 252

Cleaning ......................................... 244 see Automatic transmission or

U C 250 Sport ................................... 334

Vehicle Warning sounds

Washer fluid ................................... 358

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.

Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC

Important notice for California retail Maintenance

malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered

contacting you in a timely manner should the Operating safety

Proper use of the vehicle Reporting safety defects

information on the label itself. Removing

This information helps, for example, to

Please check the Tele Aid subscription

Exterior view ....................................... 26

Function Page Function Page

Function Page Function Page

Multifunction steering wheel 29